Perhaps it might be expected that I should begin with a definition
of “philosophy”, but, rightly or wrongly, I do not propose
to do so. The definition of “philosophy” will vary according
to the philosophy we adopt; all that we can say to begin
with is that there are certain problems, which certain people
find interesting, and which do not, at least at present, belong
to any of the special sciences. These problems are all such as
to raise doubts concerning what commonly passes for knowledge;
and if the doubts are to be answered, it can only be by
means of a special study, to which we give the name “philosophy”.
Therefore the first step in defining “philosophy” is the
indication of these problems and doubts, which is also the
first step in the actual study of philosophy. There are some
among the traditional problems of philosophy that do not seem
to me to lend themselves to intellectual treatment, because they
transcend our cognitive powers; such problems I shall not
deal with. There are others, however, as to which, even if a
final solution is not possible at present, yet much can be done
to show the direction in which a solution is to be sought, and
the kind of solution that may in time prove possible.
Philosophy arises from an unusually obstinate attempt to
arrive at real knowledge. What passes for knowledge in ordinary
life suffers from three defects: it is cocksure, vague, and
self-contradictory. The first step towards philosophy consists
in becoming aware of these defects, not in order to rest content
with a lazy scepticism, but in order to substitute an
amended kind of knowledge which shall be tentative, precise,
and self-consistent. There is of course another quality which
we wish our knowledge to possess, namely comprehensiveness:
we wish the area of our knowledge to be as wide as possible.
But this is the business of science rather than of philosophy.
A man does not necessarily become a better philosopher through
knowing more scientific facts; it is principles and methods and
general conceptions that he should learn from science if philosophy
is what interests him. The philosopher’s work is, so
to speak, at the second remove from crude fact. Science tries
to collect facts into bundles by means of scientific laws; these
laws, rather than the original facts, are the raw material of
philosophy. Philosophy involves a criticism of scientific knowledge,
not from a point of view ultimately different from that
of science, but from a point of view less concerned with details
and more concerned with the harmony of the whole body of
special sciences.
The special sciences have all grown up by the use of notions
derived from common sense, such as things and their qualities,
space, time, and causation. Science itself has shown that none
of these common-sense notions will quite serve for the explanation
of the world; but it is hardly the province of any special
science to undertake the necessary reconstruction of fundamentals.
This must be the business of philosophy. I want to
say, to begin with, that I believe it to be a business of very
great importance. I believe that the philosophical errors in
common-sense beliefs not only produce confusion in science,
but also do harm in ethics and politics, in social institutions,
and in the conduct of everyday life. It will be no part of my
business, in this volume, to point out these practical effects of
a bad philosophy: my business will be purely intellectual. But
if I am right, the intellectual adventures which lie before us
have effects in many directions which seem, at first sight, quite
remote from our theme. The effect of our passions upon our
beliefs forms a favourite subject of modern psychologists; but
the converse effect, that of our beliefs upon our passions, also
exists, though it is not such as an old-fashioned intellectualist
psychology would have supposed. Although I shall not discuss
it, we shall do well to bear it in mind, in order to realise that
our discussions may have bearings upon matters lying outside
the sphere of pure intellect.
I mentioned a moment ago three defects in common beliefs,
namely, that they are cocksure, vague, and self-contradictory.
It is the business of philosophy to correct these defects so far
as it can, without throwing over knowledge altogether. To
be a good philosopher, a man must have a strong desire to
know, combined with great caution in believing that he knows;
he must also have logical acumen and the habit of exact thinking.
All these, of course, are a matter of degree. Vagueness,
in particular, belongs, in some degree, to all human thinking;
we can diminish it indefinitely, but we can never abolish
it wholly. Philosophy, accordingly, is a continuing activity,
not something in which we can achieve final perfection once for
all. In this respect, philosophy has suffered from its association
with theology. Theological dogmas are fixed, and are
regarded by the orthodox as incapable of improvement. Philosophers
have too often tried to produce similarly final systems:
they have not been content with the gradual approximations
that satisfied men of science. In this they seem to me
to have been mistaken. Philosophy should be piecemeal and
provisional like science; final truth belongs to heaven, not to
this world.
The three defects which I have mentioned are interconnected,
and by becoming aware of any one we may be led to recognise
the other two. I will illustrate all three by a few examples.
Let us take first the belief in common objects, such as tables
and chairs and trees. We all feel quite sure about these in ordinary
life, and yet our reasons for confidence are really very
inadequate. Naive common sense supposes that they are what
they appear to be, but that is impossible, since they do not appear
exactly alike to any two simultaneous observers; at least,
it is impossible if the object is a single thing, the same for all
observers. If we are going to admit that the object is not what
we see, we can no longer feel the same assurance that there is
an object; this is the first intrusion of doubt. However, we
shall speedily recover from this set-back, and say that of course
the object is “really” what physics says it is.1 Now physics
says that a table or a chair is “really” an incredibly vast system
of electrons and protons in rapid motion, with empty space in
between. This is all very well. But the physicist, like the
ordinary man, is dependent upon his senses for the existence
of the physical world. If you go up to him solemnly and say,
“would you be so kind as to tell me, as a physicist, what a chair
really is”, you will get a learned answer. But if you say, without
preamble: “Is there a chair there?” he will say: “Of
course there is; can’t you see it?” To this you ought to reply
in the negative. You ought to say, “No, I see certain patches
of colour, but I don’t see any electrons or protons, and you tell
me that they are what a chair consists of”. He may reply:
“Yes, but a large number of electrons and protons close together
look like a patch of colour”. What do you mean by
“look like”? you will then ask. He is ready with an answer.
He means that light-waves start from the electrons and protons
(or, more probably, are reflected by them from a source of
light), reach the eye, have a series of effects upon the rods
and cones, the optic nerve, and the brain, and finally produce
a sensation. But he has never seen an eye or an optic nerve
or a brain, any more than he has seen a chair; he has only
seen patches of colour which, he says, are what eyes “look
like.” That is to say, he thinks that the sensation you have
when (as you think) you see a chair, has a series of causes,
physical and psychological, but all of them, on his own showing,
lie essentially and forever outside experience. Nevertheless,
he pretends to base his science upon observation. Obviously
there is here a problem for the logician, a problem
belonging not to physics, but to quite another kind of study.
This is a first example of the way in which the pursuit of precision
destroys certainty.
1 I am not thinking here of the elementary physics to be found in a school
text-book; I am thinking of modern theoretical physics, more particularly as
regards the structure of atoms, as to which I shall have more to say in later
chapters.
The physicist believes that he infers his electrons and protons
from what he perceives. But the inference is never clearly
set forth in a logical chain, and, if it were, it might not look
sufficiently plausible to warrant much confidence. In actual
fact, the whole development from common-sense objects to
electrons and protons has been governed by certain beliefs,
seldom conscious, but existing in every natural man. These
beliefs are not unalterable, but they grow and develop like
a tree. We start by thinking that a chair is as it appears to be,
and is still there when we are not looking. But we find, by a
little reflection, that these two beliefs are incompatible. If the
chair is to persist independently of being seen by us, it must
be something other than the patch of colour we see, because
this is found to depend upon conditions extraneous to the chair,
such as how the light falls, whether we are wearing blue spectacles,
and so on. This forces the man of science to regard the
“real” chair as the cause (or an indispensable part of the cause)
of our sensations when we see the chair. Thus we are committed
to causation as an a priori belief without which we
should have no reason for supposing that there is a “real” chair
at all. Also, for the sake of permanence we bring in the notion
of substance: the “real” chair is a substance, or collection of
substances, possessed of permanence and the power to cause
sensations. This metaphysical belief has operated, more or
less unconsciously, in the inference from sensations to electrons
and protons. The philosopher must drag such beliefs into the
light of day, and see whether they still survive. Often it will
be found that they die on exposure.
Let us now take up another point. The evidence for a physical
law, or for any scientific law, always involves both memory
and testimony. We have to rely both upon what we remember
to have observed on former occasions, and on what others say
they have observed. In the very beginnings of science, it may
have been possible sometimes to dispense with testimony; but
very soon every scientific investigation began to be built upon
previously ascertained results, and thus to depend upon what
others had recorded. In fact, without the corroboration of
testimony we should hardly have had much confidence in the
existence of physical objects. Sometimes people suffer from
hallucinations, that is to say, they think they perceive physical
objects, but are not confirmed in this belief by the testimony
of others. In such cases, we decide that they are mistaken. It
is the similarity between the perceptions of different people in
similar situations that makes us feel confident of the external
causation of our perceptions; but for this, whatever naive beliefs
we might have had in physical objects would have been
dissipated long ago. Thus memory and testimony are essential
to science. Nevertheless, each of these is open to criticism
by the sceptic. Even if we succeed, more or less, in meeting
his criticism, we shall, if we are rational, be left with a less
complete confidence in our original beliefs than we had before.
Once more, we shall become less cocksure as we become more
accurate.
Both memory and testimony lead us into the sphere of psychology.
I shall not at this stage discuss either beyond the
point at which it is clear that there are genuine philosophical
problems to be solved. I shall begin with memory.
Memory is a word which has a variety of meanings. The
kind that I am concerned with at the moment is the recollection
of past occurrences. This is so notoriously fallible that every
experimenter makes a record of the result of his experiment
at the earliest possible moment: he considers the inference
from written words to past events less likely to be mistaken
than the direct beliefs which constitute memory. But some
time, though perhaps only a few seconds, must elapse between
the observation and the making of the record, unless the record
is so fragmentary that memory is needed to interpret it. Thus
we do not escape from the need of trusting memory to some
degree. Moreover, without memory we should not think of
interpreting records as applying to the past, because we should
not know that there was any past. Now, apart from arguments
as to the proved fallibility of memory, there is one
awkward consideration which the sceptic may urge. Remembering,
which occurs now, cannot possibly—he may say—prove
that what is remembered occurred at some other time, because
the world might have sprung into being five minutes ago, exactly
as it then was, full of acts of remembering which were
entirely misleading. Opponents of Darwin, such as Edmund
Gosse’s father, urged a very similar argument against evolution.
The world, they said, was created in 4004 B.C., complete
with fossils, which were inserted to try our faith. The world
was created suddenly, but was made such as it would have been
if it had evolved. There is no logical impossibility about this
view. And similarly there is no logical impossibility in the view
that the world was created five minutes ago, complete with
memories and records. This may seem an improbable hypothesis,
but it is not logically refutable.
Apart from this argument, which may be thought fantastic,
there are reasons of detail for being more or less distrustful
of memory. It is obvious that no direct confirmation of a
belief about a past occurrence is possible, because we cannot
make the past recur. We can find confirmation of an indirect
kind in the revelations of others and in contemporary records.
The latter, as we have seen, involve some degree of memory,
but they may involve very little, for instance when a shorthand
report of a conversation or speech has been made at the time.
But even then, we do not escape wholly from the need of
memory extending over a longer stretch of time. Suppose a
wholly imaginary conversation were produced for some criminal
purpose, we should depend upon the memories of witnesses
to establish its fictitious character in a law-court. And all
memory which extends over a long period of time is very apt
to be mistaken; this is shown by the errors invariably found
in autobiographies. Any man who comes across letters which
he wrote many years ago can verify the manner in which his
memory has falsified past events. For these reasons, the fact
that we cannot free ourselves from dependence upon memory
in building up knowledge is, prima facie, a reason for regarding
what passes for knowledge as not quite certain. The whole
of this subject of memory will be considered more carefully in
later chapters.
Testimony raises even more awkward problems. What
makes them so awkward is the fact that testimony is involved
in building up our knowledge of physics, and that, conversely,
physics is required in establishing the trustworthiness of testimony.
Moreover, testimony raises all the problems connected
with the relation of mind and matter. Some eminent philosophers,
e.g. Leibniz, have constructed systems according to
which there would be no such thing as testimony, and yet have
accepted as true many things which cannot be known without
it. I do not think philosophy has quite done justice to this
problem, but a few words will, I think, show its gravity.
For our purposes, we may define testimony as noises heard,
or shapes seen, analogous to those which we should make if
we wished to convey an assertion, and believed by the hearer
or seer to be due to someone else’s desire to convey an assertion.
Let us take a concrete instance: I ask a policeman the way,
and he says, “Fourth turn to the right, third to the left.”
That is to say, I hear these sounds, and perhaps I see what I
interpret as his lips moving. I assume that he has a mind more
or less like my own, and has uttered these sounds with the same
intention as I should have had if I had uttered them, namely
to convey information. In ordinary life, all this is not, in any
proper sense, an inference; it is a belief which arises in us on
the appropriate occasion. But if we are challenged, we have
to substitute inference for spontaneous belief, and the more
the inference is examined the more shaky it looks.
The inference that has to be made has two steps, one physical
and one psychological. The physical inference is of the
sort we considered a moment ago, in which we pass from a sensation
to a physical occurrence. We hear noises, and think they
proceed from the policeman’s body. We see moving shapes,
and interpret them as physical motions of his lips. This inference,
as we saw earlier, is in part justified by testimony;
yet now we find that it has to be made before we can have
reason to believe that there is any such thing as testimony.
And this inference is certainly sometimes mistaken. Lunatics
hear voices which other people do not hear; instead of crediting
them with abnormally acute hearing, we lock them up. But
if we sometimes hear sentences which have not proceeded from
a body, why should this not always be the case? Perhaps our
imagination has conjured up all the things that we think others
have said to us. But this is part of the general problem of
inferring physical objects from sensations, which, difficult as
it is, is not the most difficult part of the logical puzzles concerning
testimony. The most difficult part is the inference
from the policeman’s body to his mind. I do not mean any
special insult to policemen; I would say the same of politicians
and even of philosophers.
The inference to the policeman’s mind certainly may be
wrong. It is clear that a maker of wax-works could make a
life-like policeman and put a gramophone inside him, which
would cause him periodically to tell visitors the way to the
most interesting part of the exhibition at the entrance to which
he would stand. They would have just the sort of evidence
of his being alive that is found convincing in the case of other
policemen. Descartes believed that animals have no minds,
but are merely complicated automata. Eighteenth-century materialists
extended this doctrine to men. But I am not now concerned
with materialism; my problem is a different one. Even
a materialist must admit that, when he talks, he means to convey
something, that is to say, he uses words as signs, not as
mere noises. It may be difficult to decide exactly what is meant
by this statement, but it is clear that it means something, and
that it is true of one’s own remarks. The question is: Are we
sure that it is true of the remarks we hear, as well as of those
we make? Or are the remarks we hear perhaps just like other
noises, merely meaningless disturbances of the air? The chief
argument against this is analogy: the remarks we hear are so
like those we make that we think they must have similar causes.
But although we cannot dispense with analogy as a form of
inference, it is by no means demonstrative, and not infrequently
leads us astray. We are therefore left, once more, with a
prima facie reason for uncertainty and doubt.
This question of what we mean ourselves when we speak
brings me to another problem, that of introspection. Many
philosophers have held that introspection gave the most indubitable
of all knowledge; others have held that there is no
such thing as introspection. Descartes, after trying to doubt
everything, arrived at “I think, therefore I am”, as a basis
for the rest of knowledge. Dr. John B. Watson the behaviourist
holds, on the contrary, that we do not think, but only talk.
Dr. Watson, in real life, gives as much evidence of thinking
as anyone does, so if he is not convinced that he thinks, we
are all in a bad way. At any rate, the mere existence of such
an opinion as his, on the part of a competent philosopher,
must suffice to show that introspection is not so certain as some
people have thought. But let us examine this question a little
more closely.
The difference between introspection and what we call perception
of external objects seems to me to be connected, not
with what is primary in our knowledge, but with what is inferred.
We think, at one time, that we are seeing a chair; at
another, that we are thinking about philosophy. The first we
call perception of an external object; the second we call introspection.
Now we have already found reason to doubt external
perception, in the full-blooded sense in which common-sense
accepts it. I shall consider later what there is that is
indubitable and primitive in perception; for the moment, I
shall anticipate by saying that what is indubitable in “seeing
a chair” is the occurrence of a certain pattern of colours. But
this occurrence, we shall find, is connected with me just as
much as with the chair; no one except myself can see exactly
the pattern that I see. There is thus something subjective and
private about what we take to be external perception, but this
is concealed by precarious extensions into the physical world.
I think introspection, on the contrary, involves precarious extensions
into the mental world: shorn of these, it is not very
different from external perception shorn of its extensions. To
make this clear, I shall try to show what we know to be occurring
when, as we say, we think about philosophy.
Suppose, as the result of introspection, you arrive at a belief
which you express in the words: “I am now believing that
mind is different from matter”. What do you know, apart
from inferences, in such a case? First of all, you must cut
out the word “I”: the person who believes is an inference, not
part of what you know immediately. In the second place, you
must be careful about the word “believing”: I am not now
concerned with what this word should mean in logic or theory
of knowledge; I am concerned with what it can mean when
used to describe a direct experience. In such a case, it would
seem that it can only describe a certain kind of feeling. And
as for the proposition you think you are believing, namely,
“mind is different from matter”, it is very difficult to say what
is really occurring when you think you believe it. It may be
mere words, pronounced, visualised, or in auditory or motor
images. It may be images of what the words “mean”, but in
that case it will not be at all an accurate representation of
the logical content of the proposition. You may have an image
of a statue of Newton “voyaging through strange seas of
thought alone”, and another image of a stone rolling downhill,
combined with the words “how different!” Or you may
think of the difference between composing a lecture and eating
your dinner. It is only when you come to expressing your
thought in words that you approach logical precision.
Both in introspection and in external perception, we try
to express what we know in WORDS.
We come here, as in the question of testimony, upon the
social aspect of knowledge. The purpose of words is to give
the same kind of publicity to thought as is claimed for physical
objects. A number of people can hear a spoken word or see
a written word, because each is a physical occurrence. If I
say to you, “mind is different from matter”, there may be only
a very slight resemblance between the thought that I am trying
to express and the thought which is aroused in you, but
these two thoughts have just this in common, that they can be
expressed by the same words. Similarly, there may be great
differences between what you and I see when, as we say, we
look at the same chair; nevertheless we can both express our
perceptions by the same words.
A thought and a perception are thus not so very different
in their own nature. If physics is true, they are different in
their correlations: when I see a chair, others have more or
less similar perceptions, and it is thought that these are all
connected with light-waves coming from the chair, whereas,
when I think a thought, others may not be thinking anything
similar. But this applies also to feeling a toothache, which
would not usually be regarded as a case of introspection. On
the whole, therefore, there seems no reason to regard introspection
as a different kind of knowledge from external perception.
But this whole question will concern us again at a
later stage.
As for the trustworthiness of introspection, there is again
a complete parallelism with the case of external perception.
The actual datum, in each case, is unimpeachable, but the extensions
which we make instinctively are questionable. Instead
of saying, “I am believing that mind is different from
matter”, you ought to say, “certain images are occurring in a
certain relation to each other, accompanied by a certain feeling”.
No words exist for describing the actual occurrence in
all its particularity; all words, even proper names, are general,
with the possible exception of “this”, which is ambiguous.
When you translate the occurrence into words, you are making
generalisations and inferences, just as you are when you say
“there is a chair”. There is really no vital difference between
the two cases. In each case, what is really a datum is unutterable,
and what can be put into words involves inferences which
may be mistaken.
When I say that “inferences” are involved, I am saying
something not quite accurate unless carefully interpreted. In
“seeing a chair”, for instance, we do not first apprehend a
coloured pattern, and then proceed to infer a chair: belief
in the chair arises spontaneously when we see the coloured pattern.
But this belief has causes not only in the present physical
stimulus, but also partly in past experience, partly in reflexes.
In animals, reflexes play a very large part; in human
beings, experience is more important. The infant learns slowly
to correlate touch and sight, and to expect others to see what
he sees. The habits which are thus formed are essential to
our adult notion of an object such as a chair. The perception
of a chair by means of sight has a physical stimulus which
affects only sight directly, but stimulates ideas of solidity and
so on through early experience. The inference might be called
“physiological”. An inference of this sort is evidence of past
correlations, for instance between touch and sight, but may be
mistaken in the present instance; you may, for instance, mistake
a reflection in a large mirror for another room. Similarly
in dreams we make mistaken physiological inferences. We
cannot therefore feel certainty in regard to things which are
in this sense inferred, because, when we try to accept as many
of them as possible, we are nevertheless compelled to reject
some for the sake of self-consistency.
We arrived a moment ago at what we called “physiological
inference” as an essential ingredient in the common-sense notion
of a physical object. Physiological inference, in its
simplest form, means this: given a stimulus S, to which, by a
reflex, we react by a bodily movement R, and a stimulus S′
with a reaction R′, if the two stimuli are frequently experienced
together, S will in time produce R′.2 That is to say, the body
will act as if S′ were present. Physiological inference is important
in theory of knowledge, and I shall have much to say
about it at a later stage. For the present, I have mentioned
it partly to prevent it from being confused with logical inference,
and partly in order to introduce the problem of induction,
about which we must say a few preliminary words at
this stage.
2E.g. if you hear a sharp noise and see a bright light simultaneously often,
in time the noise without the light will cause your pupils to contract.
Induction raises perhaps the most difficult problem in the
whole theory of knowledge. Every scientific law is established
by its means, and yet it is difficult to see why we should
believe it to be a valid logical process. Induction, in its bare
essence, consists of the argument that, because A and B have
been often found together and never found apart, therefore,
when A is found again, B will probably also be found. This
exists first as a “physiological inference”, and as such is practised
by animals. When we first begin to reflect, we find ourselves
making inductions in the physiological sense, for instance,
expecting the food we see to have a certain kind of taste. Often
we only become aware of this expectation through having it
disappointed, for instance if we take salt thinking it is sugar.
When mankind took to science, they tried to formulate logical
principles justifying this kind of inference. I shall discuss
these attempts in later chapters; for the present, I will only
say that they seem to me very unsuccessful. I am convinced
that induction must have validity of some kind in some degree,
but the problem of showing how or why it can be valid remains
unsolved. Until it is solved, the rational man will doubt
whether his food will nourish him, and whether the sun will rise
tomorrow. I am not a rational man in this sense, but for the
moment I shall pretend to be. And even if we cannot be completely
rational, we should probably all be the better for becoming
somewhat more rational than we are. At the lowest
estimate, it will be an interesting adventure to see whither
reason will lead us.
The problems we have been raising are none of them new,
but they suffice to show that our everyday views of the world
and of our relations to it are unsatisfactory. We have been
asking whether we know this or that, but we have not yet asked
what “knowing” is. Perhaps we shall find that we have had
wrong ideas as to knowing, and that our difficulties grow less
when we have more correct ideas on this point. I think we
shall do well to begin our philosophical journey by an attempt
to understand knowing considered as part of the relation of
man to his environment, forgetting, for the moment, the fundamental
doubts with which we have been concerned. Perhaps
modern science may enable us to see philosophical problems in
a new light. In that hope, let us examine the relation of man
to his environment with a view to arriving at a scientific view
as to what constitutes knowledge.
PART I MAN FROM WITHOUT
CHAPTER II MAN AND HIS ENVIRONMENT
If our scientific knowledge were full and complete, we should
understand ourselves and the world and our relation to the
world. As it is, our understanding of all three is fragmentary.
For the present, it is the third question, that of our relation
to the world, that I wish to consider, because this brings us
nearest to the problems of philosophy. We shall find that it
will lead us back to the other two questions, as to the world
and as to ourselves, but that we shall understand both these
better if we have considered first how the world acts upon us
and how we act upon the world.
There are a number of sciences which deal with Man. We
may deal with him in natural history, as one among the animals,
having a certain place in evolution, and related to other animals
in ascertainable ways. We may deal with him in physiology, as
a structure capable of performing certain functions, and reacting
to the environment in ways of which some, at least, can be
explained by chemistry. We may study him in sociology, as a
unit in various organisms, such as the family and the state.
And we may study him, in psychology, as he appears to himself.
This last gives what we may call an internal view of man, as
opposed to the other three, which give an external view. That
is to say, in psychology we use data which can only be obtained
when the observer and the observed are the same person,
whereas in the other ways of studying Man all our data can be
obtained by observing other people. There are different ways
of interpreting this distinction, and different views of its importance,
but there can be no doubt that there is such a distinction.
We can remember our own dreams, whereas we cannot
know the dreams of others unless they tell us about them.
We know when we have toothache, when our food tastes too
salty, when we are remembering some past occurrence, and so
on. All these events in our lives other people cannot know in
the same direct way. In this sense, we all have an inner life,
open to our own inspection but to no one else’s. This is no
doubt the source of the traditional distinction of mind and
body: the body was supposed to be that part of us which others
could observe, and the mind that part which was private to ourselves.
The importance of the distinction has been called in
question in recent times, and I do not myself believe that it has
any fundamental philosophical significance. But historically it
has played a dominant part in determining the conceptions from
which men set out when they began to philosophise, and on this
account, if on no other, it deserves to be borne in mind.
Knowledge, traditionally, has been viewed from within, as
something which we observe in ourselves rather than as something
which we can see others displaying. When I say that it
has been so viewed, I mean that this has been the practice of
philosophers; in ordinary life, people have been more objective.
In ordinary life, knowledge is something which can be
tested by examinations, that is to say, it consists in a certain
kind of response to a certain kind of stimulus. This objective
way of viewing knowledge is, to my mind, much more fruitful
than the way which has been customary in philosophy. I mean
that, if we wish to give a definition of “knowing”, we ought to
define it as a manner of reacting to the environment, not as involving
something (a “state of mind”) which only the person
who has the knowledge can observe. It is because I hold this
view that I think it best to begin with Man and his environment,
rather than with those matters in which the observer and the
observed must be the same person. Knowing, as I view it,
is a characteristic which may be displayed in our reactions
to our environment; it is therefore necessary first of all to consider
the nature of these reactions as they appear in science.
Let us take some everyday situation. Suppose you are
watching a race, and at the appropriate moment you say,
“they’re off”. This exclamation is a reaction to the environment,
and is taken to show knowledge if it is made at the same
time as others make it. Now let us consider what has been
really happening, according to science. The complication of
what has happened is almost incredible. It may conveniently
be divided into four stages: first, what happened in the outside
world between the runners and your eyes; secondly, what happened
in your body from your eyes to your brain; thirdly, what
happened in your brain; fourthly, what happened in your body
from your brain to the movements of your throat and tongue
which constituted your exclamation. Of these four stages, the
first belongs to physics, and is dealt with in the main by the
theory of light; the second and fourth belong to physiology;
the third, though it should theoretically also belong to physiology,
belongs in fact rather to psychology, owing to our lack
of knowledge as to the brain. The third stage embodies the
results of experience and learning. It is responsible for the
fact that you speak, which an animal would not do, and that
you speak English, which a Frenchman would not do. This
immensely complicated occurrence is, nevertheless, about the
simplest example of knowledge that could possibly be given.
For the moment, let us leave on one side the part of this
process which happens in the outside world and belongs to
physics. I shall have much to say about it later, but what has
to be said is not altogether easy, and we will take less abstruse
matters first. I will merely observe that the event which we
are said to perceive, namely the runners starting, is separated
by a longer or shorter chain of events from the event which
happens at the surface of our eyes. It is this last that is what
is called the “stimulus”. Thus the event that we are said to
perceive when we see is not the stimulus, but an anterior event
related to it in a way that requires investigation. The same
applies to hearing and smell, but not to touch or to perception
of states of our own body. In these cases, the first of the above
four stages is absent. It is clear that, in the case of sight, hearing
and smell, there must be a certain relation between the
stimulus and the event said to be perceived, but we will not now
consider what this relation must be. We will consider, rather,
the second, third, and fourth stages in an act of perceptive
knowledge. This is the more legitimate as these stages always
exist, whereas the first is confined to certain senses.
The second stage is that which proceeds from the sense-organ
to the brain. It is not necessary for our purposes to
consider exactly what goes on during this journey. A purely
physical event—the stimulus—happens at the boundary of the
body, and has a series of effects which travel along the afferent
nerves to the brain. If the stimulus is light, it must fall on the
eye to produce the characteristic effects; no doubt light falling
on other parts of the body has effects, but they are not those
that distinguish vision. Similarly, if the stimulus is sound, it
must fall on the ear. A sense-organ, like a photographic plate,
is responsive to stimuli of a certain sort: light falling on the eye
has effects which are different for different wave-lengths, intensities,
and directions. When the events in the eye due to
incident light have taken place, they are followed by events in
the optic nerve, leading at last to some occurrence in the brain—an
occurrence which varies with the stimulus. The occurrence
in the brain must be different for different stimuli in all
cases where we can perceive differences. Red and yellow, for
instance, are distinguishable in perception; therefore the occurrences
along the optic nerve and in the brain must have a different
character when caused by red light from what they have
when caused by yellow light. But when two shades of colour
are so similar that they can only be distinguished by delicate
instruments, not by perception, we cannot be sure that they
cause occurrences of different characters in the optic nerve and
brain.
When the disturbance has reached the brain, it may or may
not cause a characteristic set of events in the brain. If it
does not, we shall not be what is called “conscious” of it. For
to be “conscious” of seeing yellow, whatever else it may be, must
certainly involve some kind of cerebral reaction to the message
brought by the optic nerve. It may be assumed that the great
majority of messages brought to the brain by the afferent
nerves never secure any attention at all—they are like letters
to a government office which remain unanswered. The things
in the margin of the field of vision, unless they are in some way
interesting, are usually unnoticed; if they are noticed, they are
brought into the centre of the field of vision unless we make a
deliberate effort to prevent this from occurring. These things
are visible, in the sense that we could be aware of them if we
chose, without any change in our physical environment or in
our sense-organs; that is to say, only a cerebral change is required
to enable them to cause a reaction. But usually they
do not provoke any reaction; life would be altogether too
wearing if we had to be always reacting to everything in the
field of vision. Where there is no reaction, the second stage
completes the process, and the third and fourth stages do not
arise. In that case, there has been nothing that could be
called “perception” connected with the stimulus in question.
To us, however, the interesting case is that in which the
process continues. In this case there is first a process in the
brain, of which the nature is as yet conjectural, which travels
from the centre appropriate to the sense in question to a motor
centre. From these there is a process which travels along an
efferent nerve, and finally results in a muscular event causing
some bodily movement. In our illustration of the man watching
the beginning of a race, a process travels from the part
of the brain concerned with sight to the part concerned with
speech; this is what we called the third stage. Then a process
travels along the efferent nerves and brings about the movements
which constitute saying “they’re off”; this is what we
called the fourth stage.
Unless all four stages exist, there is nothing that can be
called “knowledge”. And even when they are all present,
various further conditions must be satisfied if there is to be
“knowledge”. But these observations are premature, and we
must return to the analysis of our third and fourth stages.
The third stage is of two sorts, according as we are concerned
with a reflex or with a “learned reaction”, as Dr. Watson
calls it. In the case of a reflex, if it is complete at birth, a
new-born infant or animal has a brain so constituted that, without
the need of any previous experience, there is a connection
between a certain process in the afferent nerves and a certain
other process in the efferent nerves. A good example of a reflex
is sneezing. A certain kind of tickling in the nose produces a
fairly violent movement having a very definite character, and
this connection exists already in the youngest infants. Learned
reactions, on the other hand, are such as only occur because of
the effect of previous occurrences in the brain. One might
illustrate by an analogy which, however, would be misleading if
pressed. Imagine a desert in which no rain has ever fallen, and
suppose that at last a thunderstorm occurs in it; then the course
taken by the water will correspond to a reflex. But if rain
continues to fall frequently, it will form watercourses and
river valleys; when this has occurred, the water runs away
along pre-formed channels, which are attributable to the past
“experience” of the region. This corresponds to “learned
reactions”. One of the most notable examples of learned
reactions is speech: we speak because we have learned a certain
language, not because our brain had originally any tendency
to react in just that way. Perhaps all knowledge, certainly
nearly all, is dependent upon learned reactions, i.e., upon connections
in the brain which are not part of man’s congenital
equipment but are the result of events which have happened
to him.
To distinguish between learned and unlearned responses
is not always an easy task. It cannot be assumed that responses
which are absent during the first weeks of life are all
learned. To take the most obvious instance; sexual responses
change their character to a greater or less extent at puberty,
as a result of changes in the ductless glands, not as a result of
experience. But this instance does not stand alone: as the
body grows and develops, new modes of response come into
play, modified, no doubt, by experience, but not wholly due to
it. For example: a new-born baby cannot run, and therefore
does not run away from what is terrifying, as an older child
does. The older child has learned to run, but has not necessarily
learned to run away; the stimulus in learning to run
may have never been a terrifying object. It would therefore
be a fallacy to suppose that we can distinguish between learned
and unlearned responses by observing what a new-born infant
does, since reflexes may come into play at a later stage. Conversely,
some things which a child does at birth may have been
learned, when they are such as it could have done in the womb—for
example, a certain amount of kicking and stretching.
The whole distinction between learned and unlearned responses,
therefore, is not so definite as we could wish. At the
two extremes we get clear cases, such as sneezing on the one
hand and speaking on the other; but there are intermediate
forms of behaviour which are more difficult to classify.
This is not denied even by those who attach most importance
to the distinction between learned and unlearned responses.
In Dr. Watson’s Behaviorism (p. 103) there is a
“Summary of Unlearned Equipment”, which ends with the
following paragraph:
“Other activities appear at a later stage—such as blinking,
reaching, handling, handedness, crawling, standing, sitting-up,
walking, running, jumping. In the great majority of these
later activities it is difficult to say how much of the act as a
whole is due to training or conditioning. A considerable part
is unquestionably due to the growth changes in structure, and
the remainder is due to training and conditioning.” (Watson’s
italics.)
It is not possible to make a logically sharp distinction in
this matter; in certain cases we have to be satisfied with something
less exact. For example, we might say that those developments
which are merely due to normal growth are to
count as unlearned, while those which depend upon special
circumstances in the individual biography are to count as
learned. But take, say, muscular development: this will not
take place normally unless the muscles are used, and if they
are used they are bound to learn some of the skill which is
appropriate to them. And some things which must certainly
count as learned, such as focussing with the eyes, depend upon
circumstances which are normal and must be present in the case
of every child who is not blind. The whole distinction, therefore,
is one of degree rather than of kind; nevertheless it is
valuable.
The value of the distinction between learned and unlearned
reactions is connected with the laws of learning, to which we
shall come in the next chapter. Experience modifies behaviour
according to certain laws, and we may say that a learned reaction
is one in the formation of which these laws have played
a part. For example: children are frightened of loud noises
from birth, but are not at first frightened of dogs; after they
have heard a dog barking loudly, they may become frightened
of dogs, which is a learned reaction. If we knew enough about
the brain, we could make the distinction precise, by saying that
learned reactions are those depending upon modifications of
the brain other than mere growth. But as it is, we have to
judge by observations of bodily behaviour, and the accompanying
modifications in the brain are assumed on a basis of
theory rather than actually observed.
The essential points, for our purposes, are comparatively
simple. Man or any other animal, at birth, is such as to respond
to certain stimuli in certain specific ways, i.e. by certain
kinds of bodily movements; as he grows, these ways of responding
change, partly as the mere result of developing structure,
partly in consequence of events in his biography. The latter
influence proceeds according to certain laws, which we shall
consider, since they have much to do with the genesis of
“knowledge”.
But—the indignant reader may be exclaiming—knowing
something is not a bodily movement, but a state of mind, and
yet you talk to us about sneezing and such matters. I must
ask the indignant reader’s patience. He “knows” that he
has states of mind, and that his knowing is itself a state of
mind. I do not deny that he has states of mind, but I ask two
questions: First, what sort of thing are they? Secondly, what
evidence can he give me that he knows about them? The first
question he may find very difficult; and if he wants, in his answer,
to show that states of mind are something of a sort totally
different from bodily movements, he will have to tell me also
what bodily movements are, which will plunge him into the
most abstruse part of physics. All this I propose to consider
later on, and then I hope the indignant reader will be appeased.
As to the second question, namely, what evidence of his knowledge
another man can give me, it is clear that he must depend
upon speech or writing, i.e. in either case upon bodily movements.
Therefore whatever knowledge may be to the knower,
as a social phenomenon it is something displayed in bodily
movements. For the present I am deliberately postponing the
question of what knowledge is to the knower, and confining
myself to what it is for the external observer. And for him,
necessarily, it is something shown by bodily movements made
in answer to stimuli—more specifically, to examination questions.
What else it may be I shall consider at a later stage.
However we may subsequently add to our present account
by considering how knowledge appears to the knower, that
will not invalidate anything that we may arrive at by considering
how knowledge appears to the external observer. And
there is something which it is important to realise, namely, that
we are concerned with a process in which the environment first
acts upon a man, and then he reacts upon the environment.
This process has to be considered as a whole if we are to discuss
what knowledge is. The older view would have been that
the effect of the environment upon us might constitute a certain
kind of knowledge (perception), while our reaction to the environment
constituted volition. These were, in each case,
“mental” occurrences, and their connection with nerves and
brain remained entirely mysterious. I think the mystery can
be eliminated, and the subject removed from the realm of guesswork,
by starting with the whole cycle from stimulus to bodily
movement. In this way, knowing becomes something active,
not something contemplative. Knowing and willing, in fact,
are merely aspects of the one cycle, which must be considered
in its entirety if it is to be rightly understood.
A few words must be said about the human body as a
mechanism. It is an inconceivably complicated mechanism,
and some men of science think that it is not explicable
in terms of physics and chemistry, but is regulated by some
“vital principle” which makes its laws different from those of
dead matter. These men are called “vitalists”. I do not
myself see any reason to accept their view, but at the same
time our knowledge is not sufficient to enable us to reject it
definitely. What we can say is that their case is not proved,
and that the opposite view is, scientifically, a more fruitful
working hypothesis. It is better to look for physical and chemical
explanations where we can, since we know of many processes
in the human body which can be accounted for in this way, and
of none which certainly cannot. To invoke a “vital principle”
is to give an excuse for laziness, when perhaps more diligent
research would have enabled us to do without it. I shall therefore
assume, as a working hypothesis, that the human body
acts according to the same laws of physics and chemistry as
those which govern dead matter, and that it differs from dead
matter, not by its laws, but by the extraordinary complexity
of its structure.
The movements of the human body may, none the less, be
divided into two classes, which we may call respectively “mechanical”
and “vital”. As an example of the former, I should
give the movement of a man falling from a cliff into the sea.
To explain this, in its broad features, it is not necessary to take
account of the fact that the man is alive; his centre of gravity
moves exactly as that of a stone would move. But when a man
climbs up a cliff, he does something that dead matter of the same
shape and weight would never do; this is a “vital” movement.
There is in the human body a lot of stored chemical energy in
more or less unstable equilibrium; a very small stimulus can release
this energy, and cause a considerable amount of bodily
movement. The situation is analogous to that of a large rock
delicately balanced on the top of a conical mountain; a tiny
shove may send it thundering down into the valley, in one direction
or another according to the direction of the shove. So if
you say to a man “your house is on fire”, he will start running;
although the stimulus contained very little energy, his expenditure
of energy may be tremendous. He increases the available
energy by panting, which makes his body burn up faster and
increases the energy due to combustion; this is just like opening
the draft in a furnace. “Vital” movements are those that
use up this energy which is in unstable equilibrium. It is they
alone that concern the bio-chemist, the physiologist, and the
psychologist. The others, being just like the movements of
dead matter, may be ignored when we are specially concerned
with the study of Man.
Vital movements have a stimulus which may be inside or
outside the body, or both at once. Hunger is a stimulus inside
the body, but hunger combined with the sight of good food is
a double stimulus, both internal and external. The effect of
a stimulus may be, in theory, according to the laws of physics
and chemistry, but in most cases this is, at present, no more
than a pious opinion. What we know from observation is
that behaviour is modified by experience, that is to say, that
if similar stimuli are repeated at intervals they produce gradually
changing reactions. When a bus conductor says, “Fares,
please”, a very young child has no reaction, an older child
gradually learns to look for pennies, and, if a male, ultimately
acquires the power of producing the requisite sum on demand
without conscious effort. The way in which our reactions
change with experience is a distinctive characteristic of animals;
moreover it is more marked in the higher than in the lower
animals, and most marked of all in Man. It is a matter intimately
connected with “intelligence”, and must be investigated
before we can understand what constitutes knowledge from
the standpoint of the external observer; we shall be concerned
with it at length in the next chapter.
Speaking broadly, the actions of all living things are such
as tend to biological survival, i.e. to the leaving of a numerous
progeny. But when we descend to the lowest organisms,
which have hardly anything that can be called individuality,
and reproduce themselves by fission, it is possible to take a
simpler view. Living matter, within limits, has the chemical
peculiarity of being self-perpetuating, and of conferring its own
chemical composition upon other matter composed of the right
elements. One spore falling into a stagnant pond may produce
millions of minute vegetable organisms; these, in turn,
enable one small animal to have myriads of descendants living
on the small plants; these, in turn, provide life for larger animals,
newts, tadpoles, fishes, etc. In the end there is enormously
more protoplasm in that region than there was to begin
with. This is no doubt explicable as a result of the chemical
constitution of living matter. But this purely chemical self-preservation
and collective growth is at the bottom of everything
else that characterises the behaviour of living things.
Every living thing is a sort of imperialist, seeking to transform
as much as possible of its environment into itself and
its seed. The distinction between self and posterity is one
which does not exist in a developed form in asexual unicellular
organisms; many things, even in human life, can only be completely
understood by forgetting it. We may regard the whole
of evolution as flowing from this “chemical imperialism” of
living matter. Of this, Man is only the last example (so far).
He transforms the surface of the globe by irrigation, cultivation,
mining, quarrying, making canals and railways, breeding
certain animals, and destroying others; and when we ask ourselves,
from the standpoint of an outside observer, what is
the end achieved by all these activities, we find that it can be
summed up in one very simple formula: to transform as much
as possible of the matter on the earth’s surface into human
bodies. Domestication of animals, agriculture, commerce,
industrialism have been stages in this process. When we compare
the human population of the globe with that of other
large animals and also with that of former times, we see that
“chemical imperialism” has been, in fact, the main end to which
human intelligence has been devoted. Perhaps intelligence is
reaching the point where it can conceive worthier ends, concerned
with the quality rather than the quantity of human life.
But as yet such intelligence is confined to minorities, and does
not control the great movements of human affairs. Whether
this will ever be changed I do not venture to predict. And in
pursuing the simple purpose of maximising the amount of
human life, we have at any rate the consolation of feeling at
one with the whole movement of living things from their
earliest origin on this planet.
CHAPTER III THE PROCESS OF LEARNING IN ANIMALS AND INFANTS
In the present chapter I wish to consider the processes by
which, and the laws according to which, an animal’s original
repertoire of reflexes is changed into a quite different set of
habits as a result of events that happen to it. A dog learns
to follow his master in preference to anyone else; a horse learns
to know his own stall in the stable; a cow learns to come to
the cow-shed at milking time. All these are acquired habits,
not reflexes; they depend upon the circumstances of the animals
concerned, not merely upon the congenital characteristics of
the species. When I speak of an animal “learning” something,
I shall include all cases of acquired habits, whether or
not they are useful to the animal. I have known horses in Italy
“learn” to drink wine, which I cannot believe to have been
a desirable habit. A dog may “learn” to fly at a man who has
ill-treated it, and may do so with such regularity and ferocity
as to lead to its being killed. I do not use learning in any sense
involving praise, but merely to denote modification of behaviour
as the result of experience.
The manner in which animals learn has been much studied
in recent years, with a great deal of patient observation and
experiment. Certain results have been obtained as regards the
kinds of problems that have been investigated, but on general
principles there is still much controversy. One may say
broadly that all the animals that have been carefully observed
have behaved so as to confirm the philosophy in which the
observer believed before his observations began. Nay, more,
they have all displayed the national characteristics of the observer.
Animals studied by Americans rush about frantically,
with an incredible display of hustle and pep, and at last achieve
the desired result by chance. Animals observed by Germans
sit still and think, and at last evolve the solution out of their
inner consciousness. To the plain man, such as the present
writer, this situation is discouraging. I observe, however, that
the type of problem which a man naturally sets to an animal
depends upon his own philosophy, and that this probably accounts
for the differences in the results. The animal responds
to one type of problem in one way and to another in another;
therefore the results obtained by different investigators, though
different, are not incompatible. But it remains necessary to
remember that no one investigator is to be trusted to give a
survey of the whole field.
The matters with which we shall be concerned in this chapter
belong to behaviourist psychology, and in part to pure physiology.
Nevertheless, they seem to me vital to a proper understanding
of philosophy, since they are necessary for an objective
study of knowledge and inference. I mean by an “objective”
study one in which the observer and the observed need not be
the same person; when they must be identical, I call the study
“subjective.” For the present we are concerned with what is
required for understanding “knowledge” as an objective phenomenon.
We shall take up the question of the subjective study
of knowledge at a later stage.
The scientific study of learning in animals is a very recent
growth; it may almost be regarded as beginning with Thorndike’s
Animal Intelligence, which was published in 1911.
Thorndike invented the method which has been adopted by
practically all subsequent American investigators. In this
method an animal is separated from food, which he can see
or smell, by an obstacle which he may overcome by chance.
A cat, say, is put in a cage having a door with a handle which
he may by chance push open with his nose. At first the cat
makes entirely random movements, until he gets his result by
a mere fluke. On the second occasion, in the same cage, he
still makes some random movements, but not so many as on
the first occasion. On the third occasion he does still better,
and before long he makes no useless movements. Nowadays
it has become customary to employ rats instead of cats, and
to put them in a model of the Hampton Court maze rather
than in a cage. They take all sorts of wrong turnings at first,
but after a time they learn to run straight out without making
any mistake. Dr. Watson gives averages for nineteen rats,
each of which was put into the maze repeatedly, with food
outside where the rat could smell it. In all the experiments
care was taken to make sure that the animal was very hungry.
Dr. Watson says: “The first trial required on the average
over seventeen minutes. During this time the rat was running
around the maze, into blind alleys, running back to the starting
point, starting for the food again, biting at the wires around
him, scratching himself, smelling this spot and that on the floor.
Finally he got to the food. He was allowed only a bite. Again
he was put back into the maze. The taste of the food made
him almost frantic in his activity. He dashed about more
rapidly. The average time for the group on the second trial
is only a little over seven minutes; on the fourth trial not quite
three minutes; from this point to the twenty-third trial the
improvement is very gradual.” On the thirtieth trial the time
required, on the average, was about thirty seconds.3 This set
of experiments may be taken as typical of the whole group of
studies to which it belongs.
Thorndike, as a result of experiments with cages and mazes,
formulated two “provisional laws,” which are as follows:
“The Law of Effect is that: of several responses made to
the same situation, those which are accompanied or closely followed
by satisfaction to the animal will, other things being
equal, be more firmly connected with the situation, so that, when
it recurs, they will be more likely to recur; those which are
accompanied or closely followed by dissatisfaction to the animal
will, other things being equal, have their connections with that
situation weakened, so that, when it recurs, they will be less
likely to recur. The greater the satisfaction or discomfort,
the greater the strengthening or weakening of the bond.
“The Law of Exercise is that: Any response to a situation
will, other things being equal, be more strongly connected with
the situation in proportion to the number of times it has been
connected with that situation and to the average vigour and
duration of the connections.”
We may sum up these two laws, roughly, in the two statements:
First, an animal tends to repeat what has brought it
pleasure; second, an animal tends to repeat what it has often
done before. Neither of these laws is at all surprising, but,
as we shall see, there are difficulties in the theory that they are
adequate to account for the process of learning in animals.
Before going further there is a theoretical point to be cleared
up. Thorndike, in his first law, speaks of satisfaction and discomfort,
which are terms belonging to subjective psychology.
We cannot observe whether an animal feels satisfaction or
feels discomfort; we can only observe that it behaves in ways
that we have become accustomed to interpret as signs of these
feelings. Thorndike’s law, as it stands, does not belong to
objective psychology, and is not capable of being experimentally
tested. This, however, is not so serious an objection as it looks.
Instead of speaking of a result that brings satisfaction, we
can merely enumerate the results which, in fact, have the character
which Thorndike mentions, namely, that the animal tends
to behave so as to make them recur. The rat in the maze behaves
so as to get the cheese, and when an act has led him
to the cheese once, he tends to repeat it. We may say that this
is what we mean when we say that the cheese “gives satisfaction”,
or that the rat “desires” the cheese. That is to say, we
may use Thorndike’s “Law of Effect” to give us an objective
definition of desire, satisfaction, and discomfort. The law
should then say: there are situations such that animals tend
to repeat acts which have led to them; these are the situations
which the animal is said to “desire” and in which it is said to
“find satisfaction”. This objection to Thorndike’s first law
is, therefore, not very serious, and need not further trouble us.
Dr. Watson considers one principle alone sufficient to account
for all animal and human learning, namely, the principle
of “learned reactions.” This principle may be stated as
follows:
When the body of an animal or human being has been exposed
sufficiently often to two roughly simultaneous stimuli, the
earlier of them alone tends to call out the response previously
called out by the other.
Although I do not agree with Dr. Watson in thinking this
principle alone sufficient, I do agree that it is a principle of
very great importance. It is the modern form of the principle
of “association”. The “association of ideas” has played a
great part in philosophy, particularly in British philosophy.
But it now appears that this is a consequence of a wider and
more primitive principle, namely, the association of bodily
processes. It is this wider principle that is asserted above.
Let us see what is the nature of the evidence in its favour.
Our principle becomes verifiable over a much larger field
than the older principle owing to the fact that it is movements,
not “ideas”, that are to be associated. Where animals are
concerned, ideas are hypothetical, but movements can be observed;
even with men, many movements are involuntary and
unconscious. Yet animal movements and unconscious involuntary
human movements are just as much subject to the law of
association as the most conscious ideas. Take, e.g. the following
example (Watson, p. 33). The pupil of the eye expands
in darkness and contracts in bright light; this is an involuntary
and unconscious action of which we only become aware
by observing others. Now take some person and repeatedly
expose him to bright light at the same moment that you ring
an electric bell. After a time the electric bell alone will cause
his pupils to contract. As far as can be discovered, all muscles
behave in this way. So do glands where they can be tested.
It is said that a brass band can be reduced to silence by sucking
a lemon in front of it, owing to the effect upon the salivary
glands of its members; I confess that I have never verified this
statement. But you will find the exact scientific analogue for
dogs in Watson, p. 26. You arrange a tube in a dog’s mouth
so that saliva drops out at a measurable rate. When you give
the dog food it stimulates the flow of saliva. At the same
moment you touch his left thigh. After a certain length of
time the touch on the left thigh will produce just as much saliva
without the food as with it. The same sort of thing applies
to emotions, which depend upon the ductless glands. Children
at birth are afraid of loud noises, but not of animals. Watson
took a child eleven months old, who was fond of a certain white
rat; twice at the moment when the child touched the rat, a
sudden noise was made just behind the child’s head. This was
enough to cause fear of the rat on subsequent occasions, no
doubt owing to the fact that the adrenal gland was now stimulated
by the substitute stimulus, just like the salivary glands in
the dog or the trumpet player. The above illustrations show
that “ideas” are not the essential units in association. It
seems that not merely is “mind” irrelevant, but even the brain
is less important than was formerly supposed. At any rate,
what is known experimentally is that the glands and muscles
(both striped and unstriped) of the higher animals exhibit the
law of transfer of response, i.e. when two stimuli have often
been applied together, one will ultimately call out the response
which formerly the other called out. This law is one of the
chief bases of habit. It is also obviously essential to our understanding
of language: the sight of a dog calls up the word
“dog”, and the word “dog” calls up some of the responses
appropriate to a real dog.
There is, however, another element in learning, besides mere
habit. This is the element dealt with by Thorndike’s “Law
of Effect.” Animals tend to repeat acts which have pleasant
consequences, and to avoid such as have unpleasant consequences.
But, as we saw a moment ago, “pleasant” and “unpleasant”
are words which we cannot verify by objective observation.
What we can verify by observation is that an animal
seeks situations which in fact have had certain results, and
avoids situations which in fact have had certain other results.
Moreover, broadly speaking, the animal seeks results which
tend to survival of itself or its offspring, and avoids results
which tend in the opposite direction. This, however, is not
invariable. Moths seek flames and men seek drink, though
neither is biologically useful. It is only approximately, in
situations long common, that animals are so adjusted to their
environment as to act in a way which is advantageous from
a biological standpoint. In fact, biological utility must never
be employed as an explanation, but only noticed as a frequent
characteristic, of the ways in which animals behave.
Dr. Watson is of the opinion that Thorndike’s “Law of
Effect” is unnecessary. He first suggests that only two factors
are called for in the explanation of habit, namely, frequency
and recency. Frequency is covered by Thorndike’s
“Law of Exercise”, but recency, which is almost certainly a
genuine factor, is not covered by Thorndike’s two laws. That
is to say, when a number of random movements have finally
resulted in success, the more recent of these movements are
likely to be repeated earlier, on a second trial, than the earlier
ones. But Dr. Watson finally abandons this method of dealing
with habit-formation in favour of the one law of “conditioned
reflexes” or “learned reactions”. He says (Behaviorism,
p. 166):
“Only a few psychologists have been interested in the problem.
Most of the psychologists, it is to be regretted, have even
failed to see that there is a problem. They believe habit formation
is implanted by kind fairies. For example, Thorndike
speaks of pleasure stamping in the successful movement and
displeasure stamping out the unsuccessful movements. Most
of the psychologists talk, too, quite volubly about the formation
of new pathways in the brain, as though there were a group
of tiny servants of Vulcan there who run through the nervous
system with hammer and chisel digging new trenches and deepening
old ones. I am not sure that the problem when phrased
in this way is a soluble one. I feel that there must come some
simpler way of envisaging the whole process of habit formation
or else it may remain insoluble. Since the advent of the
conditioned reflex hypothesis in psychology with all of the simplifications
(and I am often fearful that it may be an oversimplification!)
I have had my own laryngeal processes
[i.e. what others call “thoughts”] stimulated to work upon this
problem from another angle.”
I agree with Dr. Watson that the explanations of habit-formation
which are usually given are very inadequate, and
that few psychologists have realised either the importance or
the difficulty of the problem. I agree also that a great many
cases are covered by his formula of the conditioned reflex. He
relates a case of a child who once touched a hot radiator, and
afterward avoided it for two years. He adds: “If we should
keep our old habit terminology, we should have in this example a
habit formed by a single trial. There can be then in this case
no ‘stamping in of the successful movement’ and ‘no stamping
out of the unsuccessful movement.’” On the basis of such
examples, he believes that the whole of habit-formation can be
derived from the principle of the conditioned reflex, which he
formulates as follows (p. 168):
Stimulus X will not now call out reaction R; stimulus Y will
call out reaction R (unconditioned reflex); but when stimulus
X is presented first and then Y (which does call out R) shortly
thereafter, X will thereafter call out R. In other words, stimulus
X becomes ever thereafter substituted for Y.
This law is so simple, so important, and so widely true that
there is a danger lest its scope should be exaggerated, just as,
in the eighteenth century, physicists tried to explain everything
by means of gravitation. But when considered as covering all
the ground, it seems to me to suffer from two opposite defects.
In the first place, there are cases where no habit is set up,
although by the law it should be. In the second place, there
are habits which, so far as we can see at present, have a different
genesis.
To take the first point first: the word “pepper” does not
make people sneeze, though according to the law it should.4
Words which describe succulent foods will make the mouth
water; voluptuous words will have some of the effect that
would be produced by the situations they suggest; but no words
will produce sneezes or the reactions appropriate to tickling.
In the diagram given by Dr. Watson (p. 106), there are four
reflexes which appear to be not sources of conditioned reflexes,
namely sneezing, hiccoughing, blinking, and the Babinski reflex;
of these, however, blinking, it is suggested (p. 99) may be
really itself a conditioned reflex. There may be some quite
straightforward explanation of the fact that some reactions can
be produced by substitute stimuli while others cannot, but none
is offered. Therefore the law of the conditioned reflex, as formulated,
is too wide, and it is not clear what is the principle
according to which its scope should be restricted.
4 Dr. Watson apparently entertains hopes of teaching babies to sneeze when
they see the pepper box, but he has not yet done so. See Behaviorism, p. 90.
The second objection to Dr. Watson’s law of habit, if valid,
is more important than the first; but its validity is more open
to question. It is contended that the acts by which solutions
of problems are obtained are, in cases of a certain kind, not
random acts leading to success by mere chance, but acts proceeding
from “insight”, involving a “mental” solution of the
problem as a preliminary to the physical solution. This is
especially the view of those who advocate Gestaltpsychologie
or the psychology of configuration. We may take, as typical
of their attitude on the subject of learning, Köhler’s Mentality
of Apes. Köhler went to Tenerife with certain chimpanzees
in the year 1913; owing to the war he was compelled to remain
with them until 1917, so that his opportunities for study were
extensive. He complains of the maze and cage problems set
by American investigators that they are such as cannot be
solved by intelligence. Sir Isaac Newton himself could not
have got out of the Hampton Court maze by any method except
trial and error. Köhler, on the other hand, set his apes
problems which could be solved by what he calls “insight”.
He would hang up a banana5 out of reach, and leave boxes in
the neighbourhood so that by standing on the boxes the chimpanzees
could reach the fruit. Sometimes they had to pile
three or even four boxes on top of each other before they could
achieve success. Then he would put the banana outside the
bars of the cage, leaving a stick inside, and the ape would get
the banana by reaching for it with the stick. On one occasion,
one of them, named Sultan, had two bamboo sticks, each too
short to reach the banana; after vain efforts followed by a
period of silent thought, he fitted the smaller into the hollow
of the other, and so manufactured one stick which was long
enough. It seems, however, from the account, that he first
fitted the two together more or less accidentally, and only then
realised that he had found a solution. Nevertheless, his behaviour
when he had once realised that one stick could be
made by joining the two was scarcely Watsonian: there was
no longer anything tentative, but a definite triumph, first in
anticipation and then in action. He was so pleased with his
new trick that he drew a number of bananas into his cage before
eating any of them. He behaved, in fact, as capitalists have
behaved with machinery.
5 Called by Köhler “the objective,” because the word “banana” is too humble
for a learned work. The pictures disclose the fact that “the objective” was a
mere banana.
Köhler says: “We can, from our own experience, distinguish
sharply between the kind of conduct which, from the very beginning,
arises out of a consideration of the characteristics of
a situation, and one that does not. Only in the former case
do we speak of insight, and only that behaviour of animals
definitely appears to us intelligent which takes account from the
beginning of the lie of the land, and proceeds to deal with it in
a smooth continuous course. Hence follows this characteristic:
to set up as the criterion of insight, the appearance of a
complete solution with reference to the whole lay-out of the
field.”
Genuine solutions of problems, Köhler says, do not improve
by repetition; they are perfect on the first occasion, and, if
anything, grow worse by repetition, when the excitement of
discovery has worn off. The whole account that Köhler gives
of the efforts of his chimpanzees makes a totally different impression
from that of the rats in mazes, and one is forced to
conclude that the American work is somewhat vitiated by confining
itself to one type of problem, and drawing from that one
type conclusions which it believes to be applicable to all problems
of animal learning. It seems that there are two ways
of learning, one by experience, and the other by what Köhler
calls “insight”. Learning by experience is possible to most
vertebrates, though rarely, so far as is known, to invertebrates.
Learning by “insight”, on the contrary, is not known to exist
in any animals lower than the anthropoid apes, though it
would be extremely rash to assert that it will not be revealed
by further observations on dogs or rats. Unfortunately, some
animals—for instance, elephants—may be extremely intelligent,
but the practical difficulty and expense of experimentation
with them is so great that we are not likely to know much
about them for some time to come. However, the real problem
is already sufficiently definite in Köhler’s book: it is the
analysis of “insight” as opposed to the method of the conditioned
reflex.
Let us first be clear as to the nature of the problem, when
described solely in terms of behaviour. A hungry monkey, if
sufficiently near to a banana, will perform acts such as, in circumstances
to which it has been accustomed, have previously
enabled it to obtain bananas. This fits well with either Watson
or Thorndike, so far. But if these familiar acts fail, the
animal will, if it has been long without food, is in good health,
and is not too tired, proceed to other acts which have never
hitherto produced bananas. One may suppose, if one wishes
to follow Watson, that these new acts are composed of a number
of parts, each of which, on some former occasion, has occurred
in a series which ended with the obtaining of the banana.
Or one may suppose—as I think Thorndike does—that the
acts of the baffled animal are random acts, so that the solution
emerges by pure chance. But even in the first hypothesis, the
element of chance is considerable. Let us suppose that the
acts A, B, C, D, E, have each, on a former occasion, been
part of a series ending with success, but that now for the first
time it is necessary to perform them all, and in the right order.
It is obvious that, if they are only combined by chance, the
animal will be lucky if it performs them all in the right order
before dying of hunger.
But Köhler maintains that to anyone watching his chimpanzees
it was obvious they did not obtain “a composition of
the solution out of chance parts”. He says (pp. 199–200):
“It is certainly not a characteristic of the chimpanzee, when
he is brought into an experimental situation, to make any chance
movements, out of which, among other things, a non-genuine
solution could arise. He is very seldom seen to attempt anything
which would have to be considered accidental in relation
to the situation (excepting, of course, if his interest is turned
away from the objective to other things). As long as his
efforts are directed to the objective, all distinguishable stages
of his behaviour (as with human beings in similar situations)
tend to appear as complete attempts at solutions, none of which
appears as the product of accidentally arrayed parts. This is
true, most of all, of the solution which is finally successful.
Certainly it often follows upon a period of perplexity or quiet
(often a period of survey), but in real and convincing cases,
the solution never appears in a disorder of blind impulses. It
is one continuous smooth action, which can be resolved into
its parts only by the imagination of the onlooker; in reality
they do not appear independently. But that in so many ‘genuine’
cases as have been described, these solutions as wholes
should have arisen from mere chance, is an entirely inadmissible
supposition.”
Thus we may take it as an observed fact that, so far as overt
behaviour is concerned, there are two objections to the type
of theory with which we began, when considered as covering
the whole field. The first objection is that in cases of a certain
kind, the solution appears sooner than it should according to
the doctrine of chances; the second is that it appears as a whole,
i.e. that the animal, after a period of quiescence, suddenly
goes through the right series of actions smoothly, and without
hesitation.
Where human beings are concerned, it is difficult to obtain
such good data as in the case of animals. Human mothers
will not allow their children to be starved, and then shut up
in a room containing a banana which can only be reached by
putting a chair on the table and a footstool on the chair, and
then climbing up without breaking any bones. Nor will they
permit them to be put into the middle of a Hampton Court
maze, with their dinner getting cold outside. Perhaps in time
the State will perform these experiments with the children of
political prisoners, but as yet, perhaps fortunately, the authorities
are not sufficiently interested in science. One can observe,
however, that human learning seems to be of both sorts, namely
that described by Watson and that described by Köhler. I
am persuaded that speech is learnt by the Watsonian method,
so long as it is confined to single words: often the trial and
error, in later stages, proceeds sotto voce, but it takes place
overtly at first, and in some children until their speech is quite
correct. The speaking of sentences, however, is already
more difficult to explain without bringing in the apprehension
of wholes which is the thing upon which Gestaltpsychologie
lays stress. In the later stages of learning, the sort of sudden
illumination which came to Köhler’s chimpanzees is a phenomenon
with which every serious student must be familiar.
One day, after a period of groping bewilderment, the schoolboy
knows what algebra is all about. In writing a book, my
own experience—which I know is fairly common, though by
no means universal—is that for a time I fumble and hesitate,
and then suddenly I see the book as a whole, and have only
to write it down as if I were copying a completed manuscript.
If these phenomena are to be brought within the scope of
behaviourist psychology, it must be by means of “implicit” behaviour.
Watson makes much use of this in the form of talking
to oneself, but in apes it cannot take quite this form. And
it is necessary to have some theory to explain the success of
“implicit” behaviour, whether we call it “thought” or not.
Perhaps such a theory can be constructed on Watson’s lines,
but it has certainly not yet been constructed. Until the behaviourists
have satisfactorily explained the kind of discovery
which appears in Köhler’s observations, we cannot say that
their thesis is proved. This is a matter which will occupy
us again at a later stage; for the present let us preserve an open
mind.
CHAPTER IV LANGUAGE
The subject of language is one which has not been studied with
sufficient care in traditional philosophy. It was taken for
granted that words exist to express “thoughts,” and generally
also that “thoughts” have “objects” which are what the words
“mean”. It was thought that, by means of language, we could
deal directly with what it “means”, and that we need not
analyse with any care either of the two supposed properties of
words, namely that of “expressing” thoughts and that of
“meaning” things. Often when philosophers intended to be
considering the objects meant by words they were in fact considering
only the words, and when they were considering words
they made the mistake of supposing, more or less unconsciously,
that a word is a single entity, not, as it really is, a set of more or
less similar events. The failure to consider language explicitly
has been a cause of much that was bad in traditional philosophy.
I think myself that “meaning” can only be understood
if we treat language as a bodily habit, which is learnt just as
we learn football or bicycling. The only satisfactory way to
treat language, to my mind, is to treat it in this way, as Dr.
Watson does. Indeed, I should regard the theory of language
as one of the strongest points in favour of behaviourism.
Man has various advantages over the beasts, for example,
fire, clothing, agriculture, and tools—not the possession of
domestic animals, for ants have them. But more important
than any of these is language. It is not known how or when
language arose, nor why chimpanzees do not speak. I doubt
if it is even known whether writing or speech is the older form
of language. The pictures made in caves by the Cro-Magnon
men may have been intended to convey a meaning, and may
have been a form of writing. It is known that writing developed
out of pictures, for that happened in historical times;
but it is not known to what extent pictures had been used in
pre-historic times as a means of giving information or commands.
As for spoken language, it differs from the cries of
animals in being not merely an expression of emotion. Animals
have cries of fear, cries expressing pleasure in the discovery of
food, and so on, and by means of these cries they influence each
other’s actions. But they do not appear to have any means of
expressing anything except emotions, and then only emotions
which they are actually feeling. There is no evidence that they
possess anything analogous to narrative. We may say, therefore,
without exaggeration, that language is a human prerogative,
and probably the chief habit in which we are superior to
the “dumb” animals.
There are three matters to be considered in beginning the
study of language. First: what words are, regarded as physical
occurrences; secondly, what are the circumstances that lead
us to use a given word; thirdly, what are the effects of our
hearing or seeing a given word. But as regards the second and
third of these questions, we shall find ourselves led on from
words to sentences and thus confronted with fresh problems
perhaps demanding rather the methods of Gestaltpsychologie.
Ordinary words are of four kinds: spoken, heard, written,
and read. It is of course largely a matter of convention that
we do not use words of other kinds. There is the deaf-and-dumb
language; a Frenchman’s shrug of the shoulders is a
word; in fact, any kind of externally perceptible bodily movement
may become a word, if social usage so ordains. But the
convention which has given the supremacy to speaking is one
which has a good ground, since there is no other way of producing
a number of perceptibly different bodily movements so
quickly or with so little muscular effort. Public speaking would
be very tedious if statesmen had to use the deaf-and-dumb language,
and very exhausting if all words involved as much muscular
effort as a shrug of the shoulders. I shall ignore all
forms of language except speaking, hearing, writing, and reading,
since the others are relatively unimportant and raise no
special psychological problems.
A spoken word consists of a series of movements in the
larynx and the mouth, combined with breath. Two closely
similar series of such movements may be instances of the same
words, though they may also not be, since two words with different
meanings may sound alike; but two such series which
are not closely similar cannot be instances of the same word.
(I am confining myself to one language.) Thus a single
spoken word, say “dog,” is a certain set of closely similar series
of bodily movements, the set having as many members as
there are occasions when the word “dog” is pronounced. The
degree of similarity required in order that the occurrence should
be an instance of the word “dog” cannot be specified exactly.
Some people say “dawg”, and this must certainly be admitted.
A German might say “tok”, and then we should begin to be
doubtful. In marginal cases, we cannot be sure whether a
word has been pronounced or not. A spoken word is a form
of bodily behaviour without sharp boundaries, like jumping
or hopping or running. Is a man running or walking? In a
walking-race the umpire may have great difficulty in deciding.
Similarly there may be cases where it cannot be decided whether
a man has said “dog” or “dock”. A spoken word is thus at
once general and somewhat vague.
We usually take for granted the relation between a word
spoken and a word heard. “Can you hear what I say?” we
ask, and the person addressed says “yes”. This is of course
a delusion, a part of the naive realism of our unreflective outlook
on the world. We never hear what is said; we hear
something having a complicated causal connection with what is
said. There is first the purely physical process of sound-waves
from the mouth of the speaker to the ear of the hearer, then
a complicated process in the ear and nerves, and then an event
in the brain, which is related to our hearing of the sound in a
manner to be investigated later, but is at any rate simultaneous
with our hearing of the sound. This gives the physical
causal connection between the word spoken and the word
heard. There is, however, also another connection of a more
psychological sort. When a man utters a word, he also hears
it himself, and so that the word spoken and the word heard
become intimately associated for anyone who knows how to
speak. And a man who knows how to speak can also utter any
word he hears in his own language, so that the association
works equally well both ways. It is because of the intimacy of
this association that the plain man identifies the word spoken
with the word heard, although in fact the two are separated by
a wide gulf.
In order that speech may serve its purpose, it is not necessary,
as it is not possible, that heard and spoken words should
be identical, but it is necessary that when a man utters different
words the heard words should be different, and when he
utters the same word on two occasions the heard word should
be approximately the same on the two occasions. The first of
these depends upon the sensitiveness of the ear and its distance
from the speaker; we cannot distinguish between two rather
similar words if we are too far off from the man who utters
them. The second condition depends upon uniformity in the
physical conditions, and is realised in all ordinary circumstances.
But if the speaker were surrounded by instruments
which were resonant to certain notes but not to certain others,
some tones of voice might carry and others might be lost. In
that case, if he uttered the same word with two different intonations,
the hearer might be quite unable to recognise the
sameness. Thus the efficacy of speech depends upon a number
of physical conditions. These, however, we will take for
granted, in order to come as soon as possible to the more
psychological parts of our topic.
Written words differ from spoken words in being material
structures. A spoken word is a process in the physical world,
having an essential time-order; a written word is a series of
pieces of matter, having an essential space-order. As to what
we mean by “matter”, that is a question with which we shall
have to deal at length at a later stage. For the present it is
enough to observe that the material structures which constitute
written words, unlike the processes that constitute spoken words,
are capable of enduring for a long time—sometimes for thousands
of years. Moreover, they are not confined to one neighbourhood,
but can be made to travel about the world. These
are the two great advantages of writing over speech. This, at
least, has been the case until recently. But with the coming of
radio writing it has begun to lose its pre-eminence: one man can
now speak to multitudes spread over a whole country. Even
in the matter of permanence, speech may become the equal
of writing. Perhaps, instead of legal documents, we shall have
gramophone records, with voice signatures by the parties to the
contract. Perhaps, as in Wells’s When the Sleeper Awakes,
books will no longer be printed but merely arranged for the
gramophone. In that case the need for writing may almost
cease to exist. However, let us return from these speculations
to the world of the present day.
The word read, as opposed to the written or printed word,
is just as evanescent as the word spoken or heard. Whenever
a written word, exposed to light, is in a suitable spatial relation
to a normal eye, it produces a certain complicated effect
upon the eye; the part of this process which occurs outside the
eye is investigated by the science of light, whereas the part that
occurs in the eye belongs to physiological optics. There is then
a further process, first in the optic nerve and afterwards in the
brain; the process in the brain is simultaneous with vision.
What further relation it has to vision is a question as to which
there has been much philosophical controversy; we shall return
to it at a later stage. The essence of the matter, as regards
the causal efficacy of writing, is that the act of writing produces
quasi-permanent material structures which, throughout the
whole of their duration, produce closely similar results upon
all suitably placed normal eyes; and as in the case of speaking,
different written words lead to different read words, and the
same word written twice leads to the same read word—again
with obvious limitations.
So much for the physical side of language, which is often
unduly neglected. I come now to the psychological side, which
is what really concerns us in this chapter.
The two questions we have to answer, apart from the problems
raised by sentences as opposed to words, are: First, what
sort of behaviour is stimulated by hearing a word? And secondly,
what sort of occasion stimulates us to the behaviour
that consists in pronouncing a word? I put the questions in
this order because children learn to react to the words of others
before they learn to use words themselves. It might be objected
that, in the history of the race, the first spoken word must
have preceded the first heard word, at least by a fraction of a
second. But this is not very relevant, nor is it certainly true.
A noise may have meaning to the hearer, but not to the utterer;
in that case it is a heard word but not a spoken word. (I shall
explain what I mean by “meaning” shortly.) Friday’s footprint
had “meaning” for Robinson Crusoe but not for Friday.
However that may be, we shall do better to avoid the very
hypothetical parts of anthropology that would be involved,
and take up the learning of language as it can be observed
in the human infant of the present day. And in the human
infant as we know him, definite reactions to the words of others
come much earlier than the power of uttering words himself.
A child learns to understand words exactly as he learns any
other process of bodily association. If you always say “bottle”
when you give a child his bottle, he presently reacts to the
word “bottle”, within limits, as he formerly reacted to the
bottle. This is merely an example of the law of association
which we considered in the preceding chapter. When the association
has been established, parents say that the child “understands”
the word “bottle”, or knows what the word “means”.
Of course the word does not have all the effects that the actual
bottle has. It does not exert gravitation, it does not nourish, it
cannot bump on to the child’s head. The effects which are
shared by the word and the thing are those which depend upon
the law of association or “conditional reflexes” or “learned
reactions”. These may be called “associative” effects or
“mnemic” effects—the latter name being derived from Semon’s
book Mneme,6 in which he traces all phenomena analogous to
memory to a law which is, in effect, not very different from the
law of association or “conditioned reflexes”.
It is possible to be a little more precise as to the class of
effects concerned. A physical object is a centre from which
a variety of causal chains emanate. If the object is visible
to John Smith, one of the causal chains emanating from it
consists first of light-waves (or light-quanta) which travel from
the object to John Smith’s eye, then of events in his eye and
optic nerve, then of events in his brain, and then (perhaps)
of a reaction on his part. Now mnemic effects belong only to
events in living tissue; therefore only those effects of the bottle
which happen either inside John Smith’s body, or as a result
of his reaction to the bottle, can become associated with his
hearing the word “bottle”. And even then only certain events
can be associated: nourishment happens in the body, yet the
word “bottle” cannot nourish. The law of conditioned reflexes
is subject to ascertainable limitations, but within its limits it
supplies what is wanted to explain the understanding of words.
The child becomes excited when he sees the bottle; this is
already a conditioned reflex, due to experience that this sight
precedes a meal. One further stage in conditioning makes the
child grow excited when he hears the word “bottle”. He is
then said to “understand” the word.
We may say, then, that a person understands a word which
he hears if, so far as the law of conditioned reflexes is applicable,
the effects of the word are the same as those of what it
is said to “mean”. This of course only applies to words like
“bottle”, which denote some concrete object or some class of
concrete objects. To understand a word such as “reciprocity”
or “republicanism” is a more complicated matter, and cannot
be considered until we have dealt with sentences. But before
considering sentences we have to examine the circumstances
which make us use a word, as opposed to the consequences of
hearing it used.
Saying a word is more difficult than using it, except in the
case of a few simple sounds which infants make before they
know that they are words, such as “ma-ma” and “da-da.”
These two are among the many random sounds that all babies
make. When a child says “ma-ma” in the presence of his
mother by chance she thinks he knows what this noise means,
and she shows pleasure in ways that are agreeable to the infant.
Gradually, in accordance with Thorndike’s law of effect, he
acquires the habit of making this noise in the presence of his
mother, because in these circumstances the consequences are
pleasant. But it is only a very small number of words that are
acquired in this way. The great majority of words are acquired
by imitation, combined with the association between
thing and word which the parents deliberately establish in the
early stages (after the very first stage). It is obvious that
using words oneself involves something over and above the
association between the sound of the word and its meaning.
Dogs understand many words, and infants understand far more
than they can say. The infant has to discover that it is possible
and profitable to make noises like those which he hears. (This
statement must not be taken quite literally, or it would be too
intellectualistic.) He would never discover this if he did not
make noises at random, without the intention of talking. He
then gradually finds that he can make noises like those which
he hears, and in general the consequences of doing so are
pleasant. Parents are pleased, desired objects can be obtained,
and—perhaps most important of all—there is a sense of power
in making intended instead of accidental noises. But in this
whole process there is nothing essentially different from the
learning of mazes by rats. It resembles this form of learning,
rather than that of Köhler apes, because no amount of intelligence
could enable the child to find out the names of things—as
in the case of the mazes, experience is the only possible guide.
When a person knows how to speak, the conditioning proceeds
in the opposite direction to that which operates in understanding
what others say. The reaction of a person who knows
how to speak, when he notices a cat, is naturally to utter the
word “cat”; he may not actually do so, but he will have a reaction
leading towards this act, even if for some reason the overt
act does not take place. It is true that he may utter the word
“cat” because he is “thinking” about a cat, not actually seeing
one. This, however, as we shall see in a moment, is merely
one further stage in the process of conditioning. The use of
single words, as opposed to sentences, is wholly explicable, so
far as I can see, by the principles which apply to animals in
mazes.
Certain philosophers who have a prejudice against analysis
contend that the sentence comes first and the single word later.
In this connection they always allude to the language of the
Patagonians, which their opponents, of course, do not know.
We are given to understand that a Patagonian can understand
you if you say “I am going to fish in the lake behind the western
hill”, but that he cannot understand the word “fish” by
itself. (This instance is imaginary, but it represents the sort
of thing that is asserted.) Now it may be that Patagonians are
peculiar—indeed they must be, or they would not choose to live
in Patagonia. But certainly infants in civilized countries do not
behave in this way, with the exception of Thomas Carlyle and
Lord Macaulay. The former never spoke before the age of
three, when, hearing his younger brother cry, he said, “What
ails wee Jock?” Lord Macaulay “learned in suffering what
he taught in song”, for, having spilt a cup of hot tea over himself
at a party, he began his career as a talker by saying to his
hostess, after a time, “Thank you, Madam, the agony is
abated”. These, however, are facts about biographers, not
about the beginnings of speech in infancy. In all children that
have been carefully observed, sentences come much later than
single words.
Children, at first, are limited as to their power of producing
sounds, and also by the paucity of their learned associations.
I am sure the reason why “ma-ma” and “da-da” have
the meaning they have is that they are sounds which infants
make spontaneously at an early age, and are therefore convenient
as sounds to which the elders can attach meaning. In
the very beginning of speech there is not imitation of grownups,
but the discovery that sounds made spontaneously have
agreeable results. Imitation comes later, after the child has
discovered that sounds can have this quality of “meaning”.
The type of skill involved is throughout exactly similar to that
involved in learning to play a game or ride a bicycle.
We may sum up this theory of meaning in a simple formula.
When through the law of conditioned reflexes, A has come
to be a cause of C, we will call A an “associative” cause of C,
and C an “associative” effect of A. We shall say that, to a
given person, the word A, when he hears it, “means” C, if the
associative effects of A are closely similar to those of C; and
we shall say that the word A, when he utters it, “means” C,
if the utterance of A is an associative effect of C, or of something
previously associated with C. To put the matter more
concretely, the word “Peter” means a certain person if the
associated effects of hearing the word “Peter” are closely similar
to those of seeing Peter, and the associative causes of uttering
the word “Peter” are occurrences previously associated
with Peter. Of course as our experience increases in complexity
this simple schema becomes obscured and overlaid, but
I think it remains fundamentally true.
There is an interesting and valuable book by Messrs. C. K.
Ogden and I. A. Richards, called The Meaning of Meaning.
This book, owing to the fact that it concentrates on the causes
of uttering words, not on the effects of hearing them, gives
only half the above theory, and that in a somewhat incomplete
form. It says that a word and its meaning have the same
causes. I should distinguish between active meaning, that of
the man uttering the word, and passive meaning, that of the
man hearing the word. In active meaning the word is associatively
caused by what it means or something associated with
this; in passive meaning, the associative effects of the word
are approximately the same as those of what it means.
On behaviourist lines, there is no important difference between
proper names and what are called “abstract” or “generic”
words. A child learns to use the word “cat”, which is general,
just as he learns to use the word “Peter”, which is a
proper name. But in actual fact “Peter” really covers a number
of different occurrences, and is in a sense general. Peter
may be near or far, walking or standing or sitting, laughing
or frowning. All these produce different stimuli, but the
stimuli have enough in common to produce the reaction consisting
of the word “Peter”. Thus there is no essential difference,
from a behaviourist point of view, between “Peter” and
“man”. There are more resemblances between the various
stimuli to the word “Peter” than between those to the word
“man”, but this is only a difference of degree. We have not
names for the fleeting particular occurrences which make up the
several appearances of Peter, because they are not of much
practical importance; their importance, in fact, is purely theoretic
and philosophical. As such, we shall have a good deal to
say about them at a later stage. For the present, we notice
that there are many occurrences of Peter, and many occurrences
of the word “Peter”; each, to the man who sees Peter, is a
set of events having certain similarities. More exactly, the
occurrences of Peter are causally connected, whereas the occurrences
of the word “Peter” are connected by similarity. But
this is a distinction which need not concern us yet.
General words such as “man” or “cat” or “triangle” are
said to denote “universals”, concerning which, from the time
of Plato to the present day, philosophers have never ceased to
debate. Whether there are universals, and, if so, in what sense,
is a metaphysical question, which need not be raised in connection
with the use of language. The only point about universals
that needs to be raised at this point is that the correct
use of general words is no evidence that a man can think about
universals. It has often been supposed that, because we can
use a word like “man” correctly, we must be capable of a corresponding
“abstract” idea of man, but this is quite a mistake.
Some reactions are appropriate to one man, some to another,
but all have certain elements in common. If the word “man”
produces in us the reactions which are common but no others,
we may be said to understand the word “man”. In learning
geometry, one acquires the habit of avoiding special interpretations
of such a word as “triangle”. We know that, when we
have a proposition about triangles in general, we must not think
specially of a right-angled triangle or any one kind of triangle.
This is essentially the process of learning to associate with the
word what is associated with all triangles; when we have learnt
this, we understand the word “triangle”. Consequently there
is no need to suppose that we ever apprehend universals, although
we use general words correctly.
Hitherto we have spoken of single words, and among these
we have considered only those that can naturally be employed
singly. A child uses single words of a certain kind before constructing
sentences; but some words presuppose sentences. No
one would use the word “paternity” until after using such sentences
as “John is the father of James”; no one would use the
word “causality” until after using such sentences as “the fire
makes me warm”. Sentences introduce new considerations,
and are not quite so easily explained on behaviourist lines.
Philosophy, however, imperatively demands an understanding
of sentences, and we must therefore consider them.
As we found earlier, all infants outside Patagonia begin with
single words, and only achieve sentences later. But they differ
enormously in the speed with which they advance from the one
to the other. My own two children adopted entirely different
methods. My son first practised single letters, then single
words, and only achieved correct sentences of more than three
or four words at the age of two and three months. My daughter,
on the contrary, advanced very quickly to sentences, in
which there was hardly ever an error. At the age of eighteen
months, when supposed to be sleeping, she was overheard saying
to herself: “Last year I used to dive off the diving-board,
I did.” Of course “last year” was merely a phrase repeated
without understanding. And no doubt the first sentences used
by children are always repetitions, unchanged, of sentences
they have heard used by others. Such cases raise no new principle
not involved in the learning of words. What does raise
a new principle is the power of putting together known words
into a sentence which has never been heard, but which expresses
correctly what the infant wishes to convey. This involves the
power to manipulate form and structure. It does not of course
involve the apprehension of form or structure in the abstract,
any more than the use of the word “man” involves apprehension
of a universal. But it does involve a causal connection
between the form of the stimulus and the form of the reaction.
An infant very soon learns to be differently affected by the
statement “cats eat mice” from the way he would be affected
by the statement “mice eat cats”; and not much later he learns
to make one of these statements rather than the other. In
such a case, the cause (in hearing) or the effect (in speaking)
is a whole sentence. It may be that one part of the environment
is sufficient to cause one word, while another is sufficient
to cause another, but it is only the two parts in their relation
that can cause the whole sentence. Thus wherever sentences
come in we have a causal relation between two complex facts,
namely the fact asserted and the sentence asserting it; the
facts as wholes enter into the cause-and-effect relation, which
cannot be explained wholly as compounded of relations between
their parts. Moreover, as soon as the child has learned to use
correctly relational words, such as “eat”, he has become capable
of being causally affected by a relational feature of the environment,
which involves a new degree of complexity not required
for the use of ordinary nouns.
Thus the correct use of relational words, i.e. of sentences,
involves what may be correctly termed “perception of form”,
i.e. it involves a definite reaction to a stimulus which is a form.
Suppose, for example, that a child has learnt to say that one
thing is “above” another when this is in fact the case. The
stimulus to the use of the word “above” is a relational feature
of the environment, and we may say that this feature is “perceived”
since it produces a definite reaction. It may be said
that the relation above is not very like the word “above”.
That is true; but the same is true of ordinary physical objects.
A stone, according to the physicists, is not at all like what we
see when we look at it, and yet we may be correctly said to “perceive”
it. This, however, is to anticipate. The definite point
which has emerged is that, when a person can use sentences
correctly, that is a proof of sensitiveness to formal or relational
stimuli.
The structure of a sentence asserting some relational fact,
such as “this is above that”, or “Brutus killed Cæsar”, differs
in an important respect from the structure of the fact which
it asserts. Above is a relation which holds between the two
terms “this” and “that”; but the word “above” is not a relation.
In the sentence the relation is the temporal order of
the words (or the spatial order, if they are written), but the
word for the relation is itself as substantial as the other words.
In inflected languages, such as Latin, the order of the words is
not necessary to show the “sense” of the relation; but in uninflected
languages this is the only way of distinguishing between
“Brutus killed Cæsar” and “Cæsar killed Brutus”. Words
are physical phenomena, having spatial and temporal relations;
we make use of these relations in our verbal symbolisation of
other relations, chiefly to show the “sense” of the relation, i.e.
whether it goes from A to B or from B to A.
A great deal of the confusion about relations which has prevailed
in practically all philosophies comes from the fact, which
we noticed just now, that relations are indicated, not by other
relations, but by words which, in themselves, are just like other
words. Consequently, in thinking about relations, we constantly
hover between the unsubstantiality of the relation itself
and the substantiality of the word. Take, say, the fact that
lightning precedes thunder. If we were to express this by a
language closely reproducing the structure of the fact, we
should have to say simply: “lightning, thunder”, where the fact
that the first word precedes the second means that what the
first word means precedes what the second word means. But
even if we adopted this method for temporal order, we should
still need words for all other relations, because we could not
without intolerable ambiguity symbolise them also by the order
of our words. All this will be important to remember when
we come to consider the structure of the world, since nothing
but a preliminary study of language will preserve us from being
misled by language in our metaphysical speculations.
Throughout this chapter I have said nothing about the narrative
and imaginative uses of words; I have dealt with words
in connection with an immediate sensible stimulus closely connected
with what they mean. The other uses of words are
difficult to discuss until we have considered memory and imagination.
In the present chapter I have confined myself to a behaviouristic
explanation of the effects of words heard as stimuli,
and the causes of words spoken when the words apply to something
sensibly present. I think we shall find that other uses
of words, such as the narrative and imaginative, involve only
new applications of the law of association. But we cannot develop
this theme until we have discussed several further psychological
questions.
CHAPTER V PERCEPTION OBJECTIVELY REGARDED
It will be remembered that the task upon which we are at present
engaged is the definition of “knowledge” as a phenomenon
discoverable by an outside observer. When we have said what
we can from this objective standpoint, we will ask ourselves
whether anything further, and if so what, is to be learnt from
the subjective standpoint, in which we take account of facts
which can only be discovered when the observer and the observed
are the same person. But for the present we will resolutely
confine ourselves to those facts about a human being
which another human being can observe, together with such
inferences as can be drawn from these facts.
The word “knowledge” is very ambiguous. We say that
Watson’s rats “know” how to get out of mazes, that a child
of three “knows” how to talk, that a man “knows” the people
with whom he is acquainted, that he “knows” what he had for
breakfast this morning, and that he “knows” when Columbus
first crossed the ocean. French and German are less ambiguous,
since each has two words for different kinds of “knowing”,
which we tend to confuse in our thoughts because we confuse
them in our language. I shall not attempt as yet to deal with
knowledge in general, but rather with certain less general concepts
which would ordinarily be included under “knowledge”.
And first of all I will deal with perception—not as it appears
to the perceiver, but as it can be tested by an outside observer.
Let us try, first, to get a rough preliminary view of the sort
of thing we are going to mean by “perception”. One may say
that a man “perceives” anything that he notices through his
senses. This is not a question of the sense-organs alone, though
they are a necessary condition. No man can perceive by sight
what is not in his field of vision, but he may look straight at a
thing without perceiving it. I have frequently had the experience—supposed
to be characteristic of philosophers—of looking
everywhere for my spectacles although they were before my
eyes when my search began. We cannot therefore tell what a
man is perceiving by observing his sense-organs alone, though
they may enable us to know that he is not perceiving something.
The observer can only know that a man is perceiving something
if the man reacts in some appropriate manner. If I say to a
man “please pass the mustard” and he thereupon passes it, it
is highly probable that he perceived what I said, although it
may of course be a mere coincidence that he passed it at that
moment. But if I say to him “the telephone number you want
is 2467” and he proceeds to call that number, the odds against
his doing so by mere chance are very great—roughly 10,000
to 1. And if a man reads aloud out of a book, and I look over
his shoulder and perceive the same words, it becomes quite
fantastic to suppose that he does not perceive the words he is
uttering. We can thus in many cases achieve practical certainty
as to some of the things that other people are perceiving.
Perception is a species of a wider genus, namely sensitivity.
Sensitivity is not confined to living things; in fact it is best exemplified
by scientific instruments. A material object is said to
be “sensitive” to such and such a stimulus, if, when the stimulus
is present, it behaves in a way noticeably different from that
in which it behaves in the absence of the stimulus. A photographic
plate is sensitive to light, a barometer is sensitive to
pressure, a thermometer to temperature, a galvanometer to
electric current, and so on. In all these cases, we might say, in
a certain metaphorical sense, that an instrument “perceives” the
stimulus to which it is sensitive. We do not in fact say so;
we feel that perception involves something more than we find
in scientific instruments. What is this something more?
The traditional answer would be: consciousness. But this
answer, right or wrong, is not what we are seeking at the moment,
because we are considering the percipient as he appears
to an outside observer, to whom his “consciousness” is only
an inference. Is there anything in perception as viewed from
without that distinguishes it from the sensitivity of a scientific
instrument?
There is, of course, the fact that human beings are sensitive
to a greater variety of stimuli than any instrument. Each
separate sense-organ can be surpassed by something made artificially
sensitive to its particular stimulus. Photographic plates
can photograph stars that we cannot see; clinical thermometers
register differences of temperature that we cannot feel; and
so on. But there is no way of combining a microscope, a microphone,
a thermometer, a galvanometer, and so on, into a single
organism which will react in an integral manner to the combination
of all the different stimuli that affect its different
“sense-organs”. This, however, is perhaps only a proof that
our mechanical skill is not so great as it may in time become.
It is certainly not enough to define the difference between a dead
instrument and a living body.
The chief difference—perhaps the only one from our present
point of view—is that living bodies are subject to the law
of association or of the “conditioned reflex”. Consider, for
instance, an automatic machine. It has a reflex which makes
it sensitive to pennies, in response to which it gives up chocolate.
But it never learns to give up chocolate on merely seeing
a penny, or hearing the word “penny”. If you kept it in your
house, and said “Abracadabra” to it every time you inserted a
penny, it would not in the end be moved to action by the mere
word “Abracadabra”. Its reflexes remain unconditioned, as
do some of ours, such as sneezing. But with us sneezing is
peculiar in this respect—hence its unimportance. Most of our
reflexes can be conditioned, and the conditioned reflex can in
turn be conditioned afresh, and so on without limit. This is
what makes the reactions of the higher animals, and especially
of man, so much more interesting and complicated than the
reactions of machines. Let us see whether this one law will
suffice to distinguish perception from other forms of sensitivity.
The variability in a human being’s responses to a given stimulus
has given rise to the traditional distinction between cognition
and volition. When one’s rich uncle comes for a visit, smiles
are the natural response; after he has lost his money, a colder
demeanour results from the new conditioning. Thus the reaction
to the stimulus has come to be divided into two parts,
one purely receptive and sensory, the other active and motor.
Perception, as traditionally conceived, is, so to speak, the end
term of the receptive-sensory part of the reaction, while volition
(in its widest sense) is the first term of the active-motor
part of the reaction. It was possible to suppose that the receptive
part of the reaction would be always the same for the
same stimulus, and that the difference due to experience would
only arise in the motor part. The last term of the passive
part, as it appears to the person concerned, was called “sensation”.
But in fact the influence of the law of conditioned reflexes
goes much deeper than this theory supposed. As we
saw, the contraction of the pupil, which is normally due to
bright light, can be conditioned so as to result from a loud
noise. What we see depends largely upon muscular adjustments
of the eyes, which we make quite unconsciously. But
apart from the contraction of the pupil only one of them is a
true reflex, namely turning the eyes towards a bright light.
This is a movement which children can perform on the day of
their birth; I know this, not merely from personal observation,
but also, what is more, from the text-books. But new-born
infants cannot follow a moving light with their eyes, nor can
they focus or accommodate. As a consequence, the purely receptive
part of their reaction to visual objects, in so far as this
reaction is visual, is different from that of adults or older children,
whose eye muscles adjust themselves so as to see clearly.
But here again all sorts of factors enter in. Innumerable
objects are in our field of vision, but only some (at most) are
interesting to us. If some one says “look, there’s a snake”, we
adjust our eyes afresh and obtain a new “sensation”. Then,
when the purely visual part is finished, there are stimulations,
by association, of other centres in the brain. There are pictures,
in Köhler’s book, of apes watching other apes on the
top of insecure piles of boxes, and the spectators have their
arms raised in sympathetic balancing movements. Any one
who watches gymnastics or skilful dancing is liable to experience
sympathetic muscular contractions. Any visual object that
we might be touching will stimulate incipient touch reactions,
but the sun, moon, and stars do not.
Conversely, visual reactions may be stimulated through association
with other stimuli. When motor-cars were still uncommon,
I was walking one day with a friend when a tire punctured
in our neighbourhood with a loud report. He thought
it was a revolver, and averred that he had seen the flash. In
dreams, this sort of mechanism operates uncontrolled. Some
stimulus—say the noise of the maid knocking at the door—becomes
interpreted in fantastic ways which are governed by
association. I remember once dreaming that I was in an inn
in the country in Germany and was wakened by a choir singing
outside my window. Finally I really woke, and found that a
spring shower was making a very musical noise on the roof.
At least, I heard a very musical noise, and now re-interpreted
it as a shower on the roof. This hypothesis I confirmed by looking
out of the window. In waking life we are critical of the
interpretative hypotheses that occur to us, and therefore do
not make such wild mistakes as in dreams. But the creative, as
opposed to the critical, mechanism is the same in waking life as
it is in dreams: there is always far more richness in the experience
than the sensory stimulus alone would warrant. All adaptation
to environment acquired during the life of the individual
might be regarded as learning to dream dreams that succeed
rather than dreams that fail. The dreams we have when
we are asleep usually end in a surprise: the dreams we have in
waking life are less apt to do so. Sometimes they do, as when
pride goes before a fall; but in that case they are regarded as
showing maladjustment, unless there is some large external
cause, such as an earthquake. One might say that a person
properly adapted to his environment is one whose dreams never
end in the sort of surprise that would wake him up. In that
case, he will think that his dreams are objective reality. But if
modern physics is to be believed, the dreams we call waking
perceptions have only a very little more resemblance to objective
reality than the fantastic dreams of sleep. They have
some truth, but only just so much as is required to make them
useful.
Until we begin to reflect, we unhesitatingly assume that what
we see is really “there” in the outside world, except in such
cases as reflections in mirrors. Physics and the theory of the
way in which perceptions are caused show that this naive belief
cannot be quite true. Perception may, and I think does, enable
us to know something of the outer world, but it is not the direct
revelation that we naturally suppose it to be. We cannot go
into this question adequately until we have considered what the
philosopher has to learn from physics; I am merely giving, by
anticipation, the reasons for regarding perception as a form
of reaction to the environment, displayed in some bodily movement,
rather than as a form of knowledge. When we have
considered further what constitutes knowledge, we may find
that perception is, after all, a form of knowledge, but only
because knowledge is not quite what we naturally suppose it to
be. For the present, let us stick to the view of perception that
can be obtained by the external observer, i.e. as something displayed
in the manner of reacting to the environment.
From the point of view of the external observer, perception
is established just like any other causal correlation. We observe
that, whenever a certain object stands in a certain spatial
relation to a man’s body, the man’s body makes a certain
movement or set of movements; we shall then say that the man
“perceives” the object. So the new-born baby turns its eyes
slowly towards a bright light which is not in the centre of the
field of vision; this entitles us to say that the baby “perceives”
the light. If he is blind, his eyes do not move in this way. A
bird flying about in a wood does not bump into the branches,
whereas in a room it will bump into the glass of the window.
This entitles us to say that the bird perceives the branches but
not the glass. Do we “perceive” the glass or do we merely
know that it is there? This question introduces us to the
complications produced by association. We know by experience,
from the sense of touch, that there is usually glass in
window-frames; thus it makes us react to the window-frames as
if we could see the glass. But sometimes there is no glass, and
still we shall perhaps behave as if there were. If this can happen,
it shows that we do not perceive the glass, since our reaction
is the same whether there is glass or not. If, however,
the glass is coloured, or slightly distorting, or not perfectly
clean, a person accustomed to glass will be able to distinguish a
frame containing glass from one which has none. In that case
it is more difficult to decide whether we are to say that he “perceives”
the glass or not. It is certain that perception is affected
by experience. A person who can read perceives print where
another would not. A musician perceives differences between
notes which to an untrained ear are indistinguishable. People
unaccustomed to the telephone cannot understand what they
hear in it; but this is perhaps not really a case in point.
The difficulty we are considering arises from the fact that a
human body, unlike a scientific instrument, is perpetually changing
its reaction to a given stimulus, under the influence of the
law of association. Moreover, the human body is always doing
something. How, then, are we to know whether what it is
doing is the result of a given stimulus or not? In most cases,
however, this difficulty is not very serious, particularly when we
are dealing with people old enough to speak. When you go to
the oculist he asks you to read a number of letters growing
gradually smaller; at some point you fail. Where you have
succeeded, he knows that you have perceived enough to make
out what letter it is. Or you take a pair of compasses and press
the points into a man’s back, asking him if he feels two pricks
or only one. He may say one when the two points are near
together; if he is on his guard against this error he may say
two when in fact there is only one. But if the points are sufficiently
far apart he will never make a mistake. That is to say,
the bodily movement consisting in pronouncing the word “two”
will invariably result from a certain stimulus. (Invariably,
I mean, for a given subject on a given day.) This entitles us
to say that the man can perceive that there are two points provided
they are not too near together. Or you say: “What
can you see on the horizon?” One man says, “I see a ship”.
Another says, “I see a steamer with two funnels”. A third
says, “I see a Cunarder going from Southampton to New
York”. How much of what these three people say is to count
as perception? They may all three be perfectly right in what
they say, and yet we should not concede that a man can “perceive”
that the ship is going from Southampton to New York.
This, we should say, is inference. But it is by no means easy
to draw a line; some things which are, in an important sense,
inferential, must be admitted to be perceptions. The man who
says “I see a ship” is using inference. Apart from experience,
he only sees a queerly shaped dark dot on a blue background.
Experience has taught him that that sort of dot “means” a ship;
that is to say, he has a conditioned reflex which causes him to
utter, aloud or to himself, the word “ship” when his eye is
stimulated in a certain way. To disentangle what is due to experience,
and what not, in the perceptions of an adult, is a
hopeless task. Practically, if a word comes without previous
verbal intermediaries, the ordinary man would include what
the word means in the perception, while he would not do so if
the man arrives at the word after verbal preliminaries, overt or
internal. But this is itself a question of familiarity. Show a
child a pentagon, and he will have to count the sides to know
how many there are; but after a little experience of geometrical
figures, the word “pentagon” will arise without any previous
words. And in any case such a criterion is theoretically worthless.
The whole affair is a matter of degree, and we cannot
draw any sharp line between perception and inference. As
soon as this is realised, our difficulties are seen to be purely verbal
and therefore unimportant.
It will be observed that we are not attempting at present
to say what constitutes perception, but only what kind of behaviour
on the part of a person whom we are observing will
justify us in saying that he has perceived this or that feature of
his environment. I suggest that we are justified in saying that
a man “perceives” such a feature if, throughout some such
period as a day, there is some bodily act which he performs
whenever that feature is present, but not at any other time.
This condition is clearly sufficient, but not necessary—that is to
say, there may be perception even when it is not fulfilled. A
man’s reaction may change through conditioning, even in so
short a period as a day. Again, there may be a reaction, but
one which is too slight to be observable; in this case the criterion
of perception is theoretically satisfied, but not practically,
since no one can know that it is. We often have evidence later
on that something was perceived, although at the moment there
was no discoverable reaction. I have frequently known children
repeat afterwards some remark which, at the time, they
seemed not to have heard. This sort of case affords another
kind of evidence of perception, namely, the evidence afforded
by a delayed response. Some people will sit silent and impassive
in a company of talkers, giving no evidence that they are
listening; yet they may go home and write down the conversation
verbatim in their journals. These are the typical writers
of memoirs. More remarkable still, I know one man—a man
of genius, it is true—who talks incessantly, who yet, after meeting
a total stranger, knows exactly what the stranger would
have said if he had been given the chance. How this is managed,
I do not know; but such a man is rightly called “perceptive”.
Obviously, in dealing with human beings old enough to talk,
words afford the best evidence of perception. A man’s verbal
responses to perceptive situations do not change much after the
first few years of life. If you see a kingfisher, and at the same
moment your companion says “there’s a kingfisher”, that is
pretty conclusive evidence that he saw it. But, as this case
illustrates, our evidence that some one else has perceived something
always depends upon our own perceptions. And our own
perceptions are known to us in a different way from that in
which the perceptions of others are known to us. This is one
of the weak spots in the attempt at a philosophy from the objective
standpoint. Such a philosophy really assumes knowledge
as a going concern, and takes for granted the world which
a man derives from his own perceptions. We cannot tackle
all our philosophical problems by the objective method, but it
is worth while to proceed with it as far as it will take us. This
whole question of perception will have to be attacked afresh
from a different angle, and we shall then find reason to regard
the behaviouristic standpoint as inadequate, though valid so
far as it goes. We have still, however, a long road to go before
we shall be driven to consider the subjective standpoint;
more particularly, we have to define “knowledge” and “inference”
behaviouristically, and then, making a new start, to consider
what modern physics makes of “matter”. But for the
moment there are still some things to be said about perception
from the objective standpoint.
It will be seen that, according to our criterion of perception,
an object perceived need not be in contact with the percipient’s
body. The sun, moon, and stars are perceived according to the
above criterion. In order, however, that an object not in contact
with the body should be perceived, there are physical as
well as physiological conditions to be fulfilled. There must be
some physical process which takes place at the surface of the
body when the object in question is suitably situated, but not
otherwise; and there must be sense-organs capable of being
affected by such a process. There are, as we know from physics,
many processes which fulfil the necessary physical conditions,
but fail to affect us through the inadequacy of our sense-organs.
Waves of a certain sort make sound, but waves of exactly the
same sort become inaudible if they are too short. Waves of a
certain sort make light, but if they are too long or too short
they are invisible. The waves used in wireless are of the same
sort as those that make light, but are too long. There is no
reason a priori why we should not be aware of wireless messages
through our senses, without the need of instruments.
X-rays are also of the same sort as those that make light, but
in this case they are too short to be seen. They might render
the objects from which they come visible, if we had a different
sort of eye. We are not sensitive to magnetism, unless it is
enormously powerful; but if we had more iron in our bodies,
we might have no need of the mariner’s compass. Our senses
are a haphazard selection of those that the nature of physical
processes renders possible; one may suppose that they have
resulted from chance variation and the struggle for existence.
It is important to observe that our perceptions are very
largely concerned with form or shape or structure. This is the
point emphasised by what is called “Gestaltpsychologie”, or
psychology of form. Reading is a case in point. Whether we
read black letters on white paper or white letters on a blackboard
is a matter which we hardly notice; it is the forms of
the letters that affect us, not their colour or their size (so long
as they remain legible). In this matter, the sense of sight
is pre-eminent, although blind men (and others to a less degree)
can acquire a good knowledge of form by the sense of touch.
Another point of importance about our perceptions is that
they give us, within limits, a knowledge of temporal sequence.
If you say to a man “Brutus killed Cæsar”, and then “Cæsar
killed Brutus”, the difference between the two statements is
likely to be perceived by him if he is listening; in the one case
he will say “of course”, in the other “nonsense”, which is evidence
of his having different perceptions in the two cases, according
to our definition. Further, if you ask him what the
difference is, he can tell you that it is a difference in the order
of the words. Thus time-order within a short period of time
is clearly perceptible.
The objective method, which we have been applying in this
chapter, is the only possible one in studying the perceptions of
animals or of infants before they can talk. Many animals too
low in the scale of evolution to have eyes are yet sensitive to
light, in the sense that they move towards it or move away
from it. Such animals, according to our criterion, perceive
light, though there is no reason to suppose that they perceive
colour or visual form or anything beyond the bare presence of
light. We can perceive the bare presence of light when our
eyes are shut; perhaps one may imagine their sensitiveness to
be more or less analogous in its limitations.
It is not to be supposed, in any case, that “perceiving” an
object involves knowing what it is like. That is quite another
matter. We shall see later that certain inferences, of a highly
abstract character, can be drawn from our perceptions to the
objects perceived; but these inferences are at once difficult and
not quite certain. The idea that perception, in itself, reveals
the character of objects, is a fond delusion, and one, moreover,
which it is very necessary to overcome if our philosophy is
to be anything more than a pleasant fairy-tale.
CHAPTER VI MEMORY OBJECTIVELY REGARDED
We are concerned in these chapters with what we can know
about other men by merely observing their behaviour. In
this chapter, I propose to consider everything that would commonly
be called “memory”, in so far as it can be made a matter
of external observation. And perhaps it may be as well, at
this point, to state my own view of the question of “behaviourism”.
This philosophy, of which the chief protagonist is Dr.
John B. Watson, holds that everything that can be known
about man is discoverable by the method of external observation,
i.e. that none of our knowledge depends, essentially and
necessarily, upon data in which the observer and the observed
are the same person. I do not fundamentally agree with this
view, but I think it contains much more truth than most people
suppose, and I regard it as desirable to develop the behaviourist
method to the fullest possible extent. I believe that the knowledge
to be obtained by this method, so long as we take physics
for granted, is self-contained, and need not, at any point, appeal
to data derived from introspection, i.e. from observations
which a man can make upon himself but not upon any one else.
Nevertheless, I hold that there are such observations and that
there is knowledge which depends upon introspection. What
is more, I hold that data of this kind are required for a critical
exposition of physics, which behaviourism takes for granted.
I shall, therefore, after setting forth the behaviourist view of
man, proceed to a scrutiny of our knowledge of physics, returning
thence to man, but now as viewed from within. Then,
finally, I shall attempt to draw conclusions as to what we know
of the universe in general.
The word “memory” or “remembering” is commonly used
in a number of different senses, which it is important to distinguish.
More especially, there is a broad sense, in which
the word applies to the power of repeating any habitual act
previously learnt, and a narrow sense, in which it applies only
to recollection of past events. It is in the broad sense that
people speak of a dog remembering his master or his name,
and that Sir Francis Darwin spoke of memory in plants.
Samuel Butler used to attribute the sort of behaviour that
would usually be called instinctive to memory of ancestral experience,
and evidently he was using the word “memory” in its
widest possible sense. Bergson, on the contrary, dismisses
“habit-memory” as not true memory at all. True memory,
for him, is confined to the recollection of a past occurrence,
which, he maintains, cannot be a habit, since the event remembered
only occurred once. The behaviourist maintains that
this contention is mistaken, and that all memory consists in the
retention of a habit. For him, therefore, memory is not something
requiring special study, but is merged into the study of
habit. Dr. Watson says: “The behaviourist never uses the
term ‘memory’. He believes that it has no place in an objective
psychology.” He proceeds to give instances, beginning with
a white rat in a maze. On the first occasion, he says, it took
this rat forty minutes to get out of the maze, but after thirty-five
trials he learnt to get out in six seconds, without taking
any wrong turnings. He was then kept away from the maze
for six months, and on being put in it again he got out in two
minutes, with six mistakes. He was just as good as he had
been before at the twentieth trial. We have here a measure
of the extent to which the habit of the maze had been retained.
A similar experiment with a monkey showed even more retentiveness.
He was put into a problem box which at first
took him twenty minutes to open, but at the twentieth trial he
opened it in two seconds. He was then kept away from it for
six months, and on being put back in it he opened it in four
seconds.
With human beings, we know that many of the habits we
learn are retained through long periods of disuse—skating,
bicycling, swimming, golf, etc., are familiar instances. Perhaps
Dr. Watson goes a trifle too far when he says: “If a poor
shot or an inexpert golfer tells you that he was good five years
ago but that lack of practice has made him poor, don’t believe
him; he never was good!” At any rate, this is not the belief
of violinists and pianists, who consider it essential to practise
every day. But even if it be somewhat of an exaggeration,
it is certainly true that we retain bodily habits pretty well.
Some, such as swimming, seem to be more completely retained
than others. The power of talking a foreign language, for
example, is one which is greatly impaired by disuse. The
whole matter is quantitative, and easily tested by experiment.
But memory in the sense of recollection of past events, if it
can be explained as a habit, will have, one might suppose, to
be a verbal habit. As to this, Dr. Watson says:
“What the man on the street ordinarily means by an exhibition
of memory is what occurs in some such situation as this:
An old friend comes to see him, after many years’ absence.
The moment he sees this friend, he says: ‘Upon my life!
Addison Sims of Seattle! I haven’t seen you since the World’s
Fair in Chicago. Do you remember the gay parties we used
to have in the Wilderness Hotel? Do you remember the
Midway? Do you remember ... etc.,’ ad infinitum. The
psychology of this process is so simple that it seems almost an
insult to your intelligence to discuss it, and yet a good many
of the behaviourists’ kindly critics have said that behaviourism
cannot adequately explain memory. Let us see if this is a
fact.”
He goes on to say that during the period, long ago, when
the man on the street was seeing Mr. Sims, they formed verbal
and manual habits towards one another, so that “finally, just
the sight of man, even after months of absence, would
call out not only the old verbal habits, but many other types
of bodily and visceral responses.”
He sums up: “By ‘memory’, then, we mean nothing except
the fact that when we meet a stimulus again after an absence,
we do the old habitual thing (say the old words and show
the old visceral—emotional—behaviour) that we learned to
do when we were in the presence of that stimulus in the first
place.”
This theory is preferable to ordinary psychological theories
in many ways. In the first place, it is not an attempt to treat
memory as some sort of mystical “faculty”, and does not suppose
that we are always remembering everything that we should
remember if a suitable stimulus were applied. It is concerned
with the causation of specific acts of remembering, these acts
being all externally observable. I do not see any good reason
to question it. Bergson’s contention that the recollection of
a unique occurrence cannot be explained by habit is clearly fallacious.
There are many instances, both with animals and with
human beings, of a habit becoming firmly established through
one experience. It is, therefore, quite possible that a stimulus
associated with a previous occurrence should set going a
train of bodily events which, in turn, produce words describing
that occurrence. There is here, however, a difficulty. The
memory of a past occurrence cannot be a verbal habit, except
when the occurrence has been frequently related. When Watson’s
man on the street says “Do you remember the Midway”,
he is not using words that have become habitual; very likely
he never used these words before. He is using words which a
verbal habit associates with an event that is now happening in
him, and the event is called up by a habit associated with Mr.
Sims. So at least we must suppose, if we accept Watson’s view.
But this diminishes the plausibility and the verifiability of his
view. It is not our actual language that can be regarded as
habitual, but only what our words express. In repeating a
poem we have learned by heart, the language is habitual, but
not so when we recount a past incident in words we never used
before. In this case, it is not the actual words that we repeat,
but only their meaning. The habitual element, therefore, if it
really accounts for the recollection, must not be sought in words.
This is something of a difficulty in the Watsonian theory
of language. When a rat learns a maze, it learns certain
definite bodily movements; so do we when we learn by heart.
But I may say to one person, “I met Mr. Jones in the train
to-day”, and to another “Joseph was in the 9.35 this morning.”
With the exception of the words “in the”, these two sentences
have nothing verbally in common, yet they may relate the same
fact, and I may use either indifferently when I recall the fact.
Thus my recollection is certainly not a definite verbal habit.
Yet words are the only overt bodily movements by which I make
known my recollections to other people. If the behaviourist
tells me that my recollection is bodily habit, and begins by
telling me that it is a verbal habit, he can be driven by such
instances to the admission that it must be some other kind of
habit. If he says this, he is abandoning the region of observable
fact, and taking refuge in hypothetical bodily movements
invoked to save a theory. But these are hardly any better than
“thoughts.”
This question is more general than the problem of memory.
Many different forms of words may be used to express the
same “meaning”, and there seems no reason in mere habit to
account for the fact that we sometimes use one form of words
and sometimes another when we “think” of that which all the
various forms of words express. The association seems to
go, not direct from stimulus to words, but from stimulus to
“meaning” and thence to words expressing the “meaning”.
You may, for instance, be quite unable to recollect whether
you were told “Jacob is older than Joseph”, or “Joseph is
younger than Jacob”, though you may remember quite definitely
that you were told the fact which both these forms of
words express. Again, if you are learning, say, a proof of a
mathematical theorem, you do not learn by heart what the
book says, unless you are a very bad mathematician; you learn,
as people say, to “understand” the proof, and then you can
reproduce it in symbols quite different from those in the book.
It is such facts, among others, that make it difficult to explain
the mechanism of association, whether in memory or in
“thought” in general, if we assume that words, or even sentences,
are the terms associated.
Perhaps, however, the theory as to the “meaning” of words
which we developed in an earlier chapter may help us out of
the difficulty. We defined the “meaning” of a word by means
of its associations; therefore, if two words are synonyms, they
have the same associations; and any stimulus which calls up
one may also call up the other. The question which of two
synonyms we use will then depend upon some extraneous
circumstance.
This is all very well so far as single words are concerned;
it would account satisfactorily, for instance, for the fact that
I call a man sometimes by his surname and sometimes by his
Christian name. But it is hardly so adequate when we come
to the question of sentences. To revert to the illustration of
a moment ago, in response to the stimulus “Did anything happen
on your journey?” you may say either “I met Mr. Jones
in the train to-day”, or “Joseph was in the 9.35 this morning”,
or any one of an indefinite number of other sentences expressive
of the same occurrence. Are we to suppose that, while you
were in the train, you were rehearsing all these different sentences
to yourself, so that each of them became firmly associated
with the words “journey to-day”? Clearly such a supposition
would be absurd. Yet all the separate words of your
sentence have many other associations; it is only the sentence
as a whole that is associated with your journey. You have met
other people besides Mr. Jones; you have had other contacts
with Mr. Jones besides meeting him this morning; “train” and
“to-day” equally are appropriate to other occurrences that
you might relate. Thus it has to be the whole sentence that
is the associative unit, and yet the sentence may never have
been in your head before. It seems clear that it is possible to
state in words something that you remember, although you
never put it into words before. Suppose I say “What did you
have for breakfast to-day?” Probably you will be able to tell
me, though it is very likely that you have not given names to
the things you ate until this moment.
This whole matter is connected with the distinction between
sentences and single words, which we found important
when we were discussing language. But even when we confine
ourselves to single words, there are difficulties in Dr.
Watson’s view. Cases are alleged in which children, after
learning to speak, can recall incidents which occurred before
they could speak, and describe them in correct words. This
would show that the memory had persisted in a non-verbal
form throughout the period before they learned to speak, and
had only subsequently found verbal expression. Such extreme
incidents are rare and might be questioned, but in a less extreme
form it ought not to be difficult to obtain examples of the same
sort of thing. Suppose, for example, that a young child hurt
his wrist badly before he knew the word “wrist”, and that some
time afterwards he learnt it; I should not be surprised if he
could relate that he had hurt his wrist. Such instances, however,
would not refute the essence of Watson’s theory. He
would allow “visceral” memory, for example, and the association
with the word “wrist” might be grafted on to this. The
real difficulty in Dr. Watson’s view, to my mind, is the fact
that our sentence may vary verbally as much as it likes so long
as it retains the same “meaning”, and that we clearly do not
rehearse to ourselves beforehand all the possible sentences
having the “meaning” in question.
It should be realised that behaviourism loses much of its
attractiveness if it is compelled to postulate movements that
no one can observe and that there is no other reason to assume.
Dr. Broad, in his book on The Mind and its Place in Nature,
distinguishes between “molar” and “molecular” behaviourism:
the former assumes only such bodily movements as can be observed,
while the latter allows and utilises hypothetical minute
movements, more especially in the brain. Now here we must
make a distinction. Physics believes in a large number of
phenomena which are too minute to be observed even with the
strongest microscope, and if physics is at all correct, there
must be minute movements in all parts of a human body, of
a sort which we can never hope to see. We cannot reasonably
demand of the behaviourist that he should abstain from an
hypothesis which physics asserts for very good reasons. And
in the process which leads from stimulus to reaction there are
bound to be small occurrences in the brain, which, though
they cannot be observed, are essential to the physiological
explanation of what occurs. But when the behaviourist assumes
small occurrences for which there is no ground in physics,
and which are needed solely in order to safeguard his theory, he
is in a less strong position. Dr. Watson asserts, for instance,
that whenever we “think” there are small movements in the
larynx which are beginnings of the movements we should make
as if we spoke words out loud. It may be that this is true;
certainly I am not prepared to deny it. But I am not prepared
to say that it must be true merely because, if it were not, behaviourism
would be false. We do not know in advance that
behaviourism is true; we have to find out whether it will explain
observed facts. Whenever it has to postulate something unobserved
merely in order to avoid a refutation, it weakens its
case. And if it maintains, as, from Dr. Watson’s language,
it seems to do, that we only remember an occurrence by forming
a verbal habit in connection with it, then it is obliged to
postulate much implicit use of words of which we have no
evidence.
To sum up this discussion. While it is quite possible, by
behaviourist methods, to ascertain whether a person remembers
a past occurrence or not, unless he is deliberately obstructing
the observer, and while much memory can be quite adequately
explained as habit, there do seem to be great difficulties
in the view that memory consists entirely of habit, at least
in the case of the recollection of an event. These difficulties
seem insuperable if we suppose memory to be essentially a
verbal habit. They are not insuperable if we postulate sufficient
minute unobservable bodily movements. We have not
considered whether they can be overcome by introducing data
derived from introspection, since we wish, for the present,
to maintain a strictly objective attitude to human behaviour.
The introspective discussion of memory will be taken up at a
later stage.
CHAPTER VII INFERENCE AS A HABIT
In this chapter, we are concerned with inference as it can be
observed when practised by some one else. Inference is supposed
to be a mark of intelligence and to show the superiority
of men to machines. At the same time, the treatment of inference
in traditional logic is so stupid as to throw doubt on
this claim, and syllogistic inference, which was taken as the
type from Aristotle to Bacon (exclusive), is just the sort of
thing that a calculating machine could do better than a professor.
In syllogistic inference, you are supposed to know
already that all men are mortal and that Socrates is a man;
hence you deduce, what you never suspected before, that Socrates
is mortal. This form of inference does actually occur,
though very rarely. The only instance I have ever heard of
was supplied by Dr. F. C. S. Schiller. He once produced a
comic number of the philosophical periodical Mind, and sent
copies to various philosophers, among others to a certain German,
who was much puzzled by the advertisements. But at
last he argued: “Everything in this book is a joke, therefore
the advertisements are jokes”. I have never come across any
other case of new knowledge obtained by means of a syllogism.
It must be admitted that, for a method which dominated logic
for two thousand years, this contribution to the world’s stock
of information cannot be considered very weighty.
The inferences that we actually make in daily life differ
from those of syllogistic logic in two respects, namely, that
they are important and precarious, instead of being trivial
and safe. The syllogism may be regarded as a monument to
academic timidity: if an inference might be wrong, it was
dangerous to draw it. So the mediæval monks, in their thinking
as in their lives, sought safety at the expense of fertility.
With the Renaissance, a more adventurous spirit came into
the world, but at first in philosophy, it only took the form of
following Greeks other than Aristotle, and more especially
Plato. It is only with Bacon and Galileo that the inductive
method arrived at due recognition: with Bacon as a programme
which was largely faulty, but with Galileo as something which
actually led to brilliant results, namely, the foundation of modern
mathematical physics. Unfortunately, when the pedants
got hold of induction, they set to work to make it as tame
and scholastic as deduction had been. They searched for a way
of making it always lead to true results, and in so doing robbed
it of its adventurous character. Hume turned upon them with
sceptical arguments, proving quite conclusively that if an induction
is worth making it may be wrong. Thereupon Kant
deluged the philosophic world with muddle and mystery, from
which it is only now beginning to emerge. Kant has the reputation
of being the greatest of modern philosophers, but to
my mind he was a mere misfortune.
Induction, as it appears in the text-books, consists, roughly
speaking, in the inference that, because A and B have been
found often together and never apart, therefore they are probably
always together, and either may be taken as a sign of the
other. I do not wish, at this stage, to examine the logical justification
of this form of argumentation; for the present, I am
considering it as a practice, which we can observe in the habits
of men and animals.
As a practice, induction is nothing but our old friend, the
law of conditioned reflexes or of association. A child touches
a knob that gives him an electric shock; after that, he avoids
touching the knob. If he is old enough to speak he may state
that the knob hurts when it is touched; he has made an induction
based on a single instance. But the induction will exist as
a bodily habit even if he is too young to speak, and it occurs
equally among animals, provided they are not too low in the
scale. The theories of induction in logic are what Freudians
call a “rationalisation”; that is to say, they consist of reasons
invented afterwards to prove that what we have been doing
is sensible. It does not follow that they are bad reasons; in
view of the fact that we and our ancestors have managed to
exist since the origin of life, our behaviour and theirs must
have been fairly sensible, even if we and they were unable to
prove that it was. This, however, is not the point that concerns
us at present. What concerns us at present is the fact
that verbal induction is a late development of induction in
behaviour, which is nothing more or less than the principle of
“learned reactions”.
This principle, as the reader will remember, states that, if
a certain event calls out a certain response, and if another
event is experienced just before it, or at the same moment,
in time that other event will tend to call out the response
which, originally, only the first event would call out. This
applies both to muscles and to glands; it is because it applies
to glands that words are capable of causing emotions. Moreover,
we cannot set limits to the length of the chain of associations
that may be established. If you hold an infant’s limbs,
you call out a rage reaction; this appears to be an “unlearned
reaction”. If you, and no one else, repeatedly hold an infant’s
limbs, the mere sight of you will call out a rage reaction after
a time. When the infant learns to talk your name may have
the same effect. If, later, he learns that you are an optician,
he may come to hate all opticians; this may lead him to hate
Spinoza because he made spectacles, and thence he may come
to hate metaphysicians and Jews. For doing so he will no
doubt have the most admirable reasons, which will seem to
him to be his real ones; he will never suspect the process of
conditioning by which he has in fact arrived at his enthusiasm
for the Ku Klux Klan. This is an example of conditioning in
the emotional sphere; but it is rather in the muscular sphere
that we must seek the origin of the practice of induction.
Domestic animals which are habitually fed by a certain
person will run towards that person as soon as they see him.
We say that they expect food, and in fact their behaviour is
very like what it would be if they saw food. But really we
have only an example of “conditioning”: they have often seen
first the farmer and then the food, so that in time they react
to the farmer as they originally reacted to the food. Infants
soon learn to react to the sight of the bottle, although at
first they only react to the touch of it. When they can speak,
the same law makes them say “dinner” when they hear the
dinner-bell. It is quite unnecessary to suppose that they first
think “that bell means dinner”, and then say “dinner”. The
sight of dinner (by previous “learned reaction”) causes the
word “dinner”: the bell frequently precedes the sight of dinner;
therefore in time the bell produces the word “dinner”. It is
only subsequent reflection, probably at a much later age, that
makes the child say “I knew dinner was ready because I heard
the bell”. Long before he can say this, he is acting as if he knew
it. And there is no good reason for denying that he knows it,
when he acts as if he did. If knowledge is to be displayed by
behaviour, there is no reason to confine ourselves to verbal
behaviour as the sole kind by which knowledge can manifest
itself.
The situation, stated abstractly, is as follows. Originally,
stimulus A produced reaction C; now stimulus B produces it,
as a result of association. Thus B has become a “sign” of A,
in the sense that it causes the behaviour appropriate to A.
All sorts of things may be signs of other things, but with
human beings words are the supreme example of signs. All
signs depend upon some practical induction. Whenever we
read or hear a statement, its effect upon us depends upon induction
in this sense, since the words are signs of what they
mean, in the sense that we react to them, in certain respects,
as we should to what they stand for. If some one says to
you “your house is on fire”, the effect upon you is practically
the same as if you saw the conflagration. You may, of course,
be the victim of a hoax, and in that case your behaviour will
not be such as achieves any purpose you have in view. This
risk of error exists always, since the fact that two things have
occurred together in the past cannot prove conclusively that
they will occur together in the future.
Scientific induction is an attempt to regularise the above
process, which we may call “physiological induction”. It is
obvious that, as practised by animals, infants, and savages,
physiological induction is a frequent source of error. There
is Dr. Watson’s infant who induced, from two examples, that
whenever he saw a certain rat there would be a loud noise.
There is Edmund Burke, who induced from one example
(Cromwell) that revolutions lead to military tyrannies. There
are savages who argue, from one bad season, that the arrival
of a white man causes bad crops. The inhabitants of Siena,
in 1348, thought that the Black Death was a punishment for
their pride in starting to build too large a cathedral. Of such
examples there is no end. It is very necessary, therefore, if
possible, to find some method by which induction can be practised
so as to lead, in general, to correct results. But this is a
problem of scientific method, with which we will not yet concern
ourselves.
What does concern us at present is the fact that all inference,
of the sort that really occurs, is a development of this
one principle of conditioning. In practice, inference is of two
kinds, one typified by induction, the other by mathematical
reasoning. The former is by far the more important, since,
as we have seen, it covers all use of signs and all empirical
generalisations as well as the habits of which they are the
verbal expression. I know that, from the traditional standpoint,
it seems absurd to talk of inference in most cases of this
sort. For example, you find it stated in the paper that such
and such a horse has won the Derby. According to my own
use of words, you practise an induction when you arrive thence
at the belief that that horse has won. The stimulus consists
of certain black marks on white paper—or perhaps on pink
paper. This stimulus is only connected with horses and the
Derby by association, yet your reaction is one appropriate to
the Derby. Traditionally, there was only inference where
there was a “mental process”, which, after dwelling upon the
“premisses”, was led to assert the “conclusion” by means of insight
into their logical connection. I am not saying that the
process which such words as the above are intended to describe
never takes place; it certainly does. What I am saying is that,
genetically and causally, there is no important difference between
the most elaborate induction and the most elementary
“learned reaction”. The one is merely a developed form of
the other, not something radically different. And our determination
to believe in the results of inductions, even if, as logicians,
we see no reason to do so, is really due to the potency
of the principle of association; it is an example—perhaps the
most important example—of what Dr. Santayana calls “animal
faith”.
The question of mathematical reasoning is more difficult.
I think we may lay it down that, in mathematics, the conclusion
always asserts merely the whole or part of the premisses, though
usually in new language. The difficulty of mathematics consists
in seeing that this is so in particular cases. In practice,
the mathematician has a set of rules according to which his
symbols can be manipulated, and he acquires technical skill
in working according to the rules in the same sort of way as
a billiard-player does. But there is a difference between mathematics
and billiards: the rules of billiards are arbitrary, whereas
in mathematics some at least are in some sense “true”. A
man cannot be said to understand mathematics unless he has
“seen” that these rules are right. Now what does this consist
of? I think it is only a more complicated example of the
process of understanding that “Napoleon” and “Bonaparte”
refer to the same person. To explain this, however, we must
revert to what was said, in the chapter on “Language”, about
the understanding of form.
Human beings possess the power of reacting to form. No
doubt some of the higher animals also possess it, though to
nothing like the same extent as men do; and all animals, except
a few of the most intelligent species, appear to be nearly
devoid of it. Among human beings, it differs greatly from
one individual to another, and increases, as a rule, up to adolescence.
I should take it as what chiefly characterises “intellect”.
But let us see, first, in what the power consists.
When a child is being taught to read, he learns to recognise
a given letter, say H, whether it is large or small, black or
white or red. However it may vary in these respects his reaction
is the same: he says “H”. That is to say, the essential
feature in the stimulus is its form. When my boy, at the age
of just under three, was about to eat a three-cornered piece of
bread and butter, I told him it was a triangle. (His slices were
generally rectangular.) Next day, unprompted, he pointed to
triangular bits in the pavement of the Albert Memorial, and
called them “triangles”. Thus the form of the bread and
butter, as opposed to its edibility, its softness, its colour, etc.,
was what had impressed him. This sort of thing constitutes
the most elementary kind of reaction to form.
Now “matter” and “form” can be placed, as in the Aristotelian
philosophy, in a hierarchy. From a triangle we can
advance to a polygon, thence to a figure, thence to a manifold
of points. Then we can go on and turn “point” into a formal
concept, meaning “something that has relations which resemble
spatial relations in certain formal respects”. Each of these is
a step away from “matter” and further into the region of
“form”. At each stage the difficulty increases. The difficulty
consists in having a uniform reaction (other than boredom)
to a stimulus of this kind. When we “understand” a mathematical
expression, that means that we can react to it in an
appropriate manner, in fact, that it has “meaning” for us.
This is also what we mean by “understanding” the word “cat”.
But it is easier to understand the word “cat”, because the resemblances
between different cats are of a sort which causes
even animals to have a uniform reaction to all cats. When
we come to algebra, and have to operate with x and y, there
is a natural desire to know what x and y really are. That, at
least, was my feeling: I always thought the teacher knew what
they really were, but would not tell me. To “understand” even
the simplest formula in algebra, say (x + y)² = x² + 2xy + y², is
to be able to react to two sets of symbols in virtue of the form
which they express, and to perceive that the form is the same
in both cases. This is a very elaborate business, and it is no
wonder that boys and girls find algebra a bugbear. But there
is no novelty in principle after the first elementary perceptions
of form. And perception of form consists merely in reacting
alike to two stimuli which are alike in form but very different
in other respects. For, when we can do that, we can say, on
the appropriate occasion, “that is a triangle”; and this is
enough to satisfy the examiner that we know what a triangle
is, unless he is so old-fashioned as to expect us to reproduce
the verbal definition, which is of course a far easier matter, in
which, with patience, we might teach even a parrot to succeed.
The meanings of complex mathematical symbols are always
fixed by rules in relation to the meaning of simpler symbols;
thus their meanings are analogous to those of sentences, not to
those of single words. What was said earlier about the understanding
of sentences applies, therefore, to any group of symbols
which, in mathematics, will be declared to have the same
meaning as another group, or part of that meaning.
We may sum up this discussion by saying that mathematical
inference consists in attaching the same reactions to two different
groups of signs, whose meanings are fixed by convention
in relation to their constituent parts, whereas induction consists,
first, in taking something as a sign of something else,
and later, when we have learned to take A as a sign of B, in
taking A as also a sign of C. Thus the usual cases of induction
and deduction are distinguished by the fact that, in the former,
the inference consists in taking one sign as a sign of two different
things, while in the latter the inference consists in taking
two different signs as signs of the same thing. This statement
is a little too antithetical to be taken as an exact expression of
the whole truth in the matter. What is true, however, is that
both kinds of inferences are concerned with the relation of a
sign to what it signifies, and therefore come within the scope
of the law of association.
CHAPTER VIII KNOWLEDGE BEHAVIOURISTICALLY CONSIDERED
The word “knowledge”, like the word “memory”, is avoided
by the behaviourist. Nevertheless there is a phenomenon commonly
called “knowledge”, which is tested behaviouristically
in examinations. I want to consider this phenomenon in this
chapter, with a view to deciding whether there is anything in
it that the behaviourist cannot deal with adequately.
It will be remembered that, in Chapter II, we were led
to the view that knowledge is a characteristic of the complete
process from stimulus to reaction, or even, in the cases of
sight and hearing, from an external object to a reaction, the
external object being connected with the stimulus by a chain
of physical causation in the outer world. Let us, for the moment,
leave on one side such cases as sight and hearing, and
confine ourselves, for the sake of definiteness, to knowledge
derived from touch.
We can observe touch producing reactions in quite humble
animals, such as worms and sea anemones. Are we to say that
they have “knowledge” of what they touch? In some sense,
yes. Knowledge is a matter of degree. When it is regarded
in a purely behaviouristic manner, we shall have to concede
that it exists, in some degree, wherever there is a characteristic
reaction to a stimulus of a certain kind, and this reaction does
not occur in the absence of the right kind of stimulus. In this
sense, “knowledge” is indistinguishable from “sensitivity”,
which we considered in connection with perception. We might
say that a thermometer “knows” the temperature, and that a
compass “knows” the direction of the magnetic north. This is
the only sense in which, on grounds of observation, we can
attribute knowledge to animals that are low in the scale. Many
animals, for example, hide themselves when exposed to light,
but as a rule not otherwise. In this, however, they do not
differ from a radiometer. No doubt the mechanism is different,
but the observed molar motion has similar characteristics.
Wherever there is a reflex, an animal may be said, in a sense,
to “know” the stimulus. This is, no doubt, not the usual sense
of “knowledge”, but it is the germ out of which knowledge
in the usual sense has grown, and without which no knowledge
would be possible.
Knowledge in any more advanced sense is only possible as
a result of learning, in the sense considered in Chapter III.
The rat that has learned the maze “knows” the way out of
it; the boy who has learned certain verbal reactions “knows”
the multiplication table. Between these two cases there is no
important difference. In both cases, we say that the subject
“knows” something because he reacts in a manner advantageous
to himself, in which he could not react before he had had
certain experiences. I do not think, however, that we ought
to use such a notion as “advantageous” in connection with
knowledge. What we can observe, for instance, with the rat
in the maze, is violent activity until the food is reached, followed
by eating when it is reached; also a gradual elimination
of acts which do not lead to the food. Where this sort of
behaviour is observed, we may say that it is directed towards
the food, and that the animal “knows” the way to the food
when he gets to it by the shortest possible route.
But if this view is right, we cannot define any knowledge
acquired by learning except with reference to circumstances
toward which an animal’s activity is directed. We should say,
popularly, that the animal “desires” such circumstances. “Desire”,
like “knowledge”, is capable of a behaviouristic definition,
and it would seem that the two are correlative. Let us,
then, spend a little time on the behaviouristic treatment of
“desire”.
The best example of desire, from this point of view, is
hunger. The stimulus to hunger is a certain well-ascertained
bodily condition. When in this condition, an animal moves
restlessly; if he sees or smells food, he moves in a manner
which, in conditions to which he is accustomed, would bring
him to the food; if he reaches it, he eats it, and if the quantity
is sufficient he then becomes quiescent. This kind of behaviour
may be summarised by saying that a hungry animal “desires”
food. It is behaviour which is in various ways different from
that of inanimate matter, because restless movements persist
until a certain condition is realised. These movements may or
may not be the best adapted to realising the condition in question.
Every one knows about the pike that was put on one
side of a glass partition, with minnows on the other side. He
continually bumped his nose on the glass, and after six weeks
gave up the attempt to catch them. When, after this, the partition
was removed, he still refrained from pursuing them. I
do not know whether the experiment was tried of leaving a
possibility of getting to the minnows by a roundabout route.
To have learned to take a roundabout route would perhaps
have required a degree of intelligence beyond the capacity of
fishes; this is a matter, however, which offers little difficulty to
dogs or monkeys.
What applies to hunger applies equally to other forms of
“desire”. Every animal has a certain congenital apparatus
of “desires”; that is to say, in certain bodily conditions he is
stimulated to restless activities which tend towards the performance
of some reflex, and if a given situation is often repeated
the animal arrives more and more quickly at the performance
of the reflex. This last, however, is only true of the
higher animals; in the lower, the whole process from beginning
to end is reflex, and can therefore only succeed in normal circumstances.
The higher animals, and more especially men,
have a larger proportion of learning and a smaller proportion
of reflexes in their behaviour, and are therefore better able
to adapt themselves to new circumstances. The helplessness
of infants is a necessary condition for the adaptability of
adults; infants have fewer useful reflexes than the young of
animals, but have far more power of forming useful habits,
which can be adapted to circumstances and are not fatally fixed
from birth. This fact is intimately connected with the superiority
of the human intelligence above that of the brutes.
Desire is extremely subject to “conditioning”. If A is a
primitive desire and B has on many occasions been a means
to A, B comes to be desired in the same sense in which A was
previously desired. It may even happen, as in misers, that
the desire for B completely displaces the desire for A, so that
B, when attained, is no longer used as a means to A. This,
however, is more or less exceptional. In general, the desire
for A persists, although the desire for B has a more or less
independent life.
The “conditioning” of primitive desires in human beings is
the source of much that distinguishes our life from that of animals.
Most animals only seek food when they are hungry;
they may, then, die of starvation before they find it. Men, on
the contrary, must have early acquired pleasure in hunting
as an art, and must have set out on hunting expeditions before
they were actually hungry. A further stage in the conditioning
of hunger came with domestic animals; a still further stage
with agriculture. Nowadays, when a man sets to work to
earn his living, his activity is still connected, though not very
directly, with hunger and the other primitive desires that can
be gratified by means of money. These primitive desires are
still, so to speak, the power station, though their energy is
widely distributed to all sorts of undertakings that seem, at
first sight, to have no connection with them. Consider “freedom”
and the political activities it inspires; this is derivable,
by “conditioning”, from the emotion of rage which Dr. Watson
observed in infants whose limbs are not “free”. Again we
speak of the “fall” of empires and of “fallen” women; this
is connected with the fear which infants display when left
without support.
After this excursion into the realm of desire, we can now
return to “knowledge”, which, as we saw, is a term correlative
to “desire”, and applicable to another feature of the
same kind of activity. We may say, broadly, that a response
to a stimulus of the kind involving desire in the above sense
shows “knowledge” if it leads by the quickest or easiest route
to the state of affairs which, in the above sense, is behaviouristically
the object of desire. Knowledge is thus a matter of
degree: the rat, during its progressive improvements in the
maze, is gradually acquiring more and more knowledge. Its
“intelligence quotient”, so far as that particular task is concerned,
will be the ratio of the time it took on the first trial
to the time it takes now to get out of the maze. Another
point, if our definition of knowledge is accepted, is, that there
is no such thing as purely contemplative knowledge: knowledge
exists only in relation to the satisfaction of desire, or, as we
say, in the capacity to choose the right means to achieve our
ends.
But can such a definition as the above really stand? Does
it represent at all the sort of thing that would commonly
be called knowledge? I think it does in the main, but there
is need of some discussion to make this clear.
In some cases, the definition is obviously applicable. These
are the cases that are analogous to the rat in the maze, the
consideration of which led us to our definition. Do you “know”
the way from Trafalgar Square to St. Pancras? Yes, if you
can walk it without taking any wrong turnings. In practice,
you can give verbal proof of such knowledge, without actually
having to walk the distance; but that depends upon the correlation
of names with streets, and is part of the process of
substituting words for things. There may, it is true, come
doubtful cases. I was once on a bus in Whitehall, and my
neighbour asked “What street is this?” I answered him, not
without surprise at his ignorance. He then said, “What building
is that?” and I replied “The Foreign Office”. To this he
retorted, “but I thought the Foreign Office was in Downing
Street”. This time, it was his knowledge that surprised me.
Should we say that he knew where the Foreign Office is? The
answer is yes or no according to his purpose. From the point
of view of sending a letter to it, he knew; from the point of
view of walking to it, he did not know. He had, in fact, been
a British Consul in South America, and was in London for
the first time.
But now let us come to cases less obviously within the scope
of our definition. The reader “knows” that Columbus crossed
the ocean in 1492. What do we mean by saying that he
“knows” this? We mean, no doubt, primarily that writing
down this statement is the way to pass examinations, which
is just as useful to us as getting out of the maze is to the rat.
But we do not mean only this. There is historical evidence of
the fact, at least I suppose there is. The historical evidence
consists of printed books and manuscripts. Certain rules have
been developed by historians as to the conditions in which statements
in books or manuscripts may be accepted as true, and
the evidence in our case is (I presume) in accordance with
these rules. Historical facts often have importance in the
present; for example, wills, or laws not yet repealed. The
rules for weighing historical evidence are such as will, in general
bring out self-consistent results. Two results are self-consistent
when, in relation to a desire to which both are
relevant, they enjoin the same action, or actions which can
form part of the one movement towards the goal. At Coton,
near Cambridge, there is (or was in my time) a signpost with
two arms pointing in diametrically opposite directions, and
each arm said “To Cambridge”. This was a perfect example
of self-contradiction, since the two arms made statements
representing exactly opposite actions. And this case illustrates
why self-contradiction is to be avoided. But the avoidance of
self-contradiction makes great demands upon us; Hegel and
Bradley imagined that we could know the nature of the universe
by means of this principle alone. In this they were
pretty certainly mistaken, but nevertheless a great deal of
our “knowledge” depends upon this principle to a greater or
less extent.
Most of our knowledge is like that in a cookery book,
maxims to be followed when occasion arises, but not useful
at every moment of every day. Since knowledge may be useful
at any time, we get gradually, through conditioning, a
general desire for knowledge. The learned man who is helpless
in practical affairs is analogous to the miser, in that he
has become absorbed in a means. It should be observed, also,
that knowledge is neutral as among different purposes. If
you know that arsenic is a poison, that enables you equally to
avoid it if you wish to remain in health, and to take it if you
wish to commit suicide. You cannot judge from a man’s conduct
in relation to arsenic whether he knows that it is a poison
or not, unless you know his desires. He may be tired of life,
but avoid arsenic because he has been told that it is a good
medicine; in this case, his avoidance of it is evidence of lack
of knowledge.
But to return to Columbus: surely, the reader will say,
Columbus really did cross the Atlantic in 1492, and that is
why we call this statement “knowledge”. This is the definition
of “truth” as “correspondence with fact”. I think there is an
important element of correctness in this definition, but it is
an element to be elicited at a later stage, after we have discussed
the physical world. And it has the defect—as pragmatists
have urged—that there seems no way of getting at
“facts” and comparing them with our beliefs: all that we
ever reach consists of other beliefs. I do not offer our present
behaviouristic and pragmatic definition of “knowledge” as the
only possible one, but I offer it as the one to which we are
led if we wish to regard knowledge as something causally important,
to be exemplified in our reactions to stimuli. This is
the appropriate point of view when we are studying man from
without, as we have been doing hitherto.
There is, however, within the behaviourist philosophy, one
important addition to be made to our definition. We began
this chapter with sensitivity, but we went on to the consideration
of learned reactions, where the learning depended upon
association. But there is another sort of learning—at least
it is prima facie another sort—which consists of increase of
sensitivity. All sensitivity in animals and human beings must
count as a sort of knowledge; that is to say, if an animal behaves,
in the presence of a stimulus of a certain kind, as it
would not behave in the absence of that stimulus then, in an
important sense, it has “knowledge” as regards the stimulus.
Now it appears that practice—e.g. in music—very greatly increases
sensitivity. We learn to react differently to stimuli
which only differ sightly; what is more, we learn to react to
differences. A violin-player can react with great precision to
an interval of a fifth; if the interval is very slightly greater or
less, his behaviour in tuning is influenced by the difference
from a fifth. And as we have already had occasion to notice,
we become, through practice, increasingly sensitive to form.
All this increased sensitivity must count as increase of
knowledge.
But in saying this we are not saying anything inconsistent
with our earlier definition of knowledge. Sensitivity is essential
to choosing the right reaction in many cases. To take
the cookery-book again; when it says “take a pinch of salt”,
a good cook knows how much to take, which is an instance of
sensitivity. Accurate scientific observation, which is of great
practical importance, depends upon sensitivity. And so do
many of our practical dealings with other people: if we cannot
“feel” their moods, we shall be always getting at cross purposes.
The extent to which sensitivity is improved by practice is
astonishing. Town-bred people do not know whether the
weather is warm or cold until they read the weather reports in
the paper. An entomologist perceives vastly more beetles in
the course of a country walk than other people do. The subtlety
with which connoisseurs can distinguish among wines and
cigars is the despair of youths who wish to become men of the
world. Whether this increase of sensitivity can be accounted
for by the law of association, I do not know. In many cases,
probably, it can, but I think sensitiveness to form, which is the
essential element in the more difficult forms of abstract thought
as well as in many other matters, cannot be regarded as derivative
from the law of association, but is more analogous to
the development of a new sense. I should therefore include
improvement in sensitivity as an independent element in the
advancement of knowledge. But I do so with some hesitation.
The above discussion does not pretend to cover the whole
of the ground that has to be covered in discussing the definition
of “knowledge”. There are other points of view, which
are also necessary to a complete consideration of the question.
But these must wait until, after considering the physical world,
we come to the discussion of man as viewed from within.
PART II THE PHYSICAL WORLD
CHAPTER IX THE STRUCTURE OF THE ATOM
In all that we have said hitherto on the subject of man from
without, we have taken a common-sense view of the material
world. We have not asked ourselves: what is matter? Is
there such a thing, or is the outside world composed of stuff
of a different kind? And what light does a correct theory
of the physical world throw upon the process of perception?
These are questions which we must attempt to answer in the
following chapters. And in doing so the science upon which
we must depend is physics. Modern physics, however, is very
abstract, and by no means easy to explain in simple language.
I shall do my best, but the reader must not blame me too
severely if, here and there, he finds some slight difficulty or
obscurity. The physical world, both through the theory of
relativity and through the most recent doctrines as to the structure
of the atom, has become very different from the world of
everyday life, and also from that of scientific materialism of
the eighteenth-century variety. No philosophy can ignore the
revolutionary changes in our physical ideas that the men of
science have found necessary; indeed it may be said that all
traditional philosophies have to be discarded, and we have
to start afresh with as little respect as possible for the systems
of the past. Our age has penetrated more deeply into the
nature of things than any earlier age, and it would be a false
modesty to over-estimate what can still be learned from the
metaphysicians of the seventeenth, eighteenth and nineteenth
centuries.
What physics has to say about matter, and the physical
world generally, from the standpoint of the philosopher, comes
under two main heads: first, the structure of the atom; secondly,
the theory of relativity. The former was, until recently,
the less revolutionary philosophically, though the more revolutionary
in physics. Until 1925, theories of the structure
of the atom were based upon the old conception of matter
as indestructible substance, although this was already regarded
as no more than a convenience. Now, owing chiefly to two
German physicists, Heisenberg and Schrödinger, the last
vestiges of the old solid atom have melted away, and matter
has become as ghostly as anything in a spiritualist seance. But
before tackling these newer views, it is necessary to understand
the much simpler theory which they have displaced. This
theory does not, except here and there, take account of the
new doctrines on fundamentals that have been introduced by
Einstein, and it is much easier to understand than relativity.
It explains so much of the facts that, whatever may happen, it
must remain a stepping-stone to a complete theory of the structure
of the atom; indeed, the newer theories have grown directly
out of it, and could hardly have arisen in any other way.
We must therefore spend a little time in giving a bare outline,
which is the less to be regretted as the theory is in itself
fascinating.
The theory that matter consists of “atoms”, i.e. of little bits
that cannot be divided, is due to the Greeks, but with them it
was only a speculation. The evidence for what is called the
atomic theory was derived from chemistry, and the theory
itself, in its nineteenth-century form, was mainly due to Dalton.
It was found that there were a number of “elements”, and
that other substances were compounds of these elements.
Compound substances were found to be composed of “molecules”,
each molecule being composed of “atoms” of one substance
combined with “atoms” of another or of the same. A
molecule of water consists of two atoms of hydrogen and one
atom of oxygen; they can be separated by electrolysis. It was
supposed, until radio-activity was discovered, that atoms were
indestructible and unchangeable. Substances which were not
compounds were called “elements”. The Russian chemist
Mendeleev discovered that the elements can be arranged in a
series by means of progressive changes in their properties; in
his time, there were gaps in this series, but most of them have
since been filled by the discovery of new elements. If all the
gaps were filled, there would be 92 elements; actually the
number known is 87, or, including three about which there is
still some doubt, 90. The place of an element in this series
is called its “atomic number”. Hydrogen is the first, and has
the atomic number 1; helium is the second, and has the atomic
number 2; uranium is the last, and has the atomic number 92.
Perhaps in the stars there are elements with higher atomic
numbers, but so far none has been actually observed.
The discovery of radio-activity necessitated new views as
to “atoms”. It was found that an atom of one radio-active
element can break up into an atom of another element and an
atom of helium, and that there is also another way in which it
can change. It was found also that there can be different
elements having the same place in the series; these are called
“isotopes”. For example, when radium disintegrates it gives
rise, in the end, to a kind of lead, but this is somewhat different
from the lead found in lead-mines. A great many “elements”
have been shown by Dr. F. W. Aston to be really mixtures
of isotopes, which can be sorted out by ingenious methods.
All this, but more especially the transmutation of elements in
radio-activity, led to the conclusion that what had been called
“atoms” were really complex structures, which could change
into atoms of a different sort by losing a part. After various
attempts to imagine the structure of an atom, physicists were
led to accept the view of Sir Ernest Rutherford, which was
further developed by Niels Bohr.
In this theory, which, in spite of recent developments, remains
substantially correct, all matter is composed of two sorts
of units, electrons and protons. All electrons are exactly alike,
and all protons are exactly alike. All protons carry a certain
amount of positive electricity, and all electrons carry an equal
amount of negative electricity. But the mass of a proton is
about 1835 times that of an electron: it takes 1835 electrons
to weigh as much as one proton. Protons repel each other, and
electrons repel each other, but an electron and a proton attract
each other. Every atom is a structure consisting of electrons
and protons. The hydrogen atom, which is the simplest, consists
of one proton with one electron going round it as a planet
goes round the sun. The electron may be lost, and the proton
left alone; the atom is then positively electrified. But when
it has its electron, it is, as a whole, electrically neutral, since
the positive electricity of the proton is exactly balanced by the
negative electricity of the electron.
The second element, helium, has already a much more complicated
structure. It has a nucleus, consisting of four protons,
and two electrons very close together, and in its normal state
it has two planetary electrons going round the nucleus. But
it may lose either or both of these, and it is then positively
electrified.
All the latter elements consist, like helium, of a nucleus
composed of protons and electrons, and a number of planetary
electrons going round the nucleus. There are more protons
than electrons in the nucleus, but the excess is balanced
by the planetary electrons when the atom is unelectrified. The
number of protons in the nucleus gives the “atomic weight”
of the element: the excess of protons over electrons in the
nucleus gives the “atomic number”, which is also the number
of planetary electrons when the atom is unelectrified. Uranium,
the last element, has 238 protons and 146 electrons in the
nucleus, and when unelectrified it has 92 planetary electrons.
The arrangement of the planetary electrons in atoms other
than hydrogen is not accurately known, but it is clear that, in
some sense, they form different rings, those in the outer rings
being more easily lost than those nearer the nucleus.
I come now to what Bohr added to the theory of atoms
as developed by Rutherford. This was a most curious discovery,
introducing, in a new field, a certain type of discontinuity
which was already known to be exhibited by some other
natural processes. No adage had seemed more respectable in
philosophy than “natura non facit saltum”, Nature makes no
jumps. But if there is one thing more than another that the
experience of a long life has taught me, it is that Latin tags
always express falsehoods; and so it has proved in this case.
Apparently Nature does make jumps, not only now and then,
but whenever a body emits light, as well as on certain other
occasions. The German physicist Planck was the first to demonstrate
the necessity of jumps. He was considering how
bodies radiate heat when they are warmer than their surroundings.
Heat, as has long been known, consists of vibrations,
which are distinguished by their “frequency”, i.e. by the
number of vibrations per second. Planck showed that, for
vibrations having a given frequency, not all amounts of energy
are possible, but only those having to the frequency a ratio
which is a certain quantity h multiplied by 1 or 2 or 3 or some
other whole number, in practice always a small whole number.
The quantity h is known as “Planck’s constant”; it has turned
out to be involved practically everywhere where measurement
is delicate enough to know whether it is involved or not. It
is such a small quantity that, except where measurement can
reach a very high degree of accuracy, the departure from
continuity is not appreciable.7
7 The dimensions of h are those of “action”, i.e. energy multiplied by time,
or moment of momentum, or mass multiplied by length multiplied by velocity.
Its magnitude is about 6.55 × 10.27 erg secs.
Bohr’s great discovery was that this same quantity h is involved
in the orbits of the planetary electrons in atoms, and
that it limits the possible orbits in ways for which nothing in
Newtonian dynamics had prepared us, and for which so far,
there is nothing in relativity-dynamics to account. According
to Newtonian principles, an electron ought to be able to go
round the nucleus in any circle with the nucleus in the centre,
or in any ellipse with the nucleus in a focus; among possible
orbits, it would select one or another according to its direction
and velocity. But in fact only certain out of all these orbits
occur. Those that occur are among those that are possible on
Newtonian principles, but are only an infinitesimal selection
from among these. It will simplify the explanation if we confine
ourselves, as Bohr did at first, to circular orbits; moreover
we will consider only the hydrogen atom, which has one planetary
electron and a nucleus consisting of one proton. To define
the circular orbits that are found to be possible, we proceed
as follows: multiply the mass of the electron by the
circumference of its orbit, and this again by the velocity of the
electron; the result will always be h or 2h, or 3h, or some other
small exact multiple of h, where h, as before, is “Planck’s constant”.
There is thus a smallest possible orbit, in which the
above product is h; the radius of the next orbit, in which the
above produce is 2h, will have a length four times this minimum;
the next, nine times; the next, sixteen times; and so on through
the “square numbers” (i.e. those got by multiplying a number
by itself). Apparently no other circular orbits than these are
possible in the hydrogen atom. Elliptic orbits are possible,
and these again introduce exact multiples of h: but we need
not, for our purposes, concern ourselves with them.
When a hydrogen atom is left to itself, if the electron is in
the minimum orbit it will continue to rotate in that orbit so
long as nothing from outside disturbs it; but if the electron
is in any of the larger possible orbits, it may sooner or later
jump suddenly to a smaller orbit, either the minimum or one
of the intermediate possible orbits. So long as the electron
does not change its orbit, the atom does not radiate energy,
but when the electron jumps to a smaller orbit, the atom loses
energy, which is radiated out in the form of a light-wave. This
light-wave is always such that its energy divided by its frequency
is exactly h. The atom may absorb energy from without,
and it does so by the electron jumping to a larger orbit. It
may then afterwards, when the external source of energy is
removed, jump back to the smaller orbit; this is the cause of
fluorescence, since, in doing so, the atom gives out energy in
the form of light.
The same principles, with greater mathematical complications,
apply to the other elements. There is, however, with
some of the latest elements, a phenomenon which cannot have
any analogue in hydrogen, and that is radio-activity. When
an atom is radio-active, it emits rays of three kinds, called
respectively α-rays, β-rays, and γ-rays. Of these, the γ-rays
are analogous to light, but of much higher frequencies, or
shorter wave-lengths; we need not further concern ourselves
with them. The α-rays and β-rays, on the contrary, are important
as our chief source of knowledge concerning the nuclei of
atoms. It is found that the α-rays consist of helium nuclei,
while the β-rays consist of electrons. Both come out of the
nucleus, since the atom after radio-activity disruption is a different
element from what it was before. But no one knows
just why the nucleus disintegrates when it does, nor why, in a
piece of radium, for example, some atoms break down while
others do not.
The three principal sources of our knowledge concerning
atoms have been the light they emit, X-rays and radio-activity.
As everyone knows, when the light emitted by a glowing gas
is passed through a prism, it is found to consist of well-defined
lines of different colours, which are characteristic for each element,
and constitute what is called its “spectrum”. The spectrum
extends beyond the range of visible light, both into the
infra-red and into the ultra-violet. In the latter direction, it
extends right into the region of X-rays, which are only ultra-ultra-violet
light. By means of crystals, it has been found
possible to study X-ray spectra as exactly as those of ordinary
light. The great merit of Bohr’s theory was that it explained
why elements have the spectra they do have, which had, before,
been a complete mystery. In the cases of hydrogen and positively
electrified helium, the explanation, particularly as extended
by the German physicist Sommerfeld, gave the most
minute numerical agreement between theory and observation; in
other cases, mathematical difficulties made this completeness
impossible, but there was every reason to think that the same
principles were adequate. This was the main reason for accepting
Bohr’s theory; and certainly it was a very strong one.
It was found that visible light enabled us to study the outer
rings of planetary electrons, X-rays enabled us to study the
inner rings, and radio-activity enabled us to study the nucleus.
For the latter purpose, there are also other methods, more particularly
Rutherford’s “bombardment”, which aims at breaking
up nuclei by firing projectiles at them, and sometimes succeeds
in making a hit in spite of the smallness of the target.
The theory of atomic structure that has just been outlined,
like everything in theoretical physics, is capable of expression
in mathematical formulæ; but like many things in theoretical
physics, it is also capable of expression in the form of an imaginative
picture. But here, as always, it is necessary to distinguish
sharply between the mathematical symbols and the pictorial
words. The symbols are pretty sure to be right, or
nearly so; the imaginative picture, on the other hand, should
not be taken too seriously. When we consider the nature of
the evidence upon which the above theory of the atom is based,
we can see that the attempt to make a picture of what goes on
has led us to be far more concrete than we have any right to be.
If we want to assert only what we have good reason to believe,
we shall have to abandon the attempt to be concrete about what
goes on in the atom, and say merely something like this: An
atom with its electrons is a system characterised by certain
integers, all small, and all capable of changing independently.
These integers are the multiples of h involved. When any of
them changes to a smaller integer, energy of a definite amount
is emitted, and its frequency will be obtained by dividing the
energy of h. When any of the integers concerned changes to
a larger integer, energy is absorbed, and again the amount
absorbed is definite. But we cannot know what goes on when
the atom is neither absorbing nor radiating energy, since then
it has no effects in surrounding regions; consequently all evidence
as to atoms is as to their changes, not as to their steady
states.
The point is not that the facts do not fit with the hypothesis
of the atom as a planetary system. There are, it is true, certain
difficulties which afford empirical grounds for the newer
theory which has superseded Bohr’s, and which we shall shortly
consider. But even if no such grounds existed, it would be
obvious that Bohr’s theory states more than we have a right to
infer from what we can observe. Of theories that state so
much, there must be an infinite number that are compatible
with what is known, and it is only what all of these have in
common that we are really entitled to assert. Suppose your
knowledge of Great Britain were entirely confined to observing
the people and goods that enter and leave the ports; you could,
in that case, invent many theories as to the interior of Great
Britain, all of which would agree with all known facts. This
is an exact analogy. If you delimit in the physical universe any
region, large or small, not containing a scientific observer, all
scientific observers will have exactly the same experiences whatever
happens inside this region, provided it does not affect the
flow of energy across the boundary of the region. And so,
if the region contains one atom, any two theories which give
the same results as to the energy that the atom radiates or
absorbs are empirically indistinguishable, and there can be no
reason except simplicity for preferring one of them to the other.
On this ground, even if on no other, prudence compels us to
seek a more abstract theory of the atom than that which we owe
to Rutherford and Bohr.
The newer theory has been put forward mainly by two physicists
already mentioned, Heisenberg and Schrödinger, in forms
which look different, but are in fact mathematically equivalent.
It is as yet an impossible task to describe this theory in simple
language, but something can be said to show its philosophical
bearing. Broadly speaking, it describes the atom by means
of the radiations that come out of it. In Bohr’s theory, the
planetary electrons are supposed to describe orbits over and
over again while the atom is not radiating; in the newer theory,
we say nothing at all as to what happens at these times. The
aim is to confine the theory to what is empirically verifiable,
namely radiations; as to what there is where the radiations
come from, we cannot tell, and it is scientifically unnecessary
to speculate. The theory requires modifications in our conception
of space, of a sort not yet quite clear. It also has the
consequence that we cannot identify an electron at one time
with an electron at another, if in the interval, the atom has
radiated energy. The electron ceases altogether to have the
properties of a “thing” as conceived by common sense; it is
merely a region from which energy may radiate.
On the subject of discontinuity, there is disagreement between
Schrödinger and other physicists. Most of them maintain
that quantum changes—i.e. the changes that occur in an
atom when it radiates or absorbs energy—must be discontinuous.
Schrödinger thinks otherwise. This is a matter in debate
among experts, as to which it would be rash to venture an
opinion. Probably it will be decided one way or other before
very long.
The main point for the philosopher in the modern theory
is the disappearance of matter as a “thing”. It has been replaced
by emanations from a locality—the sort of influences
that characterise haunted rooms in ghost stories. As we shall
see in the next chapter, the theory of relativity leads to a similar
destruction of the solidity of matter, by a different line of argument.
All sorts of events happen in the physical world, but
tables and chairs, the sun and moon, and even our daily bread,
have become pale abstractions, mere laws exhibited in the successions
of events which radiate from certain regions.
CHAPTER X RELATIVITY
We have seen that the world of the atom is a world of revolution
rather than evolution: the electron which has been moving
in one orbit hops quite suddenly into another, so that the motion
is what is called “discontinuous”, that is to say, the electron
is first in one place and then in another, without having
passed over any intermediate places. This sounds like magic,
and there may be some way of avoiding such a disconcerting
hypothesis. At any rate, nothing of the sort seems to happen
in the regions where there are no electrons and protons. In
these regions, so far as we can discover, there is continuity,
that is to say, everything goes by gradual transitions, not by
jumps. The regions in which there are no electrons and protons
may be called “æther” or “empty space” as you prefer:
the difference is only verbal. The theory of relativity is especially
concerned with what goes on in these regions, as opposed
to what goes on where there are electrons and protons. Apart
from the theory of relativity, what we know about these regions
is that waves travel across them, and that these waves, when
they are waves of light or electromagnetism (which are identical),
behave in a certain fashion set forth by Maxwell in certain
formulæ called “Maxwell’s equations”. When I say we
“know” this, I am saying more than is strictly correct, because
all we know is what happens when the waves reach our bodies.
It is as if we could not see the sea, but could only see the people
disembarking at Dover, and inferred the waves from the fact
that the people looked green. It is obvious, in any case, that
we can only know so much about the waves as is involved in
their having such-and-such causes at one end and such-and-such
effects at the other. What can be inferred in this way will be,
at best, something wholly expressible in terms of mathematical
structure. We must not think of the waves as being necessarily
“in” the æther or “in” anything else; they are to be thought
of merely as progressive periodic processes, whose laws are
more or less known, but whose intrinsic character is not known
and never can be.
The theory of relativity has arisen from the study of what
goes on in the regions where there are no electrons and protons.
While the study of the atom has led us to discontinuities, relativity
has produced a completely continuous theory of the intervening
medium—far more continuous than any theory formerly
imagined. At the moment, these two points of view stand more
or less opposed to each other, but no doubt before long they
will be reconciled. There is not, even now, any logical contradiction
between them; there is only a fairly complete lack of
connection.
For philosophy, far the most important thing about the theory
of relativity is the abolition of the one cosmic time and the
one persistent space, and the substitution of space-time in place
of both. This is a change of quite enormous importance, because
it alters fundamentally our notion of the structure of
the physical world, and has, I think, repercussions in psychology.
It would be useless, in our day, to talk about philosophy
without explaining this matter. Therefore I shall make the
attempt, in spite of some difficulty.
Common-sense and pre-relativity physicists believed that, if
two events happen in different places, there must always be a
definite answer, in theory, to the question whether they were
simultaneous. This is found to be a mistake. Let us suppose
two persons A and B a long way apart, each provided with a
mirror and means of sending out light-signals. The events
that happen to A still have a perfectly definite time-order, and
so have those that happen to B; the difficulty comes in connecting
A’s time with B’s. Suppose A sends a flash to B, B’s
mirror reflects it, and it returns to A after a certain time. If
A is on the earth and B on the sun, the time will be about sixteen
minutes. We shall naturally say that the time when B
received the light-signal is half way between the times when A
sent it out and received it back. But this definition turns out
to be not unambiguous; it will depend upon how A and B are
moving relatively to each other. The more this difficulty is
examined, the more insuperable it is seen to be. Anything that
happens to A after he sends out the flash and before he gets
it back is neither definitely before nor definitely after nor definitely
simultaneous with the arrival of the flash at B. To this
extent, there is no unambiguous way of correlating times in
different places.
The notion of a “place” is also quite vague. Is London a
“place”? But the earth is rotating. Is the earth a “place”?
But it is going round the sun. Is the sun a “place”? But it is
moving relatively to the stars. At best you could talk of a
place at a given time; but then it is ambiguous what is a given
time, unless you confine yourself to one place. So the notion of
“place” evaporates.
We naturally think of the universe as being in one state
at one time and in another at another. This is a mistake.
There is no cosmic time, and so we cannot speak of the state
of the universe at a given time. And similarly we cannot speak
unambiguously of the distance between two bodies at a given
time. If we take the time appropriate to one of the two bodies,
we shall get one estimate; if the time of the other, another.
This makes the Newtonian law of gravitation ambiguous, and
shows that it needs restatement, independently of empirical
evidence.
Geometry also goes wrong. A straight line, for example, is
supposed to be a certain track in space whose parts all exist
simultaneously. We shall now find that what is a straight line
for one observer is not a straight line for another. Therefore
geometry ceases to be separable from physics.
The “observer” need not be a mind, but may be a photographic
plate. The peculiarities of the “observer” in this region
belong to physics, not to psychology.
So long as we continue to think in terms of bodies moving,
and try to adjust this way of thinking to the new ideas by successive
corrections, we shall only get more and more confused.
The only way to get clear is to make a fresh start, with events
instead of bodies. In physics, an “event” is anything which,
according to the old notions, would be said to have both a date
and a place. An explosion, a flash of lightning, the starting
of a light-wave from an atom, the arrival of the light-wave at
some other body, any of these would be an “event”. Some
strings of events make up what we regard as the history of one
body; some make up the course of one light-wave; and so on.
The unity of a body is a unity of history—it is like the unity
of a tune, which takes time to play, and does not exist whole
in any one moment. What exists at any one moment is only
what we call an “event”. It may be that the word “event”, as
used in physics, cannot be quite identified with the same word
as used in psychology; for the present we are concerned with
“events” as the constituents of physical processes, and need not
trouble ourselves about “events” in psychology.
The events in the physical world have relations to each other
which are of the sort that have led to the notions of space
and time. They have relations of order, so that we can say
that one event is nearer to a second than to a third. In this
way we can arrive at the notion of the “neighbourhood” of an
event: it will consist roughly speaking of all the events that are
very near the given event. When we say that neighbouring
events have a certain relation, we shall mean that the nearer
two events are to each other, the more nearly they have this
relation, and that they approximate to having it without limit
as they are taken nearer and nearer together.
Two neighbouring events have a measurable quantitative
relation called “interval”, which is sometimes analogous to
distance in space, sometimes to lapse of time. In the former
case it is called space-like, in the latter time-like. The interval
between two events is time-like when one body might be present
at both—for example, when both are parts of the history of
your body. The interval is space-like in the contrary case. In
the marginal case between the two, the interval is zero; this
happens when both are parts of one light-ray.
The interval between two neighbouring events is something
objective, in the sense that any two careful observers will arrive
at the same estimate of it. They will not arrive at the same
estimate for the distance in space or the lapse of time between
the two events, but the interval is a genuine physical fact, the
same for all. If a body can travel freely from one event to
the other, the interval between the two events will be the same
as the time between them as measured by a clock travelling
with the body. If such a journey is physically impossible, the
interval will be the same as the distance as estimated by an
observer to whom the two events are simultaneous. But the
interval is only definite when the two events are very near together;
otherwise the interval depends upon the route chosen
for travelling from the one event to the other.
Four numbers are needed to fix the position of an event in
the world; these correspond to the time and the three dimensions
of space in the old reckoning. These four numbers are
called the co-ordinates of the event. They may be assigned
on any principle which gives neighbouring co-ordinates to neighbouring
events; subject to this condition, they are merely conventional.
For example, suppose an aeroplane has had an
accident. You can fix the position of the accident by four numbers:
latitude, longitude, altitude above sea-level, and Greenwich
Mean Time. But you cannot fix the position of the
explosion in space-time by means of less than four numbers.
Everything in relativity-theory goes (in a sense) from next
to next; there are no direct relations between distant events,
such as distance in time or space. And of course there are no
forces acting at a distance; in fact, except as a convenient fiction,
there are no “forces” at all. Bodies take the course which
is easiest at each moment, according to the character of space-time
in the particular region where they are; this course is
called a geodesic.
Now it will be observed that I have been speaking freely of
bodies and motion, although I said that bodies were merely
certain strings of events. That being so, it is of course necessary
to say what strings of events constitute bodies, since not
all continuous strings of events do so, not even all geodesics.
Until we have defined the sort of thing that makes a body,
we cannot legitimately speak of motion, since this involves the
presence of one body on different occasions. We must therefore
set to work to define what we mean by the persistence of
a body, and how a string of events constituting a body differs
from one which does not. This topic will occupy the next
chapter.
But it may be useful, as a preliminary, to teach our imagination
to work in accordance with the new ideas. We must give
up what Whitehead admirably calls the “pushiness” of matter.
We naturally think of an atom as being like a billiard-ball; we
should do better to think of it as like a ghost, which has no
“pushiness” and yet can make you fly. We have to change our
notions both of substance and of cause. To say that an atom
persists is like saying that a tune persists. If a tune takes five
minutes to play, we do not conceive of it as a single thing which
exists throughout that time, but as a series of notes, so related
as to form a unity. In the case of the tune, the unity is æsthetic;
in the case of the atom, it is causal. But when I say “causal”
I do not mean exactly what the word naturally conveys. There
must be no idea of compulsion or “force”, neither the force of
contact which we imagine we see between billiard-balls nor the
action at a distance which was formerly supposed to constitute
gravitation. There is merely an observed law of succession
from next to next. An event at one moment is succeeded by
an event at a neighbouring moment, which, to the first order
of small quantities, can be calculated from the earlier event.
This enables us to construct a string of events, each, approximately,
growing out of a slightly earlier event according to an
intrinsic law. Outside influences only affect the second order
of small quantities. A string of events connected, in this way,
by an approximate intrinsic law of development is called one
piece of matter. This is what I mean by saying that the unity
of a piece of matter is causal. I shall explain this notion more
fully in later chapters.
CHAPTER XI CAUSAL LAWS IN PHYSICS
In the last chapter we spoke about the substitution of space-time
for space and time, and the effect which this has had in
substituting strings of events for “things” conceived as substances.
In this chapter we will deal with cause and effect as
they appear in the light of modern science. It is at least as
difficult to purge our imagination of irrelevances in this matter
as in regard to substance. The old-fashioned notion of cause
appeared in dynamics as “force”. We still speak of forces
just as we still speak of the sunrise, but we recognise that this
is nothing but a convenient way of speaking, in the one case as
in the other.
Causation is deeply embedded in language and common sense.
We say that people build houses or make roads: to “build”
and to “make” are both notions involving causality. We say
that a man is “powerful”, meaning that his volitions are causes
over a wide range. Some examples of causation seem to us
quite natural, others less so. It seems natural that our muscles
should obey our will, and only reflection makes us perceive the
necessity of finding an explanation of this phenomenon. It
seems natural that when you hit a billiard-ball with a cue it
moves. When we see a horse pulling a cart, or a heavy object
being dragged by a rope, we feel as if we understood all about
it. It is events of this sort that have given rise to the common-sense
belief in causes and forces.
But as a matter of fact the world is incredibly more complicated
than it seems to common sense. When we think we
understand a process—I mean by “we” the non-reflective part
in each of us—what really happens is that there is some sequence
of events so familiar through past experience that at
each stage we expect the next stage. The whole process seems
to us peculiarly intelligible when human desires enter in, for
example, in watching a game: what the ball does and what the
players do seem “natural”, and we feel as if we quite understood
how the stages succeed each other. We thus arrive at
the notion of what is called “necessary” sequence. The text-books
say that A is the cause of B if A is “necessarily” followed
by B. This notion of “necessity” seems to be purely
anthropomorphic, and not based upon anything that is a discoverable
feature of the world. Things happen according to
certain rules; the rules can be generalised, but in the end remain
brute facts. Unless the rules are concealed conventions or definitions,
no reason can be given why they should not be completely
different.
To say that A is “necessarily” followed by B is thus to say
no more than that there is some general rule, exemplified in a
very large number of observed instances, and falsified in none,
according to which events such as A are followed by events such
as B. We must not have any notion of “compulsion”, as if the
cause forced the effect to happen. A good test for the imagination
in this respect is the reversibility of causal laws. We can
just as often infer backwards as forwards. When you get a
letter, you are justified in inferring that somebody wrote it, but
you do not feel that your receiving it compelled the sender to
write it. The notion of compulsion is just as little applicable
to effects as to causes. To say that causes compel effects is as
misleading as to say that effects compel causes. Compulsion
is anthropomorphic: a man is compelled to do something when
he wishes to do the opposite, but except where human or animal
wishes come in the notion of compulsion is inapplicable. Science
is concerned merely with what happens, not with what must
happen.
When we look for invariable rules of sequence in nature, we
find that they are not such as common sense sets up. Common
sense says: thunder follows lightning, waves at sea follow
wind, and so on. Rules of this sort are indispensable in practical
life, but in science they are all only approximate. If there
is any finite interval of time, however short, between the cause
and the effect, something may happen to prevent the effect from
occurring. Scientific laws can only be expressed in differential
equations. This means that, although you cannot tell what
may happen after a finite time, you can say that, if you make
the time shorter and shorter, what will happen will be more and
more nearly according to such-and-such a rule. To take a very
simple case: I am now in this room; you cannot tell where I
shall be in another second, because a bomb may explode and
blow me sky-high, but if you take any two small fragments of
my body which are now very close together, you can be sure
that, after some very short finite time, they will still be very
close together. If a second is not short enough, you must take
a shorter time; you cannot tell in advance how short a time
you may have to take, but you may feel fairly certain that there
is a short enough time.
The laws of sequence in physics, apart from quantum phenomena,
are of two sorts, which appeared in traditional dynamics
as laws of velocity and laws of acceleration. In a very
short time, the velocity of a body alters very little, and if the
time is taken short enough, the change of velocity diminishes
without limit. This is what, in the last chapter, we called an
“intrinsic” causal law. Then there is the effect of the outer
world, as it appeared in traditional dynamics, which is shown
in acceleration. The small change which does occur in the
velocity in a short time is attributed to surrounding bodies,
because it is found to vary as they vary, and to vary according
to ascertained laws. Thus we think of surrounding bodies as
exerting an influence, which we call “force”, though this remains
as mysterious as the influence of the stars in astrology.
Einstein’s theory of gravitation has done away with this
conception in so far as gravitational forces are concerned. In
this theory, a planet moving round the sun is moving in the
nearest approach to a straight line that the neighbourhood permits.
The neighbourhood is supposed to be non-Euclidean,
that is to say, to contain no straight lines such as Euclid imagined.
If a body is moving freely, as the planets do, it observes
a certain rule. Perhaps the simplest way to state this rule is
as follows: Suppose you take any two events which happen
on the earth, and you measure the time between them by ideally
accurate clocks which move with the earth. Suppose some
traveller on a magic carpet had meanwhile cruised about the
universe, leaving the earth at the time of the first event and
returning at the time of the second. By his clocks the period
elapsed will be less than by the terrestial clocks. This is what
is meant by saying that the earth moves in a “geodesic”, which
is the nearest approach to a straight line to be found in the
region in which we live. All this is, so to speak, geometrical,
and involves no “forces”. It is not the sun that makes the
earth go round, but the nature of space-time where the earth is.
Even this is not quite correct. Space-time does not make
the earth go round the sun; it makes us say the earth goes
round the sun. That is to say, it makes this the shortest way
of describing what occurs. We could describe it in other language,
which would be equally correct, but less convenient.
The abolition of “force” in astronomy is perhaps connected
with the fact that astronomy depends only upon the sense of
sight. On the earth, we push and pull, we touch things, and
we experience muscular strains. This all gives us a notion of
“force”, but this notion is anthropomorphic. To imagine the
laws of motion of heavenly bodies, think of the motions of
objects in a mirror; they may move very fast, although in the
mirror world there are no forces.
What we really have to substitute for force is laws of correlation.
Events can be collected in groups by their correlations.
This is all that is true in the old notion of causality.
And this is not a “postulate” or “category”, but an observed
fact—lucky, not necessary.
As we suggested before, it is these correlations of events
that lead to the definition of permanent “things”. There is
no essential difference, as regards substantiality, between an
electron and a light-ray. Each is really a string of events or of
sets of events. In the case of the light-ray, we have no temptation
to think otherwise. But in the case of the electron, we
think of it as a single persistent entity. There may be such an
entity, but we can have no evidence that there is. What we can
discover is (a) a group of events spreading outwards from a
centre—say, for definiteness, the events constituting a wave of
light—and attributed, hypothetically, to a “cause” in that
centre; (b) more or less similar groups of events at other times,
connected with the first group according to the laws of physics,
and therefore attributed to the same hypothetical cause at other
times. But all that we ought to assume is series of groups of
events, connected by discoverable laws. These series we may
define as “matter”. Whether there is matter in any other
sense, no one can tell.
What is true in the old notion of causality is the fact that
events at different times are connected by laws (differential
equations). When there is a law connecting an event A with
an event B, the two have a definite unambiguous time-order.
But if the events are such that a ray of light starting from A
would arrive at any body which was present at B after B had
occurred, and vice versa, then there is no definite true order,
and no possible causal law connecting A and B. A and B must
then be regarded as separate facts of geography.
Perhaps the scope and purpose of this and the foregoing
chapters may be made clearer by showing their bearing upon
certain popular beliefs which may seem self-evident but are
really in my opinion either false or likely to lead to falsehood.
I shall confine myself to objections which have actually been
made to me when trying to explain the philosophical outcome
of modern physics.8
8 These objections are quoted (with kind permission) from a letter written
to me by a well-known engineer, Mr. Percy Griffith, who is also a writer on
philosophical subjects.
“We cannot conceive of movement apart from some thing
as moving.” This is, in a sense, a truism; but in the sense in
which it is usually meant, it is a falsehood. We speak of the
“movement” of a drama or piece of music, although we do
not conceive either as a “thing” which exists complete at every
moment of the performance. This is the sort of picture we
must have in our minds when we try to conceive the physical
world. We must think of a string of events, connected together
by certain causal connections, and having enough unity
to deserve a single name. We then begin to imagine that the
single name denotes a single “thing”, and if the events concerned
are not all in the same place, we say the “thing” has
“moved.” But this is only a convenient shorthand. In the
cinema, we seem to see a man falling off a skyscraper, catching
hold of the telegraph wires, and reaching the ground none the
worse. We know that, in fact, there are a number of different
photographs, and the appearance of a single “thing” moving
is deceptive. In this respect, the real world resembles the
cinema.
In connection with motion one needs to emphasise the very
difficult distinction between experience and prejudice. Experience,
roughly, is what you see, and prejudice is what you only
think you see. Prejudice tells you that you see the same table
on two different occasions; you think that experience tells you
this. If it really were experience, you could not be mistaken;
yet a similar table may be substituted without altering the experience.
If you look at a table on two different occasions, you
have very similar sensations, and memory tells you that they
are similar; but there is nothing to show that one identical
entity causes the two sensations. If the table is in a cinema,
you know that there is not such an entity, even though you can
watch it changing with apparent continuity. The experience
is just like that with a “real” table; so in the case of a “real”
table also, there is nothing in the actual experience to show
whether there is a persistent entity or not. I say, therefore:
I do not know whether there is a persistent entity, but I do know
that my experiences can be explained without assuming that
there is. Therefore it can be no part of legitimate science to
assert or deny the persistent entity; if it does either, it goes
beyond the warrant of experience.
The following is a verbally cited passage in the letter referred
to objecting to what was said above about “force”:
“The concept of Force is not of physical but of psychological
origin. Rightly or wrongly it arises in the most impersonal
contemplation of the Stellar Universe, where we observe an
infinite number of spherical bodies revolving on their own axes
and gyrating in orbits round each other. Rightly or wrongly,
we naturally conceive of these as having been so constituted and
so maintained by some Force or Forces.”
We do not, in fact, “observe” what it is here said that we
observe; all this is inferred. What we observe, in astronomy,
is a two-dimensional pattern of points of light, with a few
bright surfaces of measurable size when seen through the telescope
(the planets), and of course the larger bright surfaces
that we call the sun and moon. Most of this pattern (the fixed
stars) rotates round the earth once in every twenty-three hours
and fifty-six minutes. The sun rotates in varying periods, which
average twenty-four hours and never departs very far from the
average. The moon and planets have apparent motions which
are more irregular. These are the observed facts. There is
no logical impossibility about the formulæ doctrine of spheres
rotating round the earth, one for each planet and one for the
stars. The modern doctrines are simpler, but not one whit
more in accordance with observed facts; it is our passion for
simple laws that has made us adopt them.
The last sentence of the above quotation raises some further
points of interest. “Rightly or wrongly”, the writer says, “we
naturally conceive of these as having been so constituted and
so maintained by some Force or Forces.” I do not deny this.
It is “natural”, and it is “right or wrong”—more specifically,
it is wrong. “Force” is part of our love of explanations.
Everyone knows about the Hindu who thought that the world
does not fall because it is supported by an elephant, and the
elephant does not fall because it is supported by a tortoise.
When his European interlocutor said “But how about the tortoise?”
he replied that he was tired of metaphysics and wanted
to change the subject. “Force”, as an explanation, is no better
than the elephant and the tortoise. It is an attempt to get at
the “why” of natural processes, not only at the “how”. What
we observe, to a limited extent, is what happens, and we can
arrive at laws according to which observable things happen,
but we cannot arrive at a reason for the laws. If we invent a
reason, it needs a reason in its turn, and so on. “Force” is a
rationalising of natural processes, but a fruitless one since
“force” would have to be rationalised also.
When it is said, as it often is, that “force” belongs to the
world of experience, we must be careful to understand what
can be meant. In the first place, it may be meant that calculations
which employ the notion of force work out right in practice.
This, broadly speaking, is admitted: no one would suggest
that the engineer should alter his methods, or should give
up working out stresses and strains. But that does not prove
that there are stresses and strains. A British medical man
renders his accounts in guineas, although they have long since
ceased to exist except as a name; he obtains a real payment,
though he employs a fictitious coin. Similarly, the engineer is
concerned with the question whether his bridge will stand: the
fact of experience is that it stands (or does not stand), and
the stresses and strains are only a way of explaining what
sort of bridge will stand. They are as useful as guineas, but
equally imaginary.
But when it is said that force is a fact of experience, there
is something quite different that may be meant. It may be
meant that we experience force when we experience such things
as pressure or muscular exertion. We cannot discuss this contention
adequately without going into the relation of physics
to psychology, which is a topic we shall consider at length at
a later stage. But we may say this much: if you press your
finger-tip upon a hard object, you have an experience which
you attribute to your finger-tip, but there is a long chain of intermediate
causes in nerves and brain. If your finger were
amputated you could still have the same experience by a suitable
operation on the nerves that formerly connected the finger
with the brain, so that the force between the finger-tip and the
hard object, as a fact of experience, may exist when there is no
finger-tip. This shows that force, in this sense, cannot be what
concerns physics.
As the above example illustrates, we do not, in fact, experience
many things that we think we experience. This makes it
necessary to ask, without too much assurance, in what sense
physics can be based upon experience, and what must be the
nature of its entities and its inferences if it is to make good its
claim to be empirically grounded. We shall begin this inquiry
in the next chapter.
CHAPTER XII PHYSICS AND PERCEPTION
It will be remembered that we regarded perception, in Chapter
V, as a species of “sensitivity”. Sensitivity to a given feature
of the environment we defined as consisting in some characteristic
reaction which is exhibited whenever that feature is present,
but not otherwise; this property is possessed more perfectly,
in given directions, by scientific instruments than by living
bodies, though scientific instruments are more selective as
to the stimuli to which they will respond. We decided that
what, from the standpoint of an external observer, distinguishes
perception from other forms of sensitivity is the law of association
or conditioned reflexes. But we also found that this
purely external treatment of perception presupposes our knowledge
of the physical world as a going concern. We have now
to investigate this presupposition, and to consider how we come
to know about physics, and how much we really do know.
According to the theory of Chapter V, it is possible to perceive
things that are not in a spatial contact with the body.
There must be a reaction to a feature of the environment, but
that feature may be at a greater or less distance from the body
of the percipient; we can even perceive the sun and stars, within
the limits of the definition. All that is necessary is that our
reaction should depend upon the spatial relation between our
body and the feature of the environment. When our back is
towards the sun, we do not see it; when our face is towards it,
we do.
When we consider perception—visual or auditory—of an
external event, there are three different matters to be examined.
There is first the process in the outside world, from the
event to the percipient’s body; there is next the process in his
body, in so far as this can be known by an outside observer;
lastly, there is the question, which must be faced sooner or later,
whether the percipient can perceive something of the process
in his body which no other observer could perceive. We will
take these points in order.
If it is to be possible to “perceive” an event not in the percipient’s
body, there must be a physical process in the outer
world such that, when a certain event occurs, it produces a
stimulus of a certain kind at the surface of the percipient’s
body. Suppose, for example, that pictures of different animals
are exhibited on a magic lantern to a class of children, and all
the children are asked to say the name of each animal in turn.
We may assume that the children are sufficiently familiar with
animals to say “cat”, “dog”, “giraffe”, “hippopotamus”, etc.,
at the right moments. We must then suppose—taking the
physical world for granted—that some process travels from
each picture to the eyes of the various children, retaining
throughout these journeys such peculiarities that, when the
process reaches their eyes, it can in one case stimulate the word
“cat” and in another the word “dog”. All this the physical
theory of light provides for. But there is one interesting point
about language that should be noticed in this connection. If
the usual physical theory of light is correct, the various children
will receive stimuli which differ greatly according to their distance
and direction from the picture, and according to the way
the light falls. There are also differences in their reactions,
for, though they all utter the word “cat”, some say it loud,
others soft, some in a soprano voice, some in a contralto. But
the differences in their reactions are much less than the differences
in the stimuli. This is still more the case if we consider
various different pictures of cats, to all of which they
respond with the word “cat”. Thus language is a means of
producing responses which differ less than the stimuli do, in
cases where the resemblances between the stimuli are more important
to us than the differences. This fact makes us apt to
overlook the differences between stimuli which produce nearly
identical responses.
As appears from the above, when a number of people simultaneously
perceive a picture of a cat, there are differences between
the stimuli to their various perceptions, and these
differences must obviously involve differences in their reactions.
The verbal responses may differ very little, but even the verbal
responses could be made to differ by putting more complicated
questions than merely “What animal is that?” One could ask:
“Can the picture be covered by your thumb-nail held at arm’s
length?” Then the answer would be different according as
the percipient was near the picture or far off. But the normal
percipient, if left to himself, will not notice such differences,
that is to say, his verbal response will be the same in spite of
the differences in the stimuli.
The fact that it is possible for a number of people to perceive
the same noise or the same coloured pattern obviously depends
upon the fact that a physical process can travel outward from
a centre and retain certain of its characteristics unchanged, or
very little changed. The most notable of such characteristics
is frequency in a wave-motion. That, no doubt, affords a biological
reason for the fact that our most delicate senses, sight
and hearing, are sensitive to frequencies, which determine
colour in what we see and pitch in what we hear. If there were
not, in the physical world, processes spreading out from centres
and retaining certain characters practically unchanged, it would
be impossible for different percipients to perceive the same object
from different points of view, and we should not have been
able to discover that we all live in a common world.
We come now to the process in the percipient’s body, in so
far as this can be perceived by an outside observer. This raises
no new philosophical problems, because we are still concerned,
as before, with the perception of events outside the observer’s
body. The observer, now, is supposed to be a physiologist,
observing, say, what goes on in the eye when light falls upon
it. His means of knowing are, in principle, exactly the same
as in the observation of dead matter. An event in an eye upon
which light is falling causes light-waves to travel in a certain
manner until they reach the eye of the physiologist. They there
cause a process in the physiologist’s eye and optic nerve and
brain, which ends in what he calls “seeing what happens in the
eye he is observing”. But this event, which happens in the
physiologist, is not what happened in the eye he was observing;
it is only connected with this by a complicated causal chain.
Thus our knowledge of physiology is no more direct or intimate
than our knowledge of processes in dead matter; we
do not know any more about our eyes than about the trees
and fields and clouds that we see by means of them. The event
which happens when a physiologist observes an eye is an event
in him, not on the eye that he is observing.
We come now at last to the question of self-observation,
which we have hitherto avoided. I say “self-observation”
rather than “introspection”, because the latter word has controversial
associations that I wish to avoid. I mean by “self-observation”
anything that a man can perceive about himself
but that others, however situated, cannot perceive about him.
What follows is only preliminary, since the subject will be discussed
at length in Chapter XVI.
No one can deny that we know things about ourselves which
others cannot know unless we tell them. We know when we
have toothache, when we feel thirsty, what we were dreaming
when we woke up, and so on. Dr. Watson might say that the
dentist can know we have toothache by observing a cavity in
a tooth. I will not reply that the dentist is often mistaken;
this may be merely because the art of dentistry has not been
sufficiently perfected. I will concede as possible, in the future,
a state of odontology in which the dentist could always know
whether I am feeling toothache. But even then his knowledge
has a different character from mine. His knowledge is an inference,
based upon the inducive law that people with such-and-such
cavities suffer pain of a certain kind. But this law
cannot be established by observation of cavities alone; it requires
that, where these are observed, the people who have
them should tell us that they feel toothache. And, more than
that, they must be speaking the truth. Purely external observation
can discover that people with cavities say they have toothache,
but not that they have it. Saying one has toothache is a
different thing from having it; if not we could cure toothache
by not talking about it, and so save our dentists’ bills. I am
sure the expert opinion of dentists will agree with me that this
is impossible.
To this argument, however, it might be replied that having
toothache is a state of the body, and that knowing I have toothache
is a response to this bodily stimulus. It will be said that,
theoretically, the state of my body when I have toothache can
be observed by an outsider, who can then also know that I have
toothache. This answer, however, does not really meet the
point. When the outside observer knows that I have toothache,
not only is his knowledge based upon an inductive inference,
as we have already seen, but his knowledge of the inferred
term, “toothache”, must be based upon personal experience.
No knowledge of dentistry could enable a man to know what
toothache is if he had never felt it. If, then, toothache is really
a state of the body—which, at the moment, I neither affirm
nor deny—it is a state of the body which only the man himself
can perceive. In a word, whoever has experienced toothache
and can remember it has knowledge that cannot be possessed
by a man who has never experienced toothache.
Take next our knowledge of our own dreams. Dr. Watson
has not, so far as I know, ever discussed dreams, but I imagine
he would say something like this: In dreams, there are probably
small laryngeal movements such as, if they were greater, would
lead to speech; indeed, people do sometimes cry out in dreams.
There may also be stimulations of the sense-organs, which produce
unusual reactions owing to the peculiar physiological condition
of the brain during sleep: but all these reactions must
consist of small movements, which could theoretically be seen
from outside, say by some elaboration of X-ray apparatus. This
is all very well, but meantime it is hypothetical, and the dreamer
himself knows his dreams without all this elaborate inference.
Can we say that he really knows these hypothetical small bodily
movements, although he thinks he knows something else? That
would presumably be Dr. Watson’s position, and it must be
admitted that, with a definition of “knowledge” such as we
considered in Chapter VIII, such a view is not to be dismissed
offhand as obviously impossible. Moreover, if we are to say
the perception gives knowledge of the physical world, we shall
have to admit that what we are perceiving may be quite different
from what it seems to be. A table does not look like a vast
number of electrons and protons, nor like trains of waves meeting
and clashing. Yet this is the sort of thing a table is said
to be by modern physicists. If, then, what seems to us to be
just a table such as may be seen any day is really this odd sort
of thing, it is possible that what seems to us to be a dream is
really a number of movements in the brain.
This again is all very well, but there is one point which it
fails to explain, namely, what is meant by “seeming”. If a
dream or a table “seems” to be one sort of thing while it is
“really” another, we shall have to admit that it really seems,
and that what it seems to be has a reality of its own. Nay
more, we only arrive at what it “really” is by an inference,
valid or invalid, from what it seems to be. If we are wrong
about the seeming, we must be doubly wrong about the reality,
since the sole ground for asserting the table composed of electrons
and protons is the table that we see, i.e. the “seeming”
table. We must therefore treat “seeming” with respect.
Let us consider Dr. Watson watching a rat in a maze. He
means to be quite objective, and report only what really goes
on. Can he succeed? In one sense he can. He can use words
about what he sees which are the same as any other scientifically
trained observer will use if he watches the same rat at the
same time. But Dr. Watson’s objectivity emphatically does
not consist in using the same words as other people use; his
vocabulary is very different from that of most psychologists.
He cannot take as the sole test of truth the consensus of mankind.
“Securus judicat orbis terrarum” is another example of
a Latin tag which is false, and which certainly Dr. Watson
would not consider true. It has happened again and again
in human history that a man who said something that had never
been said before turned out to be right, while the people who
repeated the wise saws of their forefathers were talking nonsense.
Therefore, when Dr. Watson endeavours to eliminate
subjectivity in observing rats, he does not mean that he says
what everybody else says. He means that he refrains from inferring
anything about the rat beyond its bodily movements.
This is all to the good, but I think he fails to realise that almost
as long and difficult an inference is required to give us knowledge
of the rat’s bodily movements as to give us knowledge
of its “mind”. And what is more, the data from which we
must start in order to get to know the rat’s bodily movements
are data of just the sort that Dr. Watson wishes to avoid,
namely private data patent to self-observation but not patent
to anyone except the observer. This is the point at which, in
my opinion, behaviourism as a final philosophy breaks down.
When several people simultaneously watch a rat in a maze,
or any other example of what we should naturally regard as
matter in motion, there is by no means complete identity between
the physical events which happen at the surface of their
eyes and constitute the stimuli to their perceptions. There are
differences of perspective, of light and shade, of apparent size,
and so on, all of which will be reproduced in photographs taken
from the places where the eyes of the several observers are.
These differences produce differences in the reactions of the
observers—differences which a quite unthinking person may
overlook, but which are familiar to every artist. Now it is
contrary to all scientific canons to suppose that the object perceived,
in addition to affecting us in the way of stimulus and
reaction, also affects us directly by some mystical epiphany;
certainly it is not what any behaviourist would care to assert.
Our knowledge of the physical world, therefore, must be contained
in our reaction to the stimulus which reaches us across
the intervening medium; and it seems hardly possible that our
reaction should have a more intimate relation to the object than
the stimulus has. Since the stimulus differs for different observers,
the reaction also differs; consequently, in all our perceptions
of physical processes there is an element of subjectivity.
If, therefore, physics is true in its broad outlines (as the above
argument supposes), what we call “perceiving” a physical
process is something private and subjective, at least in part, and
is yet the only possible starting-point for our knowledge of the
physical world.
There is an objection to the above argument which might
naturally be made, but it would be in fact invalid. It may be
said that we do not in fact proceed to infer the physical world
from our perceptions, but that we begin at once with a rough-and-ready
knowledge of the physical world, and only at a late
stage of sophistication compel ourselves to regard our knowledge
of the physical world as an inference. What is valid in
this statement is the fact that our knowledge of the physical
world is not at first inferential, but that is only because we take
our percepts to be the physical world. Sophistication and
philosophy come in at the stage at which we realise that the
physical world cannot be identified with our percepts. When
my boy was three years old, I showed him Jupiter, and told him
that Jupiter was larger than the earth. He insisted that I
must be speaking of some other Jupiter, because, as he patiently
explained, the one he was seeing was obviously quite
small. After some efforts, I had to give it up and leave him
unconvinced. In the case of the heavenly bodies, adults have
got used to the idea that what is really there can only be
inferred from what they see; but where rats in mazes are concerned,
they still tend to think that they are seeing what is
happening in the physical world. The difference, however, is
only one of degree, and naive realism is as untenable in the one
case as in the other. There are differences in the perceptions
of two persons observing the same process; there are sometimes
no discoverable differences between two perceptions of
the same persons observing different processes, e.g. pure water
and water full of bacilli. The subjectivity of our perceptions
is thus of practical as well as theoretical importance.
I am not maintaining that what we primarily know is our
own perceptions. This is largely a verbal question; but with
the definition of knowledge given in Chapter VIII, it will be
correct to say that from the first we know external objects, the
question is not as to what are the objects we know, but rather
as to how accurately we know them. Our non-inferential
knowledge of an object cannot be more accurate than our reaction
to it, since it is part of that reaction. And our reaction
cannot be more accurate than the stimulus. But what on earth
can you mean by the “accuracy” of a stimulus? I may be asked.
I mean just the same as by the accuracy of a map or a set of
statistics. I mean a certain kind of correspondence. One pattern
is an accurate representation of another if every element
of the one can be taken as the representative of just one element
of the other, and the relations that make the one set
into a pattern correspond with relations making the other set
into a pattern. In this sense, writing can represent speech with
a certain degree of accuracy; to every spoken word a written
word corresponds, and to the time-order of the spoken words
the space-order of the written words corresponds. But there
are inflexions and tones of voice that cannot be represented in
writing, except, to some extent, by musical notation. A gramophone
record is a much more accurate representation of vocal
sounds than any writing can be; but even the best gramophone
record fails to be completely accurate. The impression made
upon an observer is very analogous to a gramophone record or
a photograph, but usually less accurate owing to the influence
of the law of association, and the lack of delicacy in our senses.
And whatever limitations there are to the accuracy of our impressions
are limitations to the accuracy of our non-inferential
knowledge of the external world.
Another point: If we accept the definition of knowledge given
in Chapter VIII, which was framed so far as to be as favourable
as possible to behaviourism, a given reaction may be regarded
as knowledge of various different occurrences. When
we see Jupiter, we have, according to the definition, knowledge
of Jupiter, but we also have knowledge of the stimulus at the
surface of the eye, and even of the process in the optic nerve.
For it is arbitrary at what point we start in the process leading
to a certain event in the brain: this event, and the consequent
bodily action, may be regarded as a reaction to a process starting
at any earlier point. And the nearer our starting-point
is to the brain, the more accurate becomes the knowledge displayed
in our reaction. A lamp at the top of a tall building
might produce the same visual stimulus as Jupiter, or at any
rate one practically indistinguishable from that produced by
Jupiter. A blow on the nose might make us “see stars”. Theoretically,
it should be possible to apply a stimulus direct to
the optic nerve, which should give us a visual sensation. Thus
when we think we see Jupiter, we may be mistaken. We are
less likely to be mistaken if we say that the surface of the eye
is being stimulated in a certain way, and still less likely to be
mistaken if we say that the optic nerve is being stimulated in
a certain way. We do not eliminate the risk of error completely
unless we confine ourselves to saying that an event of a certain
sort is happening in the brain; this statement may still be true
if we see Jupiter in a dream.
But, I shall be asked, what do you know about what is happening
in the brain? Surely nothing. Not so, I reply. I know
about what is happening in the brain exactly what naive realism
thinks it knows about what is happening in the outside world.
But this needs explaining, and there are other matters that must
be explained first.
When the light from a fixed star reaches me, I see the star if
it is night and I am looking in the right direction. The light
started years ago, probably many years ago, but my reaction
is primarily to something that is happening now. When my
eyes are open, I see the star; when they are shut, I do not. Children
discover at a fairly early age that they see nothing when
their eyes are shut. They are aware of the difference between
seeing and not seeing, and also of the difference between eyes
open and eyes shut; gradually they discover that these two differences
are correlated—I mean that they have expectations
of which this is the intellectualist transcription. Again, children
learn to name the colours, and to state correctly whether
a thing is blue or red or yellow or what-not. They ought not
to be sure that light of the appropriate wave-length started
from the object. The sun looks red in a London fog, grass
looks blue through blue spectacles, everything looks yellow to a
person suffering from jaundice. But suppose you ask: What
colour are you seeing? The person who answers, in these
cases, red for the sun, blue for the grass, and yellow for the
sick-room of the jaundiced patient, is answering quite truly.
And in each of these cases he is stating something that he knows.
What he knows in such cases is what I call a “percept”. I shall
contend later that, from the standpoint of physics, a percept
is in the brain; for the present, I am only concerned to say that
a percept is what is most indubitable in our knowledge of the
world.
To behaviourism as a metaphysic one may put the following
dilemma. Either physics is valid in its main lines, or it is not.
If it is not, we know nothing about the movements of matter;
for physics is the result of the most serious and careful study
of which the human intelligence has hitherto been capable. If,
on the other hand, physics is valid in its main lines, any physical
process starting either inside or outside the body will, if it
reaches the brain, be different if the intervening medium is different;
moreover two persons, initially very different, may become
indistinguishable as they spread and grow fainter. On
both grounds, what happens in the brain is not connected quite
accurately with what happens elsewhere, and our perceptions
are therefore infected with subjectivity on purely physical
grounds. Even, therefore, when we assume the truth of physics,
what we know most indubitably through perception is not
the movements of matter, but certain events in ourselves which
are connected, in a manner not quite invariable, with the movements
of matter. To be specific, when Dr. Watson watches
rats in mazes, what he knows, apart from difficult inferences,
are certain events in himself. The behaviour of the rats can
only be inferred by the help of physics, and is by no means to
be accepted as something accurately knowable by direct observation.
I do not in fact entertain any doubts that physics is true in
its main lines. The interpretation of physical formulæ is a
matter as to which a considerable degree of uncertainty is possible;
but we cannot well doubt that there is an interpretation
which is true roughly and in the main. I shall come to the
question of interpretation later; for the present, I shall assume
that we may accept physics in its broad outlines, without
troubling to consider how it is to be interpreted. On this basis,
the above remarks on perception seem undeniable. We are
often misled as to what is happening, either by peculiarities of
the medium between the object and our bodies, or by unusual
states of our bodies, or by a temporary or permanent abnormality
in the brain. But in all these cases something is really
happening, as to which, if we turn our attention to it, we can
obtain knowledge that is not misleading. At one time when,
owing to illness, I had been taking a great deal of quinine, I
became hypersensitive to noise, so that when the nurse rustled
the newspaper I thought she was spilling a scuttle of coals on
the floor. The interpretation was mistaken, but it was quite
true that I heard a loud noise. It is a commonplace that a
man whose leg has been amputated can still feel pains in it;
here again, he does really feel the pains, and is only mistaken in
his belief that they come from his leg. A percept is an observable
event, but its interpretation as knowledge of this or that
event in the physical world is liable to be mistaken, for reasons
which physics and physiology can make fairly clear.
The subjectivity of percepts is a matter of degree. They
are more subjective when people are drunk or asleep than when
they are sober and awake. They are more subjective in regard
to distant objects than in regard to such as are near. They
may acquire various peculiar kinds of subjectivity through injuries
to the brain or to the nerves. When I speak of a percept
as “subjective” I mean that the physiological inferences
to which it gives rise are mistaken or vague. This is always
the case to some extent, but much more so in some circumstances
than in others. And the sort of defect that leads to mistakes
must be distinguished from the sort that leads to vagueness. If
you see a man a quarter of a mile away, you can see that it is a
man if you have normal eyesight, but you probably cannot tell
who it is, even if in fact it is some one you know well. This
is vagueness in the percept: the inferences you draw are correct
so far as they go, but they do not go very far. On the other
hand, if you are seeing double and think there are two men, you
have a case of mistake. Vagueness, to a greater or less extent,
is universal and inevitable; mistakes, on the other hand, can
usually be avoided by taking trouble and by not always trusting
to physiological inference. Anybody can see double on purpose,
by focussing on a distant object and noticing a near one; but
this will not cause mistakes, since the man is aware of the
subjective element in his double vision. Similarly we are not
deceived by after-images, and only dogs are deceived by gramophones.
From what has been said in this chapter, it is clear that our
knowledge of the physical world, if it is to be made as reliable
as possible, must start from percepts, and must scrutinize the
physiological inferences by which percepts are accompanied.
Physiological inference is inference in the sense that it sometimes
leads to error and physics gives reason to expect that
percepts will, in certain circumstances, be more or less deceptive
if taken as signs of something outside the brain. It is these
facts that give a subjective cast to the philosophy of physics, at
any rate in its beginnings. We cannot start cheerfully with a
world of matter in motion, as to which any two sane and sober
observers must agree. To some extent, each man dreams his
own dream, and the disentangling of the dream element in our
percepts is no easy matter. This is, indeed, the work that scientific
physics undertakes to do.
CHAPTER XIII PHYSICAL AND PERCEPTUAL SPACE
Perhaps there is nothing so difficult for the imagination as to
teach it to feel about space as modern science compels us to
think. This is the task which must be attempted in the present
chapter.
We said in Chapter XII that we know about what is happening
in the brain exactly what naive realism thinks it knows
about what is happening in the world. This remark may have
seemed cryptic; it must now be expanded and expounded.
The gist of the matter is that percepts, which we spoke about
at the end of last chapter, are in our heads; that percepts are
what we can know with most certainty; and that percepts contain
what naive realism thinks it knows about the world.
But when I say that my percepts are in my head, I am saying
something which is ambiguous until the different kinds of space
have been explained, for the statement is only true in connection
with physical space. There is also a space in our percepts,
and of this space the statement would not be true. When
I say that there is space in our percepts, I mean nothing at all
difficult to understand. I mean—to take the sense of sight,
which is the most important in this connection—that in what
we see at one time there is up and down, right and left, inside
and outside. If we see, say, a circle on a blackboard, all these
relations exist within what we see. The circle has a top half
and a bottom half, a right-hand half and a left-hand half, an
inside and an outside. Those relations alone are enough to
make up a space of sorts. But the space of everyday life is
filled out with what we derive from touch and movement—how
a thing feels when we touch it, and what movements are necessary
in order to grasp it. Other elements also come into the
genesis of the space in which everybody believes who has not
been troubled by philosophy; but it is unnecessary for our purposes
to go into this question any more deeply. The point that
concerns us is that a man’s percepts are private to himself:
what I see, no one else sees; what I hear, no one else hears;
what I touch, no one else touches; and so on. True, others
hear and see something very like what I hear and see, if they
are suitably placed; but there are always differences. Sounds
are less loud at a distance; objects change their visual appearance
according to the laws of perspective. Therefore it is impossible
for two persons at the same time to have exactly identical
percepts. It follows that the space of percepts, like the
percepts, must be private; there are as many perceptual spaces
as there are percipients. My percept of a table is outside my
percept of my head, in my perceptual space; but it does not
follow that it is outside my head as a physical object in physical
space. Physical space is neutral and public: in this space, all
my percepts are in my head, even the most distant star as I see
it. Physical and perceptual space have relations, but they are
not identical, and failure to grasp the difference between them
is a potent source of confusion.
To say that you see a star when you see the light that has
come from it is no more correct than to say that you see New
Zealand when you see a New Zealander in London. Your
perception when (as we say) you see a star is causally connected,
in the first instance, with what happens in the brain, the
optic nerve, and the eye, then with a light-wave which, according
to physics, can be traced back to the star as its source. Your
sensations will be closely similar if the light comes from a lamp
at the top of a mast. The physical space in which you believe
the “real” star to be is an elaborate inference; what is given is
the private space in which the speck of light you see is situated.
It is still an open question whether the space of sight has
depth, or is merely a surface, as Berkeley contended. This does
not matter for our purposes. Even if we admit that sight alone
shows a difference between an object a few inches from the
eyes and an object several feet distant, yet you certainly cannot,
by sight alone, see that a cloud is less distant than a fixed
star, though you may infer that it is, because it can hide the star.
The world of astronomy, from the point of view of sight, is a
surface. If you were put in a dark room with little holes cut
in the ceiling in the pattern of the stars letting light come
through, there would be nothing in your immediate visual data
to show that you were not “seeing the stars”. This illustrates
what I mean by saying that what you see is not “out there” in
the sense of physics.
We learn in infancy that we can sometimes touch objects
we see, and sometimes not. When we cannot touch them at
once, we can sometimes do so by walking to them. That is to
say, we learn to correlate sensations of sight with sensations
of touch, and sometimes with sensations of movement followed
by sensations of touch. In this way we locate our sensations in
a three-dimensional world. Those which involve sight alone
we think of as “external”, but there is no justification for this
view. What you see when you see a star is just as internal as
what you feel when you feel a headache. That is to say, it is
internal from the standpoint of physical space. It is distant
in your private space, because it is not associated with sensations
of touch, and cannot be associated with them by means
of any journey you can perform.
Your own body, as known to you through direct experience,
is quite different from your own body as considered in physics.
You know more about your own body than about any other
through direct experience, because your own body can give you
a number of sensations that no other body can, for instance all
kinds of bodily pains. But you still know it only through sensations;
apart from inference, it is a bundle of sensations, and
therefore quite different, prima facie, from what physics calls a
body.
Most of the things you see are outside what you see when
(as one says) you see your own body. That is to say: you see
certain other patches of colour, differently situated in visual
space, and say you are seeing things outside your body. But
from the point of view of physics, all that you see must count
as inside your body; what goes on elsewhere can only be inferred.
Thus the whole space of your sensible world with all
its percepts counts as one tiny region from the point of view
of physics.
There is no direct spatial relation between what one person
sees and what another sees, because no two ever see exactly
the same object. Each person carries about a private space of
his own, which can be located in physical space by indirect
methods, but which contains no place in common with another
person’s private space. This shows how entirely physical space
is a matter of inference and construction.
To make the matter definite, let us suppose that a physiologist
is observing a living brain—no longer an impossible supposition,
as it would have been formerly. It is natural to
suppose that what the physiologist sees is in the brain he is
observing. But if we are speaking of physical space, what the
physiologist sees is in his own brain. It is in no sense in the
brain that he is observing, though it is in the percept of that
brain, which occupies part of the physiologist’s perceptual
space. Causal continuity makes the matter perfectly evident:
light-waves travel from the brain that is being observed to the
eye of the physiologist, at which they only arrive after an interval
of time, which is finite though short. The physiologist sees
what he is observing only after the light-waves have reached
his eye; therefore the event which constitutes his seeing comes
at the end of a series of events which travel from the observed
brain into the brain of the physiologist. We cannot, without
a preposterous kind of discontinuity, suppose that the physiologist’s
percept, which comes at the end of this series, is anywhere
else but in the physiologist’s head.
This question is very important, and must be understood
if metaphysics is ever to be got straight. The traditional
dualism of mind and matter, which I regard as mistaken, is intimately
connected with confusions on this point. So long as we
adhere to the conventional notions of mind and matter, we
are condemned to a view of perception which is miraculous.
We suppose that a physical process starts from a visible object,
travels to the eye, there changes into another physical
process, causes yet another physical process in the optic nerve,
finally produces some effect in the brain, simultaneously with
which we see the object from which the process started, the
seeing being something “mental”, totally different in character
from the physical processes which precede and accompany it.
This view is so queer that metaphysicians have invented all
sorts of theories designed to substitute something less incredible.
But nobody noticed an elementary confusion.
To return to the physiologist observing another man’s brain:
what the physiologist sees is by no means identical with what
happens in the brain he is observing, but is a somewhat remote
effect. From what he sees, therefore, he cannot judge whether
what is happening in the brain he is observing is, or is not,
the sort of event that he would call “mental”. When he says
that certain physical events in the brain are accompanied by
mental events, he is thinking of physical events as if they were
what he sees. He does not see a mental event in the brain he
is observing, and therefore supposes there is in that brain a
physical process which he can observe and a mental process
which he cannot. This is a complete mistake. In the strict
sense, he cannot observe anything in the other brain, but only
the percepts which he himself has when he is suitably related
to that brain (eye to microscope, etc.). We first identify physical
processes with our percepts, and then, since our percepts are
not other people’s thoughts, we argue that the physical processes
in their brains are something quite different from their
thoughts. In fact, everything that we can directly observe of
the physical world happens inside our heads, and consists of
“mental” events in at least one sense of the word “mental”.
It also consists of events which form part of the physical world.
The development of this point of view will lead us to the conclusion
that the distinction between mind and matter is illusory.
The stuff of the world may be called physical or mental or both
or neither, as we please; in fact, the words serve no purpose.
There is only one definition of the words that is unobjectionable:
“physical” is what is dealt with by physics, and “mental”
is what is dealt with by psychology. When, accordingly, I
speak of “physical” space, I mean the space that occurs in
physics.
It is extraordinarily difficult to divest ourselves of the belief
that the physical world is the world we perceive by sight and
touch; even if, in our philosophic moments, we are aware that
this is an error, we nevertheless fall into it again as soon as
we are off our guard. The notion that what we see is “out
there” in physical space is one which cannot survive while we
are grasping the difference between what physics supposes to
be really happening, and what our senses show us as happening;
but it is sure to return and plague us when we begin to
forget the argument. Only long reflection can make a radically
new point of view familiar and easy.
Our illustrations hitherto have been taken from the sense
of sight; let us now take one from the sense of touch. Suppose
that, with your eyes shut, you let your finger-tip press
against a hard table. What is really happening? The physicist
says that your finger-tip and the table consist, roughly speaking,
of vast numbers of electrons and protons; more correctly,
each electron and proton is to be thought of as a collection of
processes of radiation, but we can ignore this for our present
purposes. Although you think you are touching the table, no
electron or proton in your finger ever really touches an electron
or proton in the table, because this would develop an
infinite force. When you press, repulsions are set up between
parts of your finger and parts of the table. If you try to press
upon a liquid or a gas, there is room in it for the parts that
are repelled to get away. But if you press a hard solid, the
electrons and protons that try to get away, because electrical
forces from your finger repel them, are unable to do so, because
they are crowded close to others which elbow them back
to more or less their original position, like people in a dense
crowd. Therefore the more you press the more they repel
your finger. The repulsion consists of electrical forces, which
set up in the nerves a current whose nature is not very definitely
known. This current runs into the brain, and there has
effects which, so far as the physiologist is concerned, are almost
wholly conjectural. But there is one effect which is not conjectural,
and that is the sensation of touch. This effect, owing
to physiological inference or perhaps to a reflex, is associated
by us with the finger-tip. But the sensation is the same if, by
artificial means, the parts of the nerve nearer the brain are
suitably stimulated—e.g. if your hand has been amputated
and the right nerves are skilfully manipulated. Thus our
confidence that touch affords evidence of the existence of bodies
at the place which we think is being touched is quite misplaced.
As a rule we are right, but we can be wrong; there is nothing
of the nature of an infallible revelation about the matter. And
even in the most favorable case, the perception of touch is
something very different from the mad dance of electrons and
protons trying to jazz out of each other’s way, which is what
physics maintains is really taking place at your finger-tip. Or,
at least, it seems very different. But as we shall see, the knowledge
we derive from physics is so abstract that we are not
warranted in saying that what goes on in the physical world
is, or is not, intrinsically very different from the events that we
know through our own experiences.
CHAPTER XIV PERCEPTION AND PHYSICAL CAUSAL LAWS
In an earlier chapter we saw the inadequacy of the traditional
notion of cause, without adequately explaining the causal laws
which are a substitute in the practice of science. The time has
now come when it is possible to remedy this defect, and, in so
doing, to fit perception into its place in the chain of physical
causation and recapitulate the main points of previous arguments.
The old view was that an event A will always be followed
by a certain event B, and that the problem of discovering causal
laws is the problem, given an event B, of finding that event A
which is its invariable antecedent or vice versa. At an early
stage of a science this point of view is useful; it gives laws
which are true usually, though probably not always, and it
affords the basis for more exact laws. But it has no philosophical
validity, and is superseded in science as soon as we
arrive at genuine laws. Genuine laws, in advanced sciences,
are practically always quantitative laws of tendency. I will
try to illustrate by taking the simplest possible case in physics.
Imagine a hydrogen atom, in which the electron is revolving
not in the minimum orbit, but in the next, which has four
times the minimum radius. So long as this state continues, the
atom has no external effects, apart from its infinitesimal gravitational
action; we cannot, therefore, obtain any evidence of
its existence except when it changes its state. In fact, our
knowledge of atoms is like that which a ticket collector has
of the population of his town: he knows nothing of those who
stay quietly at home. Now at some moment, according to
laws of which we have only statistical knowledge, the electron
in our atom jumps to a smaller orbit, and the energy lost to
the atom travels outward in a light-wave. We know no causal
law as to when the electron will jump, though we know how
far it will jump and exactly what will happen in the neighbourhood
when it does. At least, when I say we know exactly
what will happen, I ought to say that we know exactly the
mathematical laws of what will happen. A series of events,
having quantitative characteristics which obey certain equations,
will travel outward in all directions from the electron,
and will proceed quite regularly, like ripples on a pool, until
other matter is encountered. We have here one important and
apparently fundamental kind of causal law, the kind regulating
the propagation of light in vacuo. This is summed up in
Maxwell’s equations, which enable us to calculate the diffusion
of an electro-magnetic disturbance starting from a source. So
long as two such disturbances do not meet, the matter is exceedingly
simple; but the equations also tell us what happens
when they do meet. We then have, as always in traditional
physics, two separate tendencies, which have a resultant compounded
according to mathematical laws, of which the parallelogram
law is the oldest and simplest. That is to say, each
previous circumstance in the space-time neighbourhood contributes
a tendency, and the resulting event is obtained by compounding
these tendencies according to a mathematical law.
So far, we have been considering only electro-magnetic phenomena
in empty space. We have another set of facts about
empty space, namely those upon which gravitation depends.
These have to do with the structure of space-time, and show
that this structure has singularities in the regions where there
is matter, which spread with diminishing intensity as we get
away from these regions. You may conceive the structure of
space-time on the analogy of a pond with a fountain playing
in it, so that wherever a spray falls from the fountain there is
a little hill of water which flattens quickly as you get away from
the spot where the spray falls. Here again the same sort of
thing applies: to infer the structure in a small region of space-time
from that in the neighbourhood, it will be necessary to
superpose a number of tendencies according to mathematical
rules. Thus philosophically this introduces no novelty.
But now consider what happens when the wave of light which
started from our hydrogen atom comes in contact with matter.
Various things may happen. The matter may absorb all or
some of the energy of the light-ray; this is the interesting case
from our point of view. The absorption may take the form
of causing the electrons to move in larger orbits, in which case,
later, when they return to their previous orbits, we get the
phenomenon of fluorescence. Or the body may become heated;
or it may visibly move, like a radiometer. The effects upon
bodies depend upon the bodies as well as the light. Some of
them can be individually predicted, others can only be calculated
in statistical averages; this depends upon whether quantum
considerations come in or not. Where they do, we can
enumerate possibilities, and state the relative frequencies with
which they will be realised, but we cannot tell which will be
realised in any given case.
So far, we have considered the radiation of energy from
matter into empty space, its propagation in empty space and
its impact on matter from empty space. We have not considered
the history of a given piece of matter, or the distinction
between matter and empty space.
The essence of matter appears to be this: We can distinguish
series of events in space-time which have a certain kind
of close resemblance to each other, such that common sense
regards them as manifestations of one “thing”. But when
we look closely at the question, it turns out that what physics
offers is something more abstract than this. Take, e. g. the
continued existence of a certain electron. This means to say
that events in a certain neighbourhood will be such as can be
calculated on the assumption that there is an electric charge
of a certain standard magnitude in the middle of that neighbourhood;
and that the neighbourhoods of which this is true
form a tube in space-time.
So long as we stick to the standpoint of pure physics there
is a certain air of taking in each other’s washing about the
whole business. Events in empty space are only known as regards
their abstract mathematical characteristics; matter is
only an abstract mathematical characteristic of events in empty
space. This seems rather a cold world. But as a matter of
fact we know some things that are a little more concrete. We
know, e.g. what it feels like when we see things. From the
point of view of physics, when our light-wave starts out through
empty space, if it presently reaches our eye we know one link
in the causal chain, namely the visual sensation, otherwise than
as a term in an abstract mathematical formula. And it is this
one term which forms the basis for our belief in all the rest.
Seeing is believing.
At this point I propose to make a brief digression on the
subject of our evidence for causal laws. The laws for which
we first get evidence are such as do not hold always, but only
as a general rule. As a rule, when you decide to move your
arm, it moves: but sometimes it is paralysed and remains motionless.
As a rule, when you say how-do-you-do to an old
friend, he says the same to you; but he may have grown blind
and deaf since you last saw him, and not notice your words or
gesture. As a rule, if you put a match to gunpowder, it explodes;
but it may have got damp. It is such common but not
invariable rules of sequence that we notice first. But science
is always seeking to replace them by laws that may have no
exceptions. We notice first that heavy bodies fall, then that
some bodies do not fall. Then we generalise both sets of facts
into the law of gravitation and the laws of resistance of the
air. These more general laws do not state that anything will
actually happen: they state a tendency, and lead to the conclusion
that what actually happens is the resultant of a number
of tendencies. We cannot know what the resultant will be
unless we know a great deal about the neighbourhood concerned.
For example, I might, within the next few seconds
be hit on the head by a meteorite; to know whether this is
going to happen, I must know what matter is to be found in the
neighbourhood of the earth. This illustrates that actual predictions
based upon laws which are perfectly valid may always
be falsified by some unknown fact of what we may call geography.
Moreover, we can never be sure that our scientific
laws are quite right; of this the Einsteinian modification of the
law of gravitation has afforded a notable instance.
Let us now return to the relation between perception and
the causal laws of physics.
Having realised the abstractness of what physics has to say,
we no longer have any difficulty in fitting the visual sensation
into the causal series. It used to be thought “mysterious” that
purely physical phenomena should end in something mental.
That was because people thought they knew a lot about physical
phenomena, and were sure they differed in quality from mental
phenomena. We now realise that we know nothing of the
intrinsic quality of physical phenomena except when they happen
to be sensations, and that therefore there is no reason to
be surprised that some are sensations, or to suppose that the
others are totally unlike sensations. The gap between mind
and matter has been filled in, partly by new views of mind, but
much more by the realisation that physics tells us nothing as to
the intrinsic character of matter.
I conceive what happens when we see an object more or less
on the following lines. For the sake of simplicity, let us take
a small self-luminous object. In this object, a certain number
of atoms are losing energy and radiating it according to the
quantum principle. The resulting light-waves become superposed
according to the usual mathematical principles; each
part of each light-wave consists of events in a certain region
of space-time. On coming in contact with the human body, the
energy in the light-wave takes new forms, but there is still
causal continuity. At last it reaches the brain, and there one
of its constituent events is what we call a visual sensation.
This visual sensation is popularly called seeing the object from
which the light-waves started—or from which they were reflected
if the object was not self-luminous.
Thus what is called a perception is only connected with its
object through the laws of physics. Its relation to the object
is causal and mathematical; we cannot say whether or not it
resembles the object in any intrinsic respect, except that both
it and the object are brief events in space-time.
I think we may lay down the following universal characteristics
of causal laws in an advanced science. Given any
event, there are other events at neighbouring places in space-time
which will occur slightly later if no other factors intervene;
but in practice other factors almost always do intervene,
and, in that case, the event which actually occurs at any point
of space-time is a mathematical resultant of those which would
have followed the various neighbouring events if they had been
alone concerned. The equations of physics give the rules according
to which events are connected, but all are of the above
sort.
Formerly it was thought that the equations of physics sufficed,
theoretically, to determine the course of affairs in the
physical world, given all the facts about some finite stretch of
time, however short. Now it appears that this is not the case,
so far as the known equations are concerned. The known
equations suffice to determine what happens in empty space,
and statistical averages as to what happens to matter; but
they do not tell us when an individual atom will absorb or
radiate energy. Whether there are laws, other than those of
statistics, governing the behaviour of an individual atom in this
respect, we do not know.
It should be observed that there are causal laws of a different
sort from those of pure physics; such are the laws that
light-waves “cause” visual sensations and sound-waves “cause”
auditory sensations. All the empirical evidence for physics
rests upon such laws, therefore nothing in physics can have a
higher degree of certainty than such laws have. Let us stop
a moment to ask what we mean by “cause” in this connection.
The connection of light-waves and visual sensations looks
a little different according as we start with physics or with
psychology, though, of course, ultimately the result must be
the same. Let us first start with physics. I say, then, that
when a light-wave travels outwards from a body there are
successive events at successive places, and that the corresponding
event in a brain behind a normal eye is a visual sensation.
This is the only event in the whole series about which I can say
anything not purely abstract and mathematical.
Now let us start from the sensation. I say, then, that this
sensation is one of a vast series of connected events, travelling
out from a centre according to certain mathematical laws, in
virtue of which the sensation enables me to know a good deal
about events elsewhere. That is why the sensation is a source
of physical knowledge.
It will be seen that, according to the view I have been advocating,
there is no difficulty about interaction between mind and
body. A sensation is merely one link in a chain of physical
causation; when we regard the sensation as the end of such a
chain, we have what would be regarded as an effect of matter
on mind; when as the beginning, an effect of mind on matter.
But mind is merely a cross-section in a stream of physical
causation, and there is nothing odd about its being both an
effect and a cause in the physical world. Thus physical causal
laws are those that are fundamental.
There seems no reason to regard causation as a priori,
though this question is not simple. Given certain very general
assumptions as to the structure of space-time, there are bound
to be what we have called causal laws. These general assumptions
must really replace causality as our basic principles. But,
general as they are, they cannot be taken as a priori; they are
the generalisation and abstract epitome of the fact that there
are causal laws, and this must remain merely an empirical fact,
which is rendered probable, though not certain, by inductive
arguments.
CHAPTER XV THE NATURE OF OUR KNOWLEDGE OF PHYSICS
In this chapter, we shall seek an answer to two questions:
First, how do we know about the world dealt with in physics?
Secondly, what do we know about it, assuming the truth of
modern physics?
First: How do we know about the physical world? We
have already seen that this question cannot have a simple
answer, since the basis of inference is something that happens
in our own heads, and our knowledge of anything outside our
own heads must be more or less precarious. For the present,
I shall take it for granted that we may accept testimony, with
due precautions. In other words, I shall assume that what
we hear when, as we believe, others are speaking to us, does in
fact have “meaning” to the speaker, and not only to us; with
a corresponding assumption as regards writing. This assumption
will be examined at a later stage. For the present, I will
merely emphasise that it is an assumption, and that it may
possibly be false, since people seem to speak to us in dreams,
and yet, on waking, we become persuaded that we invented the
dream. It is impossible to prove, by a demonstrative argument,
that we are not always dreaming; the best we can hope
is a proof that this is improbable. But for the present let us
leave this discussion on one side, and assume that the words we
hear and read “mean” what they would if we spoke or wrote
them.
On this basis, we have reason to know that the worlds of
different people are alike in certain respects and different in
certain others. Take, for example, the audience at a theatre:
they all, we say, hear the same words and see the same gestures,
which, moreover, are those that the actors wish them to hear
and see. But those who are near the stage hear the words
more loudly than those further off; they also hear them somewhat
earlier. And those who sit on the right do not see quite
what is seen by those who sit on the left or in the centre. These
differences are of two sorts: on the one hand, some people can
see something invisible to others; on the other hand, when two
people, as we say, see the “same” thing, they see it differently
owing to effects of perspective and of the way the light is reflected.
All this is a question of physics, not of psychology;
for if we place a camera in an empty seat in the theatre, the
perspective in the resultant photograph is intermediate between
the perspectives that are seen by persons sitting on either
side; indeed the whole matter of perspective is determined by
quite simple geometrical laws. These laws show also what is
common to the shapes that two people see when they see the
“same” thing from different points of view: what is common
is what is studied by projective geometry, which is concerned
with what is independent of measurement in geometrical figures.
All the differences in appearance due to perspective have to be
learned in learning to draw: for this purpose, it is necessary
to learn to see things as they really seem, and not as they seem
to seem.
But, it will be said, what can you mean by how things “really”
seem and how they “seem” to seem? We come here upon an
important fact about learning. When, in early infancy, we are
learning to correlate sight and touch, we acquire the habit of
reacting to a visual stimulus in a manner which is more “objective”
than that in which a camera reacts. When we see a
coin not directly in front of us, we judge it to be circular, although
the camera would show it as oval, and a man would
have to make it oval in a picture of a scene which contained it.
We learn, therefore, to react to a visual shape in a manner
corresponding to how it would appear if it were in the centre
of the field of vision, provided we do not immediately focus
upon it, which is what we naturally do when anything visible
interests us. As a matter of fact, we are constantly looking in
different directions, and, as a rule, only noticing what, at the
moment, is in the centre of our field of vision. Thus our visual
world consists rather of a synthesis of things viewed directly
in succession than of things seen simultaneously while the centre
of the field is kept fixed. This is one reason why the rules of
perspective have to be learned, although a picture which ignores
them makes an impression of being “wrong”.
Another reason for the objectivity of the impressions we
derive from sight is correlation with other senses, especially
touch. Through this correlation we soon get to “know” that
a man twenty yards away is “really” just as big as a man one
yard away. When children are learning to draw, they find it
very difficult to make distant objects sufficiently small, because
they know they are not “really” small. We soon learn to judge
the distance of a visual object, and to react to it according to
the size that it would have if touched—or travelled over—in
the case of very large objects such as mountains. Our sense of
size is not derived from sight, but from such sources as touch
and locomotion; our metrical judgments, when the stimulus is
only visual, are a result of previous experience.
By the time a child can speak well, he has had a great deal
of this kind of experience. Consequently our verbal reactions
contain a great deal more objectivity than they would if they
came at an earlier stage of infancy. The result is that a
number of people can view a scene simultaneously, and use
exactly the same words about it. The words which we naturally
use in describing what we see are those describing features that
will also be evident to others in our neighbourhood. We say,
“there is a man”, not, “there is a coloured shape whose visual
dimensions are such-and-such an angle vertically, and such another
horizontally”. The inference is a physiological inference,
and only subsequent reflection makes us aware that it has taken
place. We can, however, become aware of it through occasional
mistakes; a dot on the window-pane may be mistaken
for a man in a distant field. In this case, we can discover our
error by opening the window, or by moving the head. In
general, however, physiological inferences of this sort are
correct, since they have resulted from correlations which are
very common, and are likely to be present on a given occasion.
Consequently our words tend to conceal what is private and
peculiar in our impressions, and to make us believe that different
people live in a common world to a greater extent than
is in fact the case.
We have been using the word “objectivity” in the preceding
pages, and it is time to consider exactly what we mean by it.
Suppose some scene—say in a theatre—is simultaneously seen
by a number of people and photographed by a number of
cameras. The impression made upon a person or a camera
is in some respects like that made upon other persons and
cameras, in other respects different. We shall call the elements
which are alike “objective” elements in the impression, and
those which are peculiar we shall call “subjective”. Thus those
features of shapes which are considered in projective geometry
will be objective, whereas those considered in metrical geometry
(where lengths and angles are measured) cannot be made
objective through sight alone, but demand the use of other
senses. In the photographs, a man on the stage will be longer
if the camera is near the stage than if it is far off, assuming
all the cameras to be alike. But if four actors are standing in
a row in one photograph, they will be standing in a row in
another; this is an “objective” feature of the impression. And
the differences in the visual impressions of a number of spectators
with normal eyesight are exactly analogous to the differences
in the photographs; so also are the likenesses. Thus
the “subjectivity” that we are speaking about at present is
something belonging to the physical world, not to psychology.
It marks the fact that the stimulus, whether to an eye or to a
camera, is not exactly the same wherever the eye or the camera
may be placed; there are features of the stimulus which are
constant (within limits), but there are others which are different
from any two different points of view.
The tendency of our perceptions is to emphasise increasingly
the objective elements in an impression, unless we have some
special reason, as artists have, for doing the opposite. This
tendency begins before speech, is much accentuated after
speech has been acquired, and is prolonged by scientific physics.
The theory of relativity is only the last term, so far, in the
elimination of subjective elements from impressions. But it
must not be supposed that the subjective elements are any less
“real” than the objective elements; they are only less important.
They are less important because they do not point to
anything beyond themselves as the others do. We want our
senses to give us information, i.e. to tell us about something
more than our own momentary impression. We acquire information
through our senses if we attend to the objective
elements in the impression and ignore the others; but the subjective
elements are just as truly part of the actual impression.
This is obvious as soon as we realise that the camera is as subjective
as we are.
Such considerations lead irresistibly to the scientific view
that, when an object can be seen or photographed from a number
of points of view, there is a connected set of events (light-waves)
travelling outward from a centre; that, moreover,
there are some respects in which all these events are alike, and
others in which they differ one from another. We must not
think of a light-wave as a “thing”, but as a connected group of
rhythmical events. The mathematical characteristics of such
a group can be inferred by physics, within limits; but the intrinsic
character of the component events cannot be inferred.
The events constituting light-waves are only known through
their effects upon our eyes, optic nerves, and brains, and these
effects are not themselves light-waves, as is obvious from the
fact that nerves and brains are not transparent. Light in the
physical world, therefore, must consist of events which are in
some way different from the events which happen when we
see; but we cannot say more than this as to the intrinsic quality
of these external events. Moreover, when a number of people,
as we say, “see the same thing”, what we have reason to believe
is that light-waves emanating from a certain region have
reached the eyes of all these people. As to what is in the region
from which the light-waves come, we cannot tell.
But—so the plain man is tempted to argue—we can tell
quite well, because we can touch objects that we see, and discover
that there is something hard and solid in the place from
which the light-waves come. Or, again, we may find that there
is something there which, though not solid, is very hot, and
burns us when we try to touch it. We all feel that touch gives
more evidence of “reality” than sight; ghosts and rainbows
can be seen but not touched. One reason for this greater sense
of reality is that our spatial relation to an object when we touch
it with our finger-tips is given, and therefore an object does not
give such different impressions of touch to different people as
it does of sight. Another reason is that there are a number of
objects that can be seen but not touched—reflections, smoke,
mist, etc.—and that these objects are calculated to surprise the
inexperienced. None of these facts, however, justify the plain
man in supposing that touch makes him know real things as
they are, though we are verbally forced to admit that it brings
him into “contact” with them.
We have seen on an earlier occasion how complex is the
physical and physiological process leading from the object to
the brain when we touch something; and we have seen that
illusions of touch can be produced artificially. What we experience
when we have a sensation of touch is, therefore, no
more a revelation of the real nature of the object touched
than what we experience when we look at it. As a matter of
fact, if modern physics is to be believed, sight, prudently employed,
gives us a more delicate knowledge concerning objects
than touch can ever do. Touch, as compared with sight, is
gross and massive. We can photograph the path of an individual
electron. We perceive colours which indicate the
changes happening in atoms. We can see faint stars even
though the energy of the light that reaches us from them is
inconceivably minute. Sight may deceive the unwary more
than touch, but for accurate scientific knowledge it is incomparably
superior to any of the other senses.
It is chiefly through ideas derived from sight that physicists
have been led to the modern conception of the atom as a
centre from which radiations travel. We do not know what
happens in the centre. The idea that there is a little hard
lump there, which is the electron or proton, is an illegitimate
intrusion of common-sense notions derived from touch. For
aught we know, the atom may consist entirely of the radiations
which come out of it. It is useless to argue that radiations
cannot come out of nothing. We know that they come, and
they do not become any more really intelligible by being supposed
to come out of a little lump.
Modern physics, therefore, reduces matter to a set of events
which proceed outward from a centre. If there is something
further in the centre itself, we cannot know about it, and it
is irrelevant to physics. The events that take the place of
matter in the old sense are inferred from their effect on eyes,
photographic plates, and other instruments. What we know
about them is not their intrinsic character, but their
structure and their mathematical laws. Their structure is inferred
chiefly through the maxim “same cause, same effect”.
It follows from this maxim that if the effects are different, the
causes must be different; if, therefore, we see red and blue side
by side, we are justified in inferring that in the direction where
we see red something different is happening from what is happening
in the direction where we see blue. By extensions of
this line of argument we arrive at the mathematical laws of the
physical world. Physics is mathematical, not because we know
so much about the physical world, but because we know so
little: it is only its mathematical properties that we can discover.
For the rest, our knowledge is negative. In places
where there are no eyes or ears or brains there are no colours
or sounds, but there are events having certain characteristics
which lead them to cause colours and sounds in places where
there are eyes and ears and brains. We cannot find out what
the world looks like from a place where there is nobody, because
if we go to look there will be somebody there; the attempt
is as hopeless as trying to jump on one’s own shadow.
Matter as it appears to common sense, and as it has until
recently appeared in physics, must be given up. The old idea
of matter was connected with the idea of “substance”, and
this, in turn, with a view of time that the theory of relativity
shows to be untenable. The old view was that there is one
cosmic time, and that, given any two events in any two parts
of the universe, either they are simultaneous, or the first is
earlier than the second, or the second earlier than the first. It
was thought that the time-order of the two events must always
be objectively definite, although we might be unable to determine
it. We now find that this is not the case. Events which
can be regarded as all in one place, or all parts of the history
of one piece of matter, still have a definite time-order. So do
events in different places if a person situated where the second
takes place can see the first before the second happens, or,
more exactly, if light can travel from the place of the one to
the place of the other so as to reach the other place before the
second event. (Here we mean by a “place” the position of a
given piece of matter: however the matter may move relatively
to other matter, it is always in the same “place” from
its own point of view.) But if light travelling from the place
of the one event to the place of the other event arrives at the
place of the other event after the other event has taken place,
and conversely, then there is no definite objective time-order
of the two events, and there is no reason for regarding either
as earlier than the other; nor yet for regarding the two as
simultaneous; ideally careful observers will judge differently
according to the way in which they are moving. Thus time is
not cosmic, but is to some extent individual and personal for
each piece of matter.
What do we mean by a “piece of matter” in this statement?
We do not mean something that preserves a simple identity
throughout its history, nor do we mean something hard and
solid, nor even a hypothetical thing-in-itself known only
through its effects. We mean the “effects” themselves, only
that we no longer invoke an unknowable cause for them. We
find that energy in various forms spreads outwards from various
centres; we find also that such centres have a certain degree
of persistence, though this persistence is not absolute—the
modern physicist faces cheerfully the possibility that an
electron and a proton may mutually annihilate each other, and
even suggests that this may be the main source of the radiant
energy of the stars, because when it happens it makes an explosion.
What is asserted may be put as follows: When
energy radiates from a centre, we can describe the laws of its
radiation conveniently by imagining something in the centre,
which we will call an electron or a proton according to circumstances,
and for certain purposes it is convenient to regard
this centre as persisting, i.e. as not a single point in space-time
but a series of such points, separated from each other by time-like
intervals. All this, however, is only a convenient way of
describing what happens elsewhere, namely the radiation of
energy away from the centre. As to what goes on in the centre
itself, if anything, physics is silent.
What Dr. Whitehead calls the “pushiness” of matter disappears
altogether on this view. “Matter” is a convenient
formula for describing what happens where it isn’t. I am talking
physics, not metaphysics; when we come to metaphysics,
we may be able, tentatively, to add something to this statement,
but science alone can hardly add to it. Materialism as a
philosophy becomes hardly tenable in view of this evaporation
of matter. But those who would formerly have been materialists
can still adopt a philosophy which comes to much the
same thing in many respects. They can say that the type of
causation dealt with in physics is fundamental, and that all
events are subject to physical laws. I do not wish, as yet, to
consider how far such a view should be adopted; I am only
suggesting that it must replace materialism as a view to be
seriously examined.
PART III MAN FROM WITHIN
CHAPTER XVI SELF-OBSERVATION
It will be remembered that throughout Part I, we agreed to
consider only those facts about a man which can be discovered
by external observation, and we postponed the question whether
this excluded any genuine knowledge or not. The usual view
is that we know many things which could not be known without
self-observation, but the behaviourist holds that this view
is mistaken. I might be inclined to agree wholly with the behaviourist
but for the considerations which were forced upon
us in Part II, when we were examining our knowledge of the
physical world. We were then led to the conclusion that,
assuming physics to be correct, the data for our knowledge of
physics are infected with subjectivity, and it is impossible for
two men to observe the same phenomenon except in a rough
and approximate sense. This undermines the supposed objectivity
of the behaviourist method, at least in principle; as a
matter of degree, it may survive to some extent. Broadly
speaking, if physics is true and if we accept a behaviourist definition
of knowledge such as that of Chapter VIII, we ought,
as a rule, to know more about things that happen near the brain
than about things that happen far from it, and most of all about
things that happen in the brain. This seemed untrue because
people thought that what happens in the brain is what the
physiologist sees when he examines it; but this, according to
the theory of Chapter XII, happens in the brain of the physiologist.
Thus the a priori objection to the view that we know
best what happens in our brains is removed, and we are led
back to self-observation as the most reliable way of obtaining
knowledge. This is the thesis which is to be expanded and
sustained in the present chapter.
As every one knows, the certainty of self-observation was
the basis of Descartes’ system, with which modern philosophy
began. Descartes, being anxious to build his metaphysic only
upon what was absolutely certain, set to work, as a preliminary,
to doubt anything that he could make himself doubt. He succeeded
in doubting the whole external world, since there might
be a malicious demon who took pleasure in presenting deceitful
appearances to him. (For that matter, dreams would have
supplied a sufficient argument.) But he could not manage to
doubt his own existence. For, said he, I am really doubting;
whatever else may be doubtful, the fact that I doubt is indubitable.
And I could not doubt if I did not exist. He summed
up the argument in his famous formula: I think, therefore I
am. And having arrived at this certainty, he proceeded to
build up the world again by successive inferences. Oddly
enough, it was very like the world in which he had believed
before his excursion into scepticism.
It is instructive to contrast this argument with Dr. Watson’s.
Dr. Watson, like Descartes, is sceptical of many things which
others accept without question; and, like Descartes, he believes
that there are some things so certain that they can be safely
used as the basis of a startling philosophy. But the things
which Dr. Watson regards as certain are just those which
Descartes regarded as doubtful, and the thing which Dr.
Watson most vehemently rejects is just what Descartes regarded
as absolutely unquestionable. Dr. Watson maintains
that there is no such thing as thinking. No doubt he believes in
his own existence, but not because he thinks he can think. The
things that strike him as absolutely indubitable are rats in
mazes, time-measurements, physiological facts about glands
and muscles, and so on. What are we to think when two able
men hold such opposite views? The natural inference would
be that everything is doubtful. This may be true, but there are
degrees of doubtfulness, and we should like to know which
of these two philosophers, if either, is right as to the region
of minimum doubtfulness.
Let us begin by examining Descartes’ view. “I think, therefore
I am” is what he says, but this won’t do as it stands.
What, from his own point of view, he should profess to know
is not “I think”, but “there is thinking”. He finds doubt going
on, and says: There is doubt. Doubt is a form of thought,
therefore there is thought. To translate this into “I think”
is to assume a great deal that a previous exercise in scepticism
ought to have taught Descartes to call in question. He would
say that thoughts imply a thinker. But why should they? Why
should not a thinker be simply a certain series of thoughts,
connected with each other by causal laws? Descartes believed
in “substance”, both in the mental and in the material world.
He thought that there could not be motion unless something
moved, nor thinking unless some one thought. No doubt most
people would still hold this view; but in fact it springs from a
notion—usually unconscious—that the categories of grammar
are also the categories of reality. We have already seen that
“matter” is merely a name for certain strings of sets of events.
It follows that what we call motion of matter really means
that the centre of such a set of events at one time does not have
the same spatial relations to other events as the connected
centre at another time has to the connected other events. It
does not mean that there is a definite entity, a piece of matter,
which is now in one place and now in another. Similarly, when
we say, “I think first this and then that”, we ought not to mean
that there is a single entity “I” which “has” two successive
thoughts. We ought to mean only that there are two successive
thoughts which have causal relations of the kind that makes
us call them parts of one biography, in the same sort of way
in which successive notes may be parts of one tune; and that
these thoughts are connected with the body which is speaking
in the way (to be further investigated) in which thoughts and
bodies are connected. All this is rather complicated, and cannot
be admitted as part of any ultimate certainty. What
Descartes really felt sure about was a certain occurrence, which
he described in the words “I think”. But the words were not
quite an accurate representation of the occurrence; indeed,
words never can escape from certain grammatical and social
requirements which make them say at once more and less than
we really mean. I think we ought to admit that Descartes
was justified in feeling sure that there was a certain occurrence,
concerning which doubt was impossible; but he was not justified
in bringing in the word “I” in describing this occurrence, and
it remains to be considered whether he was justified in using
the word “think”.
In using a general word such as “think”, we are obviously
going beyond the datum, from a logical point of view. We
are subsuming a particular occurrence under a heading, and
the heading is derived from past experience. Now all words
are applicable to many occurrences; therefore all words go
beyond any possible datum. In this sense, it is impossible ever
to convey in words the particularity of a concrete experience;
all words are more or less abstract. Such, at least, is a plausible
line of argument, but I am by no means sure that it is valid.
For example, the sight of a particular dog may make the general
word “dog” come into your mind; you then know that it
is a dog, but you may not notice what sort of dog it is. In this
sense, the knowledge with which we start is abstract and general;
that is to say, it consists of a learned reaction to a stimulus
of a certain sort. The reactions, at any rate in so far as they
are verbal, are more uniform than the stimuli. A witness might
be asked “Did you see a dog?” “Yes.” “What sort of dog?”
“Oh, just an ordinary dog; I don’t remember more about it.”
That is to say, the witness’s reaction consisted of the generalised
word “dog” and no more. One is almost reminded of
quantum phenomena in the atom. When light falls on a hydrogen
atom, it may make the electron jump from the first orbit
to the second, or to the third, etc. Each of these is a generalised
reaction to a stimulus which has no corresponding generality.
So dogs and cats have each their individual peculiarities,
but the ordinary inobservant person responds with the
generalised reaction “dog” or “cat”, and the particularity of
the stimulus leads to no corresponding particularity in the
knowledge-reaction.
To return to Descartes and his thinking: it is possible, according
to what we have just said, that Descartes knew he was
thinking with more certainty than he knew what he was thinking
about. This possibility requires that we should ask what
he meant by “thinking”. And since, for him, thinking was the
primitive certainty, we must not introduce any external stimulus,
since he considered it possible to doubt whether anything
external existed.
Descartes used the word “thinking” somewhat more widely
than we should generally do nowadays. He included all perception,
emotion, and volition, not only what are called “intellectual”
processes. We may perhaps with advantage concentrate
upon perception. Descartes would say that, when he
“sees the moon”, he is more certain of his visual percept than
he is of the outside object. As we have seen, this attitude is
rational from the standpoint of physics and physiology, because
a given occurrence in the brain is capable of having a variety
of causes, and where the cause is unusual common sense will be
misled. It would be theoretically possible to stimulate the optic
nerve artificially in just the way in which light coming from
the moon stimulates it; in this case, we should have the same
experience as when we “see the moon”, but should be deceived
as to its external source. Descartes was influenced by an argument
of this sort, when he brought up the possibility of a
deceitful demon. Therefore what he felt certain about was
not what he had initially felt certain about, but what remained
certain after an argument as to the causes of perception. This
brings us to a distinction which is important, but difficult to
apply; the distinction between what we in fact do not doubt,
and what we should not doubt if we were completely rational.
We do not in fact question the existence of the sun and moon,
though perhaps we might teach ourselves to do so by a long
course of Cartesian doubt. Even then, according to Descartes,
we could not doubt that we have the experiences which we have
hitherto called “seeing the sun” and “seeing the moon”, although
we shall need different words if we are to describe these
experiences correctly.
The question arises: Why should we not doubt everything?
Why should we remain convinced that we have these experiences?
Might not a deceitful demon perpetually supply us
with false memories? When we say “a moment ago I had
the experience which I have hitherto called seeing the sun”,
perhaps we are deceived. In dreams we often remember things
that never happened. At best, therefore, we can be sure of our
present momentary experience, not of anything that happened
even half a minute ago. And before we can so fix our momentary
experience as to make it the basis of a philosophy, it will
be past, and therefore uncertain. When Descartes said “I
think”, he may have had certainty; but by the time he said
“therefore I am”, he was relying upon memory, and may have
been deceived. This line of argument leads to complete scepticism
about everything. If we are to avoid such a result, we
must have some new principle.
In actual fact, we start by feeling certainty about all sorts
of things, and we surrender this feeling only where some definite
argument has convinced us that it is liable to lead to error.
When we find any class of primitive certainties which never
leads to error, we retain our convictions in regard to this class.
That is to say, wherever we feel initial certainty, we require
an argument to make us doubt, not an argument to make us
believe. We may therefore take, as the basis of our beliefs,
any class of primitive certainties which cannot be shown to lead
us into error. This is really what Descartes does, although
he is not clear about it himself.
Moreover, when we have found an error in something of
which we were previously certain, we do not as a rule abandon
entirely the belief which misled us, but we seek, if we can, to
modify it so that it shall no longer be demonstrably false.
This is what has happened with perception. When we think
we see an external object, we may be deceived by a variety of
causes. There may be a mirage or a reflection; in this case,
the source of the error is in the external world, and a photographic
plate would be equally deceived. There may be a
stimulus to the eye of the sort that makes us “see stars”, or we
may see little black dots owing to a disordered liver, in which
case, the source of the error is in the body but not in the brain.
We may have dreams in which we seem to see all sorts of
things; in this case, the source of the error is in the brain.
Having gradually discovered these possibilities of error, people
have become somewhat wary as to the objective significance of
their perceptions; but they have remained convinced that they
really have the perceptions they thought they had, although
the common-sense interpretation of them is sometimes at fault.
Thus, while retaining the conviction that they are sure of
something, they have gradually changed their view as to what
it is that they are sure of. Nothing is known that tends to
show error in the view that we really have the percepts we
think we have, so long as we are prudent in interpreting them
as signs of something external. That is the valid basis for
Descartes’ view that “thought” is more certain than external
objects. When “thought” is taken to mean the experiences
which we usually regard as percepts of objects, there are sound
reasons for accepting Descartes’ opinion to this extent.
Let us now take up Dr. Watson’s view. We shall find, if I
am not mistaken, that his position also is to a very large extent
valid. That being so, we shall seek to find an intermediate
opinion, accepting what seems valid and rejecting what seems
doubtful in the contentions of both protagonists.
Dr. Watson’s view as to what is most certain is one which
is in entire accordance with common sense. All psychological
matters the plain man regards as more or less open to question,
but he has no doubts about his office, his morning train,
the tax-collector, the weather, and the other blessings of this
life. It may amuse him, in an idle hour, to listen to some one
playing with the idea that life is a dream, or suggesting that
the thoughts of the people in the train are more real than the
train. But unless he is a philosophical lecturer, he does not
countenance such notions in business hours. Who can imagine
a clerk in an office conceiving metaphysical doubts as to the
existence of his boss? Or would any railroad president regard
with favour the theory that his railroad is only an idea in the
minds of the shareholders? Such a view, he would say, though
it is often sound as regards gold-mines, is simply silly when it
comes to a railroad: anybody can see it, and can get himself
run over if he wanders on the tracks under the impression
that they do not exist. Belief in the unreality of matter is
likely to lead to an untimely death, and that, perhaps, is the
reason why this belief is so rare, since those who entertained it
died out. We cannot dismiss the common-sense outlook as
simply silly, since it succeeds in daily life; if we are going to
reject it in part, we must be sure that we do so in favor of something
equally tough as a means of coping with practical
problems.
Descartes says: I think, therefore I am. Watson says:
There are rats in mazes, therefore I don’t think. At least, a
parodist might thus sum up his philosophy. What Watson
really says is more like this: (1) The most certain facts are
those which are public, and can be confirmed by the testimony
of a number of observers. Such facts form the basis of the
physical sciences: physics, chemistry, biology, anatomy, physiology,
to mention only those that are relevant to the matter
in question. (2) The physical sciences are capable of affording
an explanation of all the publicly observable facts about
human behaviour. (3) There is no reason to suppose that
there are any facts about human beings that can be known only
in some other way. (4) In particular, “introspection”, as a
means of discovering by self-observation things that are in
principle undiscoverable by observation of others, is a pernicious
superstition, which must be swept away before any really
sound knowledge of man becomes possible. (5) And, as a
corollary, there is no reason to believe in the existence of
“thought” as opposed to speech and other bodily behaviour.
I have numbered the above propositions, as it is important
to keep them separate. On the whole, (1), (2), and (3) seem
to me to be true, but (4) and (5) seem to me to be false. Behaviourists,
I think, incline to the view that (4) and (5) follow
from (1), (2), and (3); but this view I attribute to what
I should regard as errors concerning the basis of physics. That
is why it was necessary to discuss physics before coming to a
decision on this question of self-observation. But let us examine
each of the above propositions in turn.
(1) It is true that the facts upon which the physical sciences
are based are all of them public, in the sense that many men
can observe them. If a phenomenon is photographed, any
number of people can inspect the photograph. If a measurement
is made, not only may several people be present, but
others can repeat the experiment. If the result does not confirm
the first observer, the supposed fact is rejected. The publicity
of physical facts is always regarded as one of the greatest
assets of physics. On a common-sense basis, therefore, the first
of the propositions in which we have summed up the behaviourist
philosophy must be admitted.
There are, however, some very important provisos which
must be mentioned. In the first place, a scientific observer is
not expected to note his integral reaction to a situation, but only
that part of it which experience leads him to regard as “objective”,
i.e. the same as the reaction of any other competent
observer. This process of learning to note only “objective”
features in our reaction is, as we have seen, begun in infancy;
training in science only carries it further. A “good” observer
does not mention what is peculiar to himself in his reaction.
He does not say: “A boring speck of light danced about,
causing me eye-fatigue and irritation; finally it settled at such-and-such
a point.” He says simply: “The reading was
such-and-such”. All this objectivity is a result of training and
experience. One may say, in fact, that very few men have the
“right” reaction to a scientific situation. Therefore an immense
amount of theory is mixed up with what passes in science as
pure observation. The nature and justification of this theory is
a matter requiring investigation.
In the second place, we must not misinterpret the nature of
the publicity in the case of physical phenomena. The publicity
consists in the fact that a number of people make closely similar
reactions at a given moment. Suppose, for example, that
twelve men are told to watch a screen for the appearance of
a bright light, and to say “now” when it appears. Suppose
the experimenter hears them all just when he himself sees the
light; then he has good reason to believe that they have each
had a stimulus similar to his. But physics compels us to hold
that they have had twelve separate stimuli, so that when we
say they have all seen the same light we can only legitimately
mean that their twelve stimuli had a common causal origin.
In attributing our perceptions to a normal causal origin outside
ourselves, we run a certain risk of error, since the origin may
be unusual: there may be reflection or refraction on the way to
the eye, there may be an unusual condition of the eye or optic
nerve or brain. All these considerations give a certain very
small probability that, on a given occasion, there is not such
an outside cause as we suppose. If, however, a number of
people concur with us, i.e. simultaneously have reactions which
they attribute to an outside cause that can be identified with the
one we had inferred, then the probability of error is enormously
diminished. This is exactly the usual case of concurrent testimony.
If twelve men, each of whom lies every other time that
he speaks, independently testify that some event has occurred,
the odds in favour of their all speaking the truth are 4095 to 1.
The same sort of argument shows that our public senses, when
confirmed by others, are probably speaking the truth, except
where there are sources of collective illusion such as mirage or
suggestion.
In this respect, however, there is no essential difference between
matters of external observation and matters of self-observation.
Suppose, for example, that, for the first time in
your life, you smell assafœtida. You say to yourself “that is
a most unpleasant smell”. Now unpleasantness is a matter of
self-observation. It may be correlated with physiological conditions
which can be observed in others, but it is certainly not
identical with these, since people knew that things were pleasant
and unpleasant before they knew about the physiological
conditions accompanying pleasure and its opposite. Therefore
when you say “that smell is unpleasant” you are noticing something
that does not come into the world of physics as ordinarily
understood. You are, however, a reader of psycho-analysis,
and you have learned that sometimes hate is concealed love
and love is concealed hate. You say to yourself, therefore:
“Perhaps I really like the smell of assafœtida, but am ashamed
of liking it”. You therefore make your friends smell it, with
the result that you soon have no friends. You then try children,
and finally chimpanzees. Friends and children give verbal
expression to their disgust: chimpanzees are expressive,
though not verbal. All these facts lead you to state: “The
smell of assafœtida is unpleasant”. Although self-observation
is involved, the result has the same kind of certainty, and
the same kind of objective verification, as if it were one of the
facts that form the empirical basis of physics.
(2) The second proposition, to the effect that the physical
sciences are capable of affording an explanation of all the
publicly observable facts about human behaviour, is one as to
which it is possible to argue endlessly. The plain fact is that
we do not yet know whether it is true or false. There is much
to be said in its favour on general scientific grounds, particularly
if it is put forward, not as a dogma, but as a methodological
precept, a recommendation to scientific investigators as
to the direction in which they are to seek for solution of their
problems. But so long as much of human behaviour remains
unexplained in terms of physical laws, we cannot assert dogmatically
that there is no residue which is theoretically inexplicable
by this method. We may say that the trend of science,
so far, seems to render such a view improbable, but to say even
so much is perhaps rash, though, for my part, I should regard
it as still more rash to say that there certainly is such a residue.
I propose, therefore, as a matter of argument, to admit the behaviourist
position on this point, since my objections to behaviourism
as an ultimate philosophy come from quite a different
kind of considerations.
(3) The proposition we are now to examine may be stated
as follows: “All facts that can be known about human beings
are known by the same method by which the facts of physics
are known.” This I hold to be true, but for a reason exactly
opposite to that which influences the behaviourist. I hold that
the facts of physics, like those of psychology, are obtained by
what is really self-observation, although common sense mistakenly
supposes that it is observation of external objects. As
we saw in Chapter XIII, your visual, auditory, and other percepts
are all in your head, from the standpoint of physics.
Therefore, when you “see the sun”, it is, strictly speaking, an
event in yourself that you are knowing: the inference to an
external cause is more or less precarious, and is on occasion
mistaken. To revert to the assafœtida: it is by a number of
self-observations that you know that the smell of assafœtida is
unpleasant, and it is by a number of self-observations that you
know that the sun is bright and warm. There is no essential
difference between the two cases. One may say that the data
of psychology are those private facts which are not very directly
linked with facts outside the body, while the data of physics
are those private facts which have a very direct causal connection
with facts outside the body. Thus physics and psychology
have the same method; but this is rather what is commonly
taken to be the special method of psychology than what
is regarded as the method of physics. We differ from the behaviourist
in assimilating physical to psychological method,
rather than the opposite.
(4) Is there a source of knowledge such as is believed in
by those who appeal to “introspection”? According to what
we have just been saying, all knowledge rests upon something
which might, in a sense, be called “introspection”. Nevertheless,
there may be some distinction to be discovered. I think
myself that the only distinction of importance is in the degree
of correlation with events outside the body of the observer.
Suppose, for example, that a behaviourist is watching a rat in
a maze, and that a friend is standing by. He says to the
friend “Do you see that rat?” If the friend says yes, the behaviourist
is engaged in his normal occupation of observing
physical occurrences. But if the friend says no, the behaviourist
exclaims, “I must give up this boot-legged whiskey”. In
that case, if his horror still permits him to think clearly, he
will be obliged to say that in watching the imaginary rat he
was engaged in introspection. There was certainly something
happening, and he could still obtain knowledge by observing
what was happening, provided he abstained from supposing
that it had a cause outside his body. But he cannot, without
outside testimony or some other extraneous information,
distinguish between the “real” rat and the “imaginary”
one. Thus in the case of the “real” rat also, his primary
datum ought to be considered introspective, in spite of the fact
that it does not seem so; for the datum in the case of the “imaginary”
rat also does not seem to be merely introspective.
The real point seems to be this: some events have effects
which radiate all round them, and can therefore produce reactions
in a number of observers; of these, ordinary speech is an
illustration. But other events produce effects which travel
linearly, not spherically; of these, speech into a telephone from
a sound-proof telephone box may serve as an illustration. This
can be heard by only one person beside the speaker; if instead
of a speaker we had an instrument at the mouthpiece, only one
person could hear the sound, namely the person at the other
end of the telephone. Events which happen inside a human
body are like the noise in the telephone: they have effects, in
the main, which travel along nerves to the brain, instead of
spreading out in all directions equally. Consequently, a man
can know a great deal about his own body which another man
can only know indirectly. Another man can see the hole in my
tooth, but he cannot feel my toothache. If he infers that I
feel toothache, he still does not have the very same knowledge
that I have; he may use the same words, but the stimulus to
his use of them is different from the stimulus to mine, and I can
be acutely aware of the pain which is the stimulus to my words.
In all these ways a man has knowledge concerning his own
body which is obtained differently from the way in which he
obtains knowledge of other bodies. This peculiar knowledge
is, in one sense, “introspective”, though not quite in the sense
that Dr. Watson denies.
(5) We come now to the real crux of the whole matter,
namely to the question: Do we think? This question is very
ambiguous, so long as “thinking” has not been clearly defined.
Perhaps we may state the matter thus: Do we know events in
us which would not be included in an absolutely complete knowledge
of physics? I mean by a complete knowledge of physics
a knowledge not only of physical laws, but also of what we
may call geography, i.e. the distribution of energy throughout
space-time. If the question is put in this way, I think it is quite
clear that we do know things not included in physics. A blind
man could know the whole of physics, but he could not know
what things look like to people who can see, nor what is the
difference between red and blue as seen. He could know all
about wave-lengths, but people knew the difference between red
and blue as seen before they knew anything about wave-lengths.
The person who knows physics and can see knows that a certain
wave-length will give him a sensation of red, but this knowledge
is not part of physics. Again, we know what we mean by
“pleasant” and “unpleasant”, and we do not know this any
better when we have discovered that pleasant things have one
kind of physiological effect and unpleasant things have another.
If we did not already know what things are pleasant and what
unpleasant, we could never have discovered this correlation.
But the knowledge that certain things are pleasant and certain
others unpleasant is no part of physics.
Finally, we come to imaginations, hallucinations, and dreams.
In all these cases, we may suppose that there is an external
stimulus, but the cerebral part of the causal chain is unusual,
so that there is not in the outside world something
connected with what we are imagining in the same way as in
normal perception. Yet in such cases we can quite clearly know
what is happening to us; we can, for example, often remember
our dreams. I think dreams must count as “thought”, in the
sense that they lie outside physics. They may be accompanied
by movements, but knowledge of them is not knowledge of these
movements. Indeed all knowledge as to movements of matter
is inferential, and the knowledge which a scientific man should
take as constituting his primary data is more like our knowledge
of dreams than like our knowledge of the movements of rats
or heavenly bodies. To this extent, I should say, Descartes is
in the right as against Watson. Watson’s position seems to
rest upon naive realism as regards the physical world, but
naive realism is destroyed by what physics itself has to say
concerning physical causation and the antecedents of our perceptions.
On these grounds, I hold that self-observation can
and does give us knowledge which is not part of physics, and
that there is no reason to deny the reality of “thought”.
CHAPTER XVII IMAGES
In this chapter we shall consider the question of images. As
the reader doubtless knows, one of the battle-cries of behaviourism
is “death to images”. We cannot discuss this question
without a good deal of previous clearing of the ground.
What are “images” as conceived by their supporters? Let
us take this question first in the sense of trying to know some of
the phenomena intended, and only afterwards in the sense of
seeking a formal definition.
In the ordinary sense, we have visual images if we shut our
eyes and call up pictures of scenery or faces we have known;
we have auditory images when we recall a tune without actually
humming it; we have tactual images when we look at a nice
piece of fur and think how pleasant it would be to stroke it.
We may ignore other kinds of images, and concentrate upon
these, visual, auditory, and tactual. There is no doubt that
we have such experiences as I have suggested by the above
words; the only question is as to how these experiences ought
to be described. Then we have another set of experiences,
namely dreams, which feel like sensations at the moment, but
do not have the same kind of relation to the external world
as sensations have. Dreams, also, indubitably occur, and
again it is a question of analysis whether we are to say that
they contain “images” or not.
The behaviourist does not admit images, but he equally does
not admit sensations and perceptions. Although he does not
say so quite definitely, he may be taken to maintain that there
is nothing but matter in motion. We cannot, therefore, tackle
the question of images by contrasting them with sensations
or perceptions, unless we have first clearly proved the existence
of these latter and defined their characteristics. Now it will
be remembered that in Chapter V we attempted a behaviourist
definition of perception, and decided that its most essential feature
was “sensitivity”. That is to say, if a person always has
a reaction of a certain kind B when he has a certain spatial
relation to an object of a certain kind A, but not otherwise,
then we say that the person is “sensitive” to A. In order to
obtain from this a definition of “perception”, it is necessary to
take account of the law of association; but for the moment we
will ignore this complication, and say that a person “perceives”
any feature of his environment, or of his own body, to which
he is sensitive. Now, however, as a result of the discussion in
Chapter XVI, we can include in his reaction, not only what
others can observe, but also what he alone can observe. This
enlarges the known sphere of perception, practically if not theoretically.
But it leaves unchanged the fact that the essence of
perception is a causal relation to a feature of the environment
which, except in astronomy, is approximately contemporaneous
with the perception, though always at least slightly earlier,
owing to the time taken by light and sound to travel and the
interval occupied in transmitting a current along the nerves.
Let us now contrast with this what happens when you sit
still with your eyes shut, calling up pictures of places you have
seen abroad, and perhaps ultimately falling asleep. Dr. Watson,
if I understand him aright, maintains that either there is
actual stimulation of the retina, or your pictures are mere word-pictures,
the words being represented by small actual movements
such as would, if magnified and prolonged, lead to actual
pronunciation of the words. Now if you are in the dark with
your eyes shut, there is no stimulation of the retina from without.
It may be that, by association, the eye can be affected
through stimuli to other senses; we have already had an
example in the fact that the pupil can be taught to contract at
a loud noise if this had been frequently experienced along with a
bright light. We cannot, therefore, dismiss the idea that a
stimulus to one sense may, as a result of past events, have an
effect upon the organs of another sense. “Images” might be
definable as effects produced in this way. It may be that, when
you see a picture of Napoleon, there is an effect upon your
aural nerves analogous to that of having the word “Napoleon”
pronounced in your presence, and that that is why, when you see
the picture, the word “Napoleon” comes into your head. And
similarly, when you shut your eyes and call up pictures of foreign
scenes, you may actually pronounce, completely or incipiently,
the word “Italy”, and this may, through association,
stimulate the optic nerve in a way more or less similar to that
in which some actual place in Italy stimulated it on some former
occasion. Thence association alone may carry you along
through a series of journeys, until at last, when you fall asleep,
you think you are actually making them at the moment. All
this is quite possible, but so far as I know there is no reason
to hold that it is more than possible, apart from an a priori
theory excluding every other explanation.
What I think is clearly untenable is the view, sometimes urged
by Dr. Watson, that when we are, as we think, seeing imaginary
pictures with the eyes shut, we are really only using such words
as would describe them. It seems to me as certain as anything
can be that, when I visualise, something is happening which is
connected with the sense of sight. For example, I can call
up quite clear mental pictures of the house in which I lived as
a child; if I am asked a question as to the furniture of any of
the rooms in that house, I can answer it by first calling up an
image and then looking to see what the answer is, just as I
should look to see in an actual room. It is quite clear to me
that the picture comes first and that words after; moreover,
the words need not come at all. I cannot tell what is happening
in my retina or optic nerve at these moments of visualisation,
but I am quite sure that something is happening which has
a connection with the sense of sight that it does not have with
other senses. And I can say the same of aural and tactual
images. If this belief were inconsistent with anything else that
seems to me equally certain, I might be induced to abandon it.
But so far as I can see, there is no such inconsistency.
It will be remembered that we decided in favour of perceptions
as events distinct from those which they perceive, and
only causally connected with them. There is, therefore, no
reason why association should not work in this region as well
as in the region of muscles and glands; in other words, there is
no reason to deny what used to be called “association of
ideas”, in spite of the fact that bodily changes can also be associated.
If a physical basis is wanted, it can be assumed to
exist in the brain. The state of the brain which causes us to
hear the word “Napoleon” may become associated with the
state of brain which causes us to see a picture of Napoleon,
and thus the word and the picture will call each other up.
The association may be in the sense-organs or nerves, but may
equally well be in the brain. So far as I know, there is no
conclusive evidence either way, nor even that the association is
not purely “mental.”
When we try to find a definition of the difference between
a sensation and an image, it is natural to look first for intrinsic
differences. But intrinsic differences between ordinary sensations
and ordinary images, for example as to “liveliness”, are
found to be subject to exceptions, and therefore unsuitable for
purposes of definition. Thus we are brought to differences as
to causes and effects.
It is obvious that, in an ordinary case, you perceive a table
because (in some sense) the table is there. That is to say,
there is a causal chain leading backwards from your perception
to something outside your body. This alone, however, is
hardly sufficient as a criterion. Suppose you smell peat smoke
and think of Ireland, your thought can equally be traced to
a cause outside your body. The only real difference is
that the outside cause (peat smoke) would not have had
the effect (images of Ireland) upon every normal person, but
only upon such as had smelt peat smoke in Ireland, and not
all of them. That is to say, the normal cerebral apparatus
does not cause the given stimulus to produce the given effect
except where certain previous experiences have occurred. This
is a very vital distinction. Part of what occurs in us under
the influence of a stimulus from without depends upon past
experience; part does not. The former part includes images,
the latter consists of pure sensations. This, however, as we
shall see later, is inadequate as a definition.
Mental occurrences which depend upon past experience are
called “mnemic” occurrences, following Semon. Images are
thus to be included among mnemic occurrences, at least so
far as human experience goes. This, however, does not suffice
to define them, since there are others, e.g. recollections.
What further defines them is their similarity to sensations.
This only applies strictly to simple images; complex ones
may occur without a prototype, though all their parts will
have prototypes among sensations. Such, at least, is Hume’s
principle, and on the whole it seems to be true. It must not,
however, be pressed beyond a point. As a rule, an image
is more or less vague, and has a number of similar sensations
as its prototypes. This does not prevent the connection with
sensation in general, but makes it a connection with a number
of sensations, not with one only.
It happens that, when a complex of sensations has occurred
at some time in a person’s experience, the recurrence of part
of the whole tends to produce images of the remaining parts
or some of them. This is association, and has much to do with
memory.
It is common to speak of images as “centrally excited”, as
opposed to sensations, which are excited by a stimulus to
some sense organ. In essence this is quite correct, but there
is need of some caution in interpreting the phrase. Sensations
also have proximate causes in the brain; images also may
be due to some excitement of a sense-organ, when they are
roused by a sensation through association. But in such cases
there is nothing to explain their occurrence except the past
experience and its effect on the brain. They will not be aroused
by the same stimulus in a person with similar sense-organs
but different past experience. The connection with past experience
is clearly known; it is, however, an explanatory hypothesis,
not directly verifiable in the present state of knowledge,
to suppose that this connection works through an effect
of the past experience on the brain. This hypothesis must be
regarded as doubtful, but it will save circumlocution to adopt
it. I shall therefore not repeat, on each occasion, that we
cannot feel sure it is true. In general, where the causal connection
with past experience is obvious, we call an occurrence
“mnemic”, without implying this or that hypothesis as to the
explanation of mnemic phenomena.
It is perhaps worth while to ask how we know that images
are like the sensations which are their prototypes. The difficulty
of this question arises as follows. Suppose you call up
an image of the Brooklyn Bridge, and you are convinced that it
is like what you see when you look at Brooklyn Bridge. It
would seem natural to say that you know the likeness because
you remember Brooklyn Bridge. But remembering is often
held to involve, as an essential element, the occurrence of an
image which is regarded as referring to a prototype. Unless
you can remember without images, it is difficult to see how
you can be sure that images resemble prototypes. I think
that in fact you cannot be sure, unless you can find some
indirect means of comparison. You might, for example, have
photographs of Brooklyn Bridge taken from a given place
on two different days, and find them indistinguishable, showing
that Brooklyn Bridge has not changed in the interval. You
might see Brooklyn Bridge on the first of these days, remember
it on the second, and immediately afterwards look
at it. In looking at it, you might find every detail coming to
you with a feeling of expectedness, or you might find some
details coming with a feeling of surprise. In this case you
would say that your image had been wrong as regards the
details which were surprising. Or, again, you might make a
picture of Brooklyn Bridge on paper, from memory, and then
compare it with the original or a photograph. Or you might
content yourself by writing down a description of it in words,
and verifying its accuracy by direct observation. Innumerable
methods of this kind can be devised by which you can test the
likeness of an image to its prototype. The result is that there
is often a great likeness, though seldom complete accuracy.
The belief in the likeness of an image to its prototype is, of
course, not generated in this way, but only tested. The belief
exists prior to evidence as to its correctness, like most of our
beliefs. I shall have more to say on this subject in the next
chapter, which will be concerned with memory. But I think
enough has been said to show that it is not unreasonable to
regard images as having a greater or less degree of
resemblance to their prototypes. To claim more is hardly
justifiable.
We can now reach a definite conclusion about perception,
sensation, and images. Let us imagine a number of people
placed, as far as possible, in the same environment; we will
suppose that they sit successively in a certain chair in a dark
room, in full view of illuminated pictures of two eminent
politicians of opposite parties whose names are written underneath
them. We will suppose that all of them have normal
eyesight. Their reactions will be partly similar, partly different.
If any of these observers are babies too young to
have learnt to focus, they will not see sharp outlines, but a
mere blurr, not from an optical defect, but from a lack of
cerebral control over muscles. In this respect, experience has
an effect even upon what must count as pure sensation. But
this difference is really analogous to the difference between
having one’s eyes open and having them shut; the difference
is in the sense-organ, although it may be due to a difference
in the brain. We will therefore assume that all the spectators
know how to adjust the eyes so as to see as well as possible,
and all try to see. We shall then say that, if the spectators
differ as widely as is possible for normal human beings, what
is common to the reactions of all of them is sensation, provided
it is connected with the sense of sight, or, more correctly,
provided it has that quality which we observe to be common
and peculiar to visual objects. But probably all of them, if
they are over three months old, will have tactile images while
they see the pictures. And if they are more than about a
year old, they will interpret them as pictures, which represent
three-dimensional objects; before that age, they may see them
as coloured patterns, not as representations of faces. Most
animals, though not all, are incapable of interpreting pictures
as representations. But in an adult human being this interpretation
is not deliberate; it has become automatic. It is,
I think, mainly a question of tactile images: the images you
have in looking at a picture are not those appropriate to a
smooth flat surface, but those appropriate to the object represented.
If the object represented is a large one, there will
also be images of movement—walking round the object, or
climbing up it, or what not. All these are obviously a product
of experience, and therefore do not count as part of the sensation.
This influence of experience is still more obvious when
it comes to reading the names of the politicians, considering
whether they are good likenesses, and feeling what a fine fellow
one of them looks and what unmitigated villainy is stamped
upon the features of the other. None of this counts as sensation,
yet it is part of a man’s spontaneous reaction to an outside
stimulus.
It is evidently difficult to avoid a certain artificiality in distinguishing
between the effects of experience and the rest in
a man’s reaction to a stimulus. Perhaps we could tackle the
matter in a slightly different way. We can distinguish stimuli
of different sorts: to the eye, the ear, the nose, the palate,
etc. We can also distinguish elements of different sorts in the
reaction: visual elements, auditory elements, etc. The latter
are defined, not by the stimulus, but by their intrinsic quality.
A visual sensation and a visual image have a common quality
which neither shares with an auditory sensation or an auditory
image. We may then say: a visual image is an occurrence
having the visual quality but not due to a stimulus to the eye, i.e.
not having as a direct causal antecedent the incidence of light-waves
upon the retina. Similarly an auditory image will be
an occurrence having the auditory quality but not due to sound-waves
reaching the ear, and so on for the other senses. This
means a complete abandonment of the attempt to distinguish
psychologically between sensations and images; the distinction
becomes solely one as to physical antecedents. It is true that
we can and do arrive at the distinction without scientific physics,
because we find that certain elements in our integral reactions
have the correlations that make us regard them as corresponding
to something external while others do not—correlations
both with the experience of others and with our own past and
future experiences. But when we refine upon this common-sense
distinction and try to make it precise, it becomes the
distinction in terms of physics as stated just now.
We might therefore conclude that an image is an occurrence
having the quality associated with stimulation by some sense-organ,
but not due to such stimulation. In human beings,
images seem to depend upon past experience, but perhaps in
more instinctive animals they are partly due to innate cerebral
mechanisms. In any case dependence upon experience is not
the mark by which they are to be defined. This shows how
intimate is the dependence of traditional psychology upon
physics, and how difficult it is to make psychology into an autonomous
science.
There is, however, still a further refinement necessary.
Whatever is included under our present definition is an image,
but some things not included are also images. The sight of
an object may bring with it a visual image of some other object
frequently associated with it. This latter is called an image,
not a sensation, because, though also visual, it is not appropriate
to the stimulus in a certain sense: it would not appear in a
photograph of the scene, or in a photograph of the retina.
Thus we are forced to say: the sensation element in the reaction
to a stimulus is that part which enables you to
draw inferences as to the nature of the extra-cerebral event
(if any) which was the stimulus;9 the rest is images. Fortunately,
images and sensations usually differ in intrinsic
quality; this makes it possible to get an approximate idea of
the external world by using the usual intrinsic differences, and
to correct it afterwards by means of the strict causal definition.
But evidently the matter is difficult and complicated, depending
upon physics and physiology, not upon pure psychology.
This is the main thing to be realised about images.
9I.e. the immediate stimulus, not the “physical object”.
The above discussion has suggested a definition of the word
“image”. We might have called an event an “image” when it
is recognisably of the same kind as a “percept”, but does not
have the stimulus which it would have if it were a percept.
But if this definition is to be made satisfactory, it will be necessary
to substitute a different word in place of “percept”. For
example, in the percept of a visible object it would be usual to
include certain associated tactual elements, but these must,
from our point of view, count as images. It will be better to
say, therefore, that an “image” is an occurrence recognisably
visual (or auditory, etc., as the case may be), but not caused
by a stimulus which is of the nature of light (or sound
etc., as the case may be), or at any rate only indirectly so caused
as a result of association. With this definition, I do not myself
feel any doubt as to the existence of images. It is clear that
they constitute most of the material of dreams and day-dreams,
that they are utilised by composers in making music, that we
employ them when we get out of a familiar room in the dark
(though here the rats in mazes make a different explanation
possible), and that they account for the shock of surprise we
have when we take salt thinking it is sugar or (as happened
to me recently) vinegar thinking it is coffee. The question
of the causation of images—i.e. whether it is in the brain or in
other parts of the body—is not one which it is necessary to our
purposes to decide, which is fortunate, since, so far as I know,
there is not at present any adequate evidence on the point.
But the existence of images and their resemblance to perception
is important, as we shall see in the next chapter.
Images come in various ways, and play various parts. There
are those that come as accretions to a case of sensation, which
are not recognised as images except by the psychologist; these
form, for example, the tactual quality of things we only see,
and the visual quality of things we only touch. I think dreams
belong, in part, to this class of images: some dreams result
from misinterpreting some ordinary stimulus, and in these cases
the images are those suggested by a sensation, but suggested
more uncritically than if we were awake. Then there are
images which are not attached to a present reality, but to one
which we locate in the past; these are present in memory, not
necessarily always, but sometimes. Then there are images not
attached to reality at all so far as our feeling about them
goes: images which merely float into our heads in reverie or in
passionate desire. And finally there are images which are
called up voluntarily, for example, in considering how to
decorate a room. This last kind has its importance, but I shall
say nothing more about it at present, since we cannot profitably
discuss it until we have decided what we are to mean by the
word “voluntary”. The first kind, which comes as an accretion
to sensation, and gives to our feeling of objects a certain
rotundity and full-bloodedness which the stimulus alone would
hardly warrant, has been considered already. Therefore what
remains for the present is the use of images in memory and
imagination; and of these two I shall begin with memory.
CHAPTER XVIII IMAGINATION AND MEMORY
In this chapter we have to consider the two topics of imagination
and memory. The latter has already been considered in
Chapter VI, but there we viewed it from outside. We want
now to ask ourselves whether there is anything further to be
known about it by taking account of what is only perceptible
to the person remembering.
As regards the part played by images, I do not think this
is essential. Sometimes there are memory-images, sometimes
not; sometimes when images come in connection with memory,
we may nevertheless know that the images are incorrect, showing
that we have also some other and more reliable source of
memory. Memory may depend upon images, as in the case
mentioned above, of the house where I lived as a child. But
it may also be purely verbal. I am a poor visualiser, except
for things I saw before I was ten years old; when now I meet
a man and wish to remember his appearance, I find that the
only way is to describe him in words while I am seeing
him, and then remember the words. I say to myself:
“This man has blue eyes and a brown beard and a small nose;
he is short, with a rounded back and sloping shoulders”. I
can remember these words for months, and recognise the man
by means of them, unless two men having these characteristics
are present at once. In this respect, a visualiser
would have the advantage of me. Nevertheless, if I had made
my verbal inventory sufficiently extensive and precise, it would
have been pretty sure to answer its purpose. I do not
think there is anything in memory that absolutely demands
images as opposed to words. Whether the words we
use in “thought” are themselves sometimes images of words,
or are always incipient movements (as Watson contends),
is a further question, as to which I offer no opinion, since
it ought to be capable of being decided experimentally.
The most important point about memory is one which has
nothing to do with images, and is not mentioned in Watson’s
brief discussion. I mean the reference to the past. This
reference to the past is not involved in mere habit memory,
e.g. in skating or in repeating a poem formerly learned. But
it is involved in recollection of a past incident. We do not,
in this case, merely repeat what we did before: then, we felt
the incident as present, but now we feel it as past. This is
shown in the use of the past tense. We say to ourselves at
the time “I am having a good dinner”, but next day we say “I
did have a good dinner”. Thus we do not, like a rat in a
maze, repeat our previous performance: we alter the verbal
formula. Why do we do so? What constitutes this reference
of a recollection to the past?10
10 On this subject, cf. Broad, The Mind and Its Place in Nature, p. 264 ff., in
his chapter on “Memory”.
Let us take up the question first from the point of view of
sensitivity. The stimulus to a recollection is, no doubt, always
something in the present, but our reaction (or part of it) is
more intimately related to a certain past event than to the
present stimulus. This, in itself, can be paralleled in inanimate
objects, for example, in a gramophone record. It is not the
likeness of our reaction to that called forth on a former occasion
that concerns us at the moment; it is its un-likeness, in
the fact that now we have the feeling of pastness, which we
did not have originally. You cannot sing into a dictaphone
“I love you”, and have it say five days hence “I loved you
last Wednesday”; yet that is what we do when we remember.
I think, however, that this feature of memory is probably
connected with a feature of reactions due to association
when the association is cerebral: I think also that this is
connected with the difference in quality that exists usually,
though not always, between images and sensations. It
would seem that, in such cases, the reaction aroused through
association is usually different from that which would have
been aroused directly, in certain definite ways. It is fainter,
and has, when attended to, the sort of quality that makes
us call it “imaginary”. In a certain class of cases, we come
to know that we can make it “real” if we choose; this
applies, e.g. to the tactual images produced by visible objects
that we can touch. In such cases, the image is attached
by us to the object, and its “imaginary” character fails to
be noticed. These are the cases in which the association
is not due to some accident of our experience, but to a collocation
which exists in nature. In other cases, however, we
are perfectly aware, if we reflect, that the association depends
upon some circumstance in our private lives. We
may, for instance, have had a very interesting conversation
at a certain spot, and always think of this conversation when
we find ourselves in this place. But we know that the conversation
does not actually take place again when we go back
to where it happened. In such a case, we notice the intrinsic
difference between the event as a sensible fact in the
present and the event as merely revived by association. I
think this difference has to do with our feeling of pastness.
The difference which we can directly observe is not, of course,
between our present recollection and the past conversation,
but between our present recollection and present sensible
facts. This difference, combined with the inconsistency of
our recollection with present facts if our recollection were
placed in the present, is perhaps a cause of our referring
memories to the past. But I offer this suggestion with
hesitation; and, as we shall find when we have examined
imagination, it cannot be the whole truth, though it may be
part of it.
There are some facts that tend to support the above view.
In dreams, when our critical faculty is in abeyance, we may
live past events over again under the impression that they
are actually happening; the reference of recollections to the
past must, therefore, be a matter involving a somewhat advanced
type of mental activity. Conversely, we sometimes have
the impression that what is happening now really happened
in the past; this is a well-known and much discussed illusion. It
happens especially when we are profoundly absorbed in
some inward struggle or emotion, so that outer events only
penetrate faintly. I suggest that, in these circumstances, the
quality of sensations approximates to that of images, and
that this is the source of the illusion.
If this suggestion is right, the feeling of pastness is really
complex. Something is suggested by association, but is
recognisably different from a present sensible occurrence. We
therefore do not suppose that this something is happening
now; and we may be confirmed in this by the fact that it is
inconsistent with something that is happening now. We
may then either refer the something to the past, in which case
we have a recollection, though not necessarily a correct one;
or we may regard the something as purely imaginary, in
which case we have what we regard as pure imagination.
It remains to inquire why we do sometimes the one and sometimes
the other, which brings us to the discussion of imagination.
I think we shall find that memory is more fundamental
than imagination, and that the latter consists merely of memories
of different dates assembled together. But to support
this theory will demand first an analysis of imagination and
then, in the light of this analysis, an attempt to give further
precision to our theory of memory.
Imagination is not, as the word might suggest, essentially
connected with images. No doubt images are often, even
usually, present when we imagine, but they need not be. A
man can improvise on the piano without first having images
of the music he is going to make; a poet might write down a
poem without first making it up in his head. In talking,
words suggest other words, and a man with sufficient verbal
associations may be successfully carried along by them for
a considerable time. The art of talking without thinking
is particularly necessary to public speakers, who must go on
when once they are on their feet, and gradually acquire the
habit of behaving in private as they do before an audience.
Yet the statements they make must be admitted to be often
imaginative. The essence of imagination, therefore, does not
lie in images.
The essence of imagination, I should say, is the absence
of belief together with a novel combination of known elements.
In memory, when it is correct, the combination of
elements is not novel; and whether correct or not, there is
belief. I say that in imagination there is “a novel combination
of known elements”, because, if nothing is novel, we
have a case of memory, while if the elements, or any of them,
are novel, we have a case of perception. This last I say because
I accept Hume’s principle that there is no “idea”
without an antecedent “impression”. I do not mean that
this is to be applied in a blind and pedantic manner, where
abstract ideas are concerned. I should not maintain that
no one can have an idea of liberty until he has seen the
Statue of Liberty. The principle applies rather to the
realm of images. I certainly do not think that, in an image,
there can be any element which does not resemble some element
in a previous perception, in the distinctive manner of
images.
Hume made himself an unnecessary difficulty in regard to
the theory that images “copy” impressions. He asked the
question: Suppose a man has seen all the different shades
of colour that go to make up the spectrum, except just
one shade. To put the thing in modern language, suppose
he has never seen light of a certain small range of wave-lengths,
but has seen light of all other wave-lengths. Will he be
able to form an image of the shade he has never seen? Hume
thinks he will, although this contradicts the principle. I should
say that images are always more or less vague copies of impressions,
so that an image might be regarded as a copy of
any one of a number of different impressions of slightly different
shades. In order to get a test case for Hume’s question,
we should have to suppose that there was a broad band
of the spectrum that the man had never seen—say the whole
of the yellow. He would then, one may suppose, be able
to form images which, owing to vagueness, might be applicable
to orange-yellow, and others applicable to green-yellow,
but none applicable to a yellow midway between orange
and green. This is an example of an unreal puzzle manufactured
by forgetting vagueness. It is analogous to the
following profound problem: A man formerly hairy is now
bald; he lost his hairs one by one; therefore there must
have been just one hair that made the difference, so that
while he had it he was not bald but when he lost it he was.
Of course “baldness” is a vague conception; and so is “copying”,
when we are speaking of the way in which images copy
prototypes.
What causes us, in imagination, to put elements together
in a new way? Let us think first of concrete instances.
You read that a ship has gone down on a route by which
you have lately travelled; very little imagination is needed
to generate the thought “I might have gone down”. What
happens here is obvious: the route is associated both with
yourself and with shipwreck, and you merely eliminate the
middle term. Literary ability is largely an extension of the
practice of which the above is a very humble example. Take,
say:
And all our yesterdays have lighted fools
The way to dusty death. Out, out, brief candle!
Life’s but a walking shadow, a poor player
Who struts and frets his hour upon the stage,
And then is heard no more. It is a tale
Told by an idiot, full of sound and fury
Signifying nothing.
I do not pretend to explain all the associations which led
Shakespeare to think of these lines, but some few are obvious.
“Dusty death” is suggested by Genesis iii. 19: “Dust thou
art, and unto dust shalt thou return”. Having spoken of
“lighting fools the way”, it is natural to think of a “candle”,
and thence of a “walking shadow” being lighted by the
candle along the way. From shadows to players was a well-established
association in Shakespeare’s mind; thus in Midsummer
Night’s Dream he says of players: “The best in
this kind are but shadows, and the worst are no worse, if
imagination amend them”. From a “poor player” to a “tale
told by an idiot” is no very difficult transition for a theatre-manager;
and “sound and fury” no doubt often formed part
of the tales to which he had to listen in spite of their “signifying
nothing”. If we knew more about Shakespeare, we
could explain more of him in this sort of way.
Thus exceptional imaginative gifts appear to depend mainly
upon associations that are unusual and have an emotional
value owing to the fact that there is a certain uniform emotional
tone about them. Many adjectives are suitable to
death: in a mood quite different from Macbeth’s, it may be
called “noble, puissant and mighty”. A Chancellor of the
Exchequer, thinking of the Death Duties, might feel inclined
to speak of “lucrative death”; nevertheless he would
not, like Vaughan, speak of “dear, beauteous death”. Shakespeare
also would not have spoken of death in such terms,
for his view of it was pagan; he speaks of “that churl death”.
So a man’s verbal associations may afford a key to his emotional
reactions, for often what connects two words in his
mind is the fact that they rouse similar emotions.
The absence of belief that accompanies imagination is a
somewhat sophisticated product; it fails in sleep and in
strong and emotional excitement. Children invent terrors for
fun, and then begin to believe in them. The state of entertaining
an idea without believing it is one involving some
tension, which demands a certain level of intellectual development.
It may be assumed that imagination, at first, always
involved belief, as it still does in dreams. I am not
concerned at the moment to define “belief”, but a criterion is
influence on action. If I say “suppose there were a tiger outside
your front door”, you will remain calm; but if I say,
with such a manner as to command belief, “there is a tiger
outside your front door”, you will stay at home, even if it
involves missing your train to the office. This illustrates
what I mean when I say that imagination, in its developed form,
involves absence of belief. But this is not true of its primitive
forms. And even a civilised adult, passing through a
churchyard on a dark night, may feel fear if his imagination
turns in the direction of ghosts.
When imagination passes into belief, it does not, as a rule,
become a belief about the past. Generally we place the imagined
object in the present, but not where it would be perceptible
to our senses. If we place it in the past, it is because the
past has some great emotional significance for us. If a person
we love has been in great danger, and we do not know
whether he has come through safely, imagination of his death
may lead us to believe that he has been killed. And often
imagination leads us to believe that something is going to happen.
What is common to all such cases is the emotional interest:
this first causes us to imagine an event, and then leads
us to think that it has happened, is happening, or will happen,
according to the circumstances. Hope and fear have this
effect equally; wish-fulfilment and dread-fulfilment are equally
sources of dreams and day-dreams. A great many beliefs
have a source of this kind. But, in spite of psycho-analysis,
there are a great many that have a more rational foundation.
I believe that Columbus first crossed the ocean in 1492, though
1491 or 1493 would have suited me just as well. I cannot
discover that there is any emotional element in this belief, or
in the belief that Semipalatinsk is in Central Asia. The
view that all our beliefs are irrational is perhaps somewhat
overdone nowadays, though it is far more nearly true than
the views that it has displaced.
We must now return to the subject of memory. Memory
proper does not, like imagination, involve a re-arrangement of
elements derived from past experience; on the contrary, it
should restore such elements in the pattern in which they
occurred. This is the vital difference between memory and
imagination; belief, even belief involving reference to the past,
may, as we have seen, be present in what is really imagination
though it may not seem to be so to the person concerned.
That being so, we still have to consider what constitutes the
reference to the past, since the view tentatively suggested
before we had considered imagination turns out to be inadequate.
There is one possible view, suggested, though not definitely
adopted, by Dr. Broad in his chapter on “Memory” already
referred to. According to this view, we have to start from
temporal succession as perceived within what is called the
“specious present”, i.e. a short period of time such that the
events that occur throughout it can be perceived together. (I
shall return to this subject presently.) For example, you can
see a quick movement as a whole; you are not merely aware
that the object was first in one place and then in another.
You can see the movement of the second-hand of a watch, but
not of the hour-hand or minute-hand. When you see a movement
in this sense, you are aware that one part of it is
earlier than another. Thus you acquire the idea “earlier”, and
you can mean by “past” “earlier than this”, where “this” is
what is actually happening. This is a logically possible theory,
but it seems nevertheless somewhat difficult to believe. I do
not know, however, of any easier theory, and I shall therefore
adopt it provisionally while waiting for something
better.
For the understanding of memory, it is a help to consider
the links connecting its most developed forms with other occurrences
of a less complex kind. True recollection comes at the
end of a series of stages. I shall distinguish five stages on
the way, so that recollection becomes the sixth in gradual progress.
The stages are as follows:
1. Images.—As we have seen, images, at any rate in their
simpler parts, in fact copy past sensations more or less vaguely,
even when they are not known to do so. Images are “mnemic”
phenomena, in the sense that they are called up by stimuli
formerly associated with their prototypes, so that their occurrence
is a result of past experience according to the law of
association. But obviously an image which in fact copies a
past occurrence does not constitute a recollection unless it is felt
to be a copy.
2. Familiarity.—Images and perceptions may come to us,
and so may words or other bodily movements, with more or
less of the feeling we call “familiarity”. When you recall a
tune that you have heard before, either by images or by actually
singing it, part of what comes to you may feel familiar, part
unfamiliar. This may lead you to judge that you have remembered
the familiar part rightly and the unfamiliar part
wrongly, but this judgment belongs to a later stage.
3. Habit-Memory.—We have already discussed this in
Chapter VI. People say they remember a poem if they can
repeat it correctly. But this does not necessarily involve any
recollection of a past occurrence; you may have quite forgotten
when and where you read the poem. This sort of memory
is mere habit, and is essentially like knowing how to walk
although you cannot remember learning to walk. This does
not deserve to be called memory in the strict sense.
4. Recognition.—This has two forms. (a) When you see
a dog, you can say to yourself “there is a dog”, without recalling
any case in which you have seen a dog before, and even
without reflecting that there have been such cases. This involves
no knowledge about the past; essentially it is only an
associative habit. (b) You may know “I saw this before”,
though you do not know when or where, and cannot recollect
the previous occurrence in any way. In such a case there
is knowledge about the past, but it is very slight. When you
judge: “I saw this before”, the word “this” must be used
vaguely, because you did not see exactly what you see now,
but only something very like this. Thus all that you are
really knowing is that, on some past occasion, you saw something
very like what you are seeing now. This is about the
minimum of knowledge about the past that actually occurs.
5. Immediate Memory.—I come now to a region intermediate
between sensation and true memory, the region of
what is sometimes called “immediate memory”. When a sense-organ
is stimulated, it does not, on the cessation of the stimulus,
return at once to its unstimulated condition: it goes on (so
to speak) vibrating, like a piano-string, for a short time. For
example, when you see a flash of lightning, your sensation,
brief as it is, lasts much longer than the lightning as a physical
occurrence. There is a period during which a sensation is
fading: it is then called an “acoleuthic” sensation. It is owing
to this fact that you can see a movement as a whole. As observed
before, you cannot see the minute-hand of a watch
moving, but you can see the second-hand moving. That is
because it is in several appreciably different places within the
short time that is required for one visual sensation to fade, so
that you do actually, at one moment, see it in several places.
The fading sensations, however, feel different from those that
are fresh, and thus the various positions which are all sensibly
present are placed in a series by the degree of fading, and you
acquire the perception of movement as a process. Exactly
the same considerations apply to hearing a spoken sentence.
Thus not only an instant, but a short finite time is sensibly
present to you at any moment. This short finite time is
called the “specious present”. By the felt degree of fading,
you can distinguish earlier and later in the specious present, and
thus experience temporal succession without the need of
true memory. If you see me quickly move my arm from left
to right, you have an experience which is quite different from
what you would have if you now saw it at the right and
remembered that a little while ago you saw it at the left.
The difference is that, in the quick movement, the whole
falls within the specious present, so that the entire process is
sensible. The knowledge of something as in the immediate
past, though still sensible, is called “immediate memory”. It
has great importance in connection with our apprehension of
temporal processes, but cannot count as a form of true
memory.
6. True Recollection.—We will suppose, for the sake of
definiteness, that I am remembering what I had for breakfast
this morning. There are two questions which we must ask
about this occurrence: (a) What is happening now when
I recollect? (b) What is the relation of the present happening
to the event remembered? As to what is happening now,
my recollection may involve either images or words; in the
latter case, the words themselves may be merely imagined.
I will take the case in which there are images without words,
which must be the more primitive, since we cannot suppose
that memory would be impossible without words.
The first point is one which seems so obvious that I
should be ashamed to mention it, but for the fact that many
distinguished philosophers think otherwise. The point is this:
whatever may be happening now, the event remembered is
not happening. Memory is often spoken of as if it involved
the actual persistence of the past which is remembered; Bergson,
e.g. speaks of the interpenetration of the present by the
past. This is mere mythology; the event which occurs
when I remember is quite different from the event remembered.
People who are starving can remember their last meal, but
the recollection does not appease their hunger. There is no
mystic survival of the past when we remember; merely a
new event having a certain relation to the old one. What this
relation is, we shall consider presently.
It is quite clear that images are not enough to constitute
recollection, even when they are accurate copies of a past
occurrence. One may, in a dream, live over again a past experience;
while one is dreaming, one does not seem to be
recalling a previous occurrence, but living through a fresh experience.
We cannot be said to be remembering, in the strict
sense, unless we have a belief referring to the past. Images
which, like those in dreams, feel as if they were sensations,
do not constitute recollection. There must be some feeling
which makes us refer the images to a past prototype. Perhaps
familiarity is enough to cause us to do so. And perhaps
this also explains the experience of trying to remember something
and feeling that we are not remembering it right. Parts
of a complex image may feel more familiar than other parts,
and we then feel more confidence in the correctness of the
familiar parts than in that of the others. The conviction that
the image we are forming of a past event is wrong might seem
to imply that we must be knowing the past otherwise than by
images, but I do not think this conclusion is really warranted,
since degrees of familiarity in images suffice to explain this
experience.
(b) What is the relation of the present happening to the
event remembered? If we recollect correctly, the several
images will have that kind of resemblance of quality which
images can have to their prototypes, and their structure and
relations will be identical with those of their prototypes. Suppose,
for instance, you want to remember whether, in a certain
room, the window is to the right or left of the door as viewed
from the fireplace. You can observe your image of the room,
consisting (inter alia) of an image of the door and an image
of the window standing (if your recollection is correct) in the
same relation as when you are actually seeing the room.
Memory will consist in attaching to this complex image the sort
of belief that refers to the past; and the correctness of memory
consists of similarity of quality and identity of structure between
the complex image and a previous perception.
As for the trustworthiness of memory, there are two things
to be said. Taken as a whole, memory is one of the independent
sources of our knowledge; that is to say, there is no way of
arriving at the things we know through memory by any argument
wholly derived from things known otherwise. But no
single memory is obliged to stand alone, because it fits, or does
not fit, into a system of knowledge about the past based upon
the sum-total of memories. When what is remembered is a
perception by one or more of the public senses, other people
may corroborate it. Even when it is private, it may be confirmed
by other evidence. You may remember that you had a
toothache yesterday, and that you saw the dentist to-day; the
latter fact may be confirmed by an entry in your diary. All
these make a consistent whole, and each increases the likelihood
of the other. Thus we can test the truth of any particular recollection,
though not of memory as a whole. To say that we
cannot test the truth of memory as a whole is not to give a
reason for doubting it, but merely to say that it is an independent
source of knowledge, not wholly replaceable by other
sources. We know that our memory is fallible, but we have no
reason to distrust it on the whole after sufficient care in verification
has been taken.
The causation of particular acts of recollection seems to be
wholly associative. Something in the present is very like something
in the past, and calls up the context of the past occurrence
in the shape of images or words; when attention falls upon this
context, we believe that it occurred in the past, not as mere
images, and we then have an act of recollection.
There are many difficult problems connected with memory
which I have not discussed, because they have an interest which
is more purely psychological than philosophical. It is memory
as a source of knowledge that specially concerns the philosopher.
CHAPTER XIX THE INTROSPECTIVE ANALYSIS OF PERCEPTION
We have considered perception already from the behaviourist
standpoint, and also from that of physics. In the present
chapter we are to consider it from the standpoint of self-observation,
with a view to discovering as much as we can about the
intrinsic character of the event in us when we perceive. I
shall begin with certain traditional doctrines as to mental
events, and shall thence pass to the doctrines that I wish to
advocate.
The words “mind” and “matter” are used glibly, both by
ordinary people and by philosophers, without any adequate
attempt at definition. Philosophers are much to blame for
this. My own feeling is that there is not a sharp line, but a
difference of degree; an oyster is less mental than a man, but
not wholly un-mental. And I think “mental” is a character,
like “harmonious” or “discordant”, that cannot belong to a
single entity in its own right, but only to a system of entities.
But before defending this view, I wish to spend some time on
the theories that have been current in the past.
Traditionally, there are two ways of becoming aware that
something exists, one by the senses, the other by what is called
“introspection”, or what Kant called the “inner sense”. By
means of introspection, it is maintained, we become aware of
occurrences quite different in kind from those perceived through
the outer senses. Occurrences known through introspection are
traditionally called “mental”, and so are any other occurrences
which intrinsically resemble them.
Mental occurrences are traditionally of three main types,
called knowing, willing, and feeling. “Feeling”, in this connection,
means pleasure and unpleasure—we do not say
“pleasure and pain”, because “pain” is an ambiguous word:
it may stand for painful sensation, as when you say “I have a
pain in my tooth”, or it may stand for the unpleasant character
of the sensation. Roughly pleasure is a quality which makes
you want an experience to continue, and unpleasure is the opposite
quality which makes you want an experience to stop.
However, I am not concerned to enlarge upon feeling at
present.
As for the other two kinds of mental occurrence, “knowing”
and “willing” are recognised as too narrow to describe what
is meant. Philosophers wish to include not only knowledge
but also error, and not only the sort of knowledge that is
expressed in beliefs but also the sort that occurs in perception.
The word “cognition” or “cognitive state” is used to cover
everything that could possibly be described as either knowledge
or error; perception is prima facie included, but pure sensation
is more debatable.
“Willing”, again, is too narrow a term. A term is required
which will include desire and aversion, and generally those
states of mind which lead up to action. These are all included
under the head of “conation”, a technical term invented for
this special purpose.
Cognition and conation both have, in the orthodox theory,
the property of being directed to an object. What you perceive
or believe, what you desire or will, is something different from
your state of mind. To take instances: you remember a past
event, but your remembering occurs now; therefore your remembering
is a different occurrence from what you remember.
You will to move your arm, but the movement is a physical
occurrence, and therefore obviously different from your volition.
Many psychologists have taken this relation to an object as
the essential characteristic of mind—notably the two Austrians
Brentano and Meinong. Sometimes feeling also is regarded as
having an object: it is held that we are pleased or displeased at
something. This view, however, has never won general acceptance,
whereas the view that cognition and conation are directed
to objects may be regarded as orthodox.
It is undeniable that this characteristic of being directed to
objects is, in some sense, a property of cognition and conation,
but there is room for great difference of opinion as to the proper
analysis of the property. I think we cannot hope to understand
the word “mental” until we have undertaken this analysis, and
I shall therefore proceed to address myself to it. I shall confine
myself to cognition, which is more important for our present
purposes than conation.
As regards cognition, though philosophers have disagreed
widely, I think that, until recently, most would have assented to
at least the following paragraph:
Cognition is of various sorts. Take, as important kinds,
perception, memory, conception, and beliefs involving concepts.
Perception is the ordinary awareness of sensible objects: seeing
a table, hearing a piano, and so on. Memory is awareness of a
past occurrence, when this awareness is direct, not inferred
or derived from testimony. Conception is more difficult to
characterise. One may say, as a way of pointing out what is
intended, that we “conceive” whenever we understand the
meaning of an abstract word, or think of that which is in fact
the meaning of the word. If you see a white patch of snow,
or recall it by means of images, you do not have a concept; but
if you think about whiteness, you have a concept. Similarly if,
after seeing a number of coins, you think about roundness as a
common characteristic of all of them, you have a concept. The
object of your thought, in such a case, is a universal or a Platonic
idea. Every sentence must contain at least one word expressing
a concept, and therefore every belief that can be expressed in
words contains concepts.
Each of these kinds of cognitive attitude involves its own
problems. In the present chapter we are concerned with perception.
This has to be treated both introspectively and
causally; it is the introspective treatment that we have now to
undertake.
When you have the experience called “seeing a table”, there
is a certain amount of difference between your unreflecting judgment
and what careful examination reveals as to the nature of
your experience. You judge that the table is rectangular, but
the patch of colour in your visual field is not a rectangle; when
you learn to draw, you have to draw the table as it really seems
and not as it seems to seem. You have images of sensations of
touch; if you were to try to touch the table and it turned out to
be an optical illusion, you would get a violent shock of surprise.
You have also expectations of a certain degree of permanence
and weight. If you went to lift the table, you would find your
muscles quite wrongly adjusted if the table were much lighter
than it looked. All these elements must be included in the
perception, though not in the sensation.
“Sensation”, as opposed to perception, is more or less
hypothetical. It is supposed to be the core, in the perception,
which is solely due to the stimulus and the sense-organ, not to
past experience. When you judge that the table is rectangular,
it is past experience that enables and compels you to do so;
if you had been born blind and just operated upon, you could
not make this judgment. Nor would you have expectations of
hardness, etc. But none of this can be discovered by introspection.
From an introspective point of view, the elements due
to past experience are largely indistinguishable from those due
to the stimulus alone. One supposes that past experience modifies
the brain, and thereby modifies the mental occurrence due
to the stimulus. The notion of sensation as opposed to perception
belongs, therefore, to the causal study of perception,
not to the introspective study.
There is, however, a distinction to be made here. You can
discover by mere self-observation that visual objects are accompanied
by expectations or images of touch; and similarly
if you touch an object in the dark you will probably be led to
form some visual image of it. Here you can arrive at a certain
degree of analysis of your perception through the fact that
images, as a rule, feel different from the immediate results of a
sensory stimulus. On the other hand, no amount of introspection
alone will reveal such things as the blind spot. The filling
in of a sensation by elements belonging to the same sense is
much less discoverable by introspection than the filling in by
associated images belonging to other senses. Thus although by
introspection alone we could discover part of the influence of
experience on perception, there is another part which we cannot
discover in this way.
Remaining in the introspective attitude, it is evident that
the contents of our minds at any given moment are very complex.
Throughout our normal waking life we are always seeing,
hearing, and touching, sometimes smelling and tasting, always
having various bodily sensations, always feeling pleasant or
unpleasant feelings (usually both), always having desires or
aversions. We are not normally aware of all these items, but
we can become aware of any of them by turning our attention
in the right direction. I am not at present discussing “unconscious
mental states”, because they, obviously, can only be
known causally, and we are now considering what can be known
introspectively. There may be any number of perceptions that
cannot be known by introspection; the point for us, at the
moment, is that those that can be discovered by introspection
at any one time are many and various.
I do not wish, just now, to discuss the nature of attention;
I wish only to point out that it enables us to take the first steps
in abstraction. Out of the whole multiplicity of objects of
sense, it enables us to single out a small selection, which is an
indispensable preliminary to abstraction. For example, attention
will enable us to discriminate a coloured pattern which
we are seeing, and to separate it from the other things we see
and from images and other objects of sense and thoughts which
may exist simultaneously. For the sake of simplicity, let us
suppose that we discriminate a black and white pattern in the
form of a triangle. Within this pattern we can further discriminate
sides and angles and an inside and outside—of course
the sides are not mathematical lines nor the angles mathematical
points.
We now come to a question of very great importance, upon
which our views of the relations of mind and matter largely
depend. The question is this:
What difference is there between the propositions “there is
a triangle” and “I see a triangle”?
Both these statements seem as certain as any statement can
be—at least if rightly interpreted. As always happens in such
cases, we are quite certain of something, but not quite certain
what it is that we are certain of. I want to ask whether this
something that we are certain of is really different in the above
two statements, or whether the difference between them is only
as to surroundings of which we are not certain. Most philosophers
hold that there is a difference in what we are certain
of; Mach, James, Dewey, the American realists, and I hold that
the difference is in the uncertain context. Let us examine this
question.
The suggestions of the two statements “I see a triangle” and
“there is a triangle” are obviously different. The first states
an event in my life, and suggests its possible effects upon me.
The second aims at stating an event in the world, supposed to
be equally discoverable by other people. You might say “there
is a triangle” if you had seen it a moment ago but now had
your eyes shut; in this case you would not say “I see a triangle”.
On the other hand, one sometimes, under the influence of indigestion
or fatigue, sees little black dots floating in the air;
in such circumstances you would say “I see a black dot”, but
not “there is a black dot”. This illustration shows that when
you say “there is a black dot” you are making a stronger assertion
than when you say “I see a black dot”. In the other case,
when you say “there is a triangle” because you saw it
a moment ago, though not now, you have three stages: First,
memory assures you of the proposition “I saw a triangle”, and
then you pass on to “there was a triangle”, and then, further,
to “there is a triangle, because nothing can have happened to
destroy it so quickly.” Here we have obviously passed far
beyond the region of immediate certainty.
It seems clear, therefore, that, of our two statements, the
one which comes nearest to expressing the fact of which we are
immediately certain is “I see a triangle”, because the other
makes inferences to something public, and thus goes beyond
the bare datum. This is on the assumption that we should not
say “there is a black dot” when we see a black dot which we
attribute to eye-trouble and therefore suppose that no one else
can see. Let us therefore concentrate upon “I see a triangle”,
and ask ourselves whether the whole of this, or only part, can
be accepted as a primitive certainty.
A moment’s reflection shows that both “I” and “see” are
words which take us beyond what the momentary event reveals.
Take “I” to begin with. This is a word whose meaning evidently
depends upon memory and expectation. “I” means the
person who had certain remembered experiences and is expected
to have certain future experiences. We might say “I see a
triangle now and I saw a square a moment ago.” The word “I”
has exactly the same meaning in its two occurrences in this sentence,
and therefore evidently has a meaning dependent upon
memory. Now it is our object to arrive at the contribution
to your knowledge which is made by seeing the triangle at the
moment. Therefore, since the word “I” takes you beyond this
contribution, we must cut it out if we want to find a correct
verbal expression for what is added to our knowledge by seeing
the triangle. We will say “a triangle is being seen”. This
is at any rate one step nearer to what we are seeking.
But now we must deal with the word “seen”. As ordinarily
used, this is a causal word, suggesting something dependent
upon the eyes. In this sense, it obviously involves a mass of
previous experience; a new-born baby does not know that what
it sees depends upon its eyes. However, we could eliminate
this. Obviously all objects of sight have a common quality,
which no objects of touch or hearing have; a visual object is
different from an auditory object, and so on. Therefore instead
of saying “a triangle is being seen”, we should say “there is a
visual triangle”. Of course the meanings of the words “visual”
and “triangle” can only be learnt by experience, but they are
not logically dependent upon experience. A being could be
imagined which would know the words at birth; such a being
could express its datum in the words “there is a visual triangle”.
In any case, the problems remaining belong to the study of
concepts; we will therefore ignore them at present.
Now in English the words “there is” are ambiguous. When
I used them before, saying, “there is a triangle”, I meant them
in the sense of “voila” or “da ist”. Now I mean them in the
sense of “il y a” or “es giebt”. One might express what is
meant by saying “a visual triangle exists”, but the word “exist”
has all sorts of metaphysical connotations that I wish to avoid.
Perhaps it is best to say “occurs”.
We have now arrived at something which is just as true
when your perception is illusory as when it is correct. If you
say “a visual black dot is occurring”, you are speaking the truth,
if there is one in your field of vision. We have eliminated the
suggestion that others could see it, or that it could be touched,
or that it is composed of matter in the sense of physics. All
these suggestions are present when one says, in ordinary conversation,
“there is a black dot”; they are intended to be
eliminated by the addition of the word “visual” and the substitution
of “is occurring” for “there is”. By these means we
have arrived at what is indubitable and intrinsic in the addition
to your knowledge derived from a visual datum.
We must now ask ourselves once more: Is there still a distinction,
within what is immediate and intrinsic, between the
occurrence of a visual datum and the cognition of it? Can we
say, on the basis of immediate experience, not only “a visual
black dot occurs”, but also “a visual black dot is cognised”?
My feeling is that we cannot. When we say that it is cognised,
we seem to me to mean that it is part of an experience, that is
to say, that it can be remembered, or can modify our habits, or,
generally, can have what are called “mnemic” effects. All this
takes us beyond the immediate experience into the realm of
its causal relations. I see no reason to think that there is any
duality of subject and object in the occurrence itself, or that it
can properly be described as a case of “knowledge”. It gives
rise to knowledge, through memory, and through conscious or
unconscious inferences to the common correlates of such data.
But in itself it is not knowledge, and has no duality. The datum
is a datum equally for physics and for psychology; it is a meeting
point of the two. It is neither mental nor physical, just as a
single name is neither in alphabetical order nor in order of
precedence; but it is part of the raw material of both the mental
and the physical worlds. This is the theory which is called
“neutral monism”, and is the one that I believe to be true.
CHAPTER XX CONSCIOUSNESS?
Twenty-three years have elapsed since William James
startled the world with his article entitled “Does ‘consciousness’
exist?” In this article, reprinted in the volume called
Essays in Radical Empiricism, he set out the view that “there
is only one primal stuff or material in the world”, and that the
word “consciousness” stands for a function, not an entity. He
holds that there are “thoughts”, which perform the function of
“knowing”, but that thoughts are not made of any different
“stuff” from that of which material objects are made. He thus
laid the foundations for what is called “neutral monism”, a
view advocated by most American realists. This is the view
advocated in the present volume. In this chapter, we have to
ask ourselves whether there is anything that we can call
“consciousness” in any sense involving a peculiar kind of stuff,
or whether we can agree with William James that there is no
“inner duplicity” in the stuff of the world as we know it, and
that the separation of it into knowing and what is known does
not represent a fundamental dualism.
There are two very different meanings attached to the word
“consciousness” by those who use it. On the one hand, we are
said to be “conscious of” something; in this sense, “consciousness”
is a relation. On the other hand, “consciousness” may be
regarded as a quality of mental occurrences, not consisting in
their relation to other things. Let us take the first view first,
since, in discussing it, we shall find reasons for rejecting the
second view.
What is the relation we call being “conscious of” something?
Take the difference between a person awake and a person
asleep. The former reacts to all kinds of stimuli to which
the latter does not react; we therefore say that the latter is
not “conscious of” what is happening in his neighbourhood.
But even if the sleeper does react in a fashion, for example, by
turning away from the light, such a reaction does not fall within
what is commonly regarded as “knowledge” or “awareness”;
we should say that the sleeper turned over “unconsciously”.
If he wakes up sufficiently to speak intelligently, for instance
to address the disturber by name, we consider him “conscious”.
So we do if we find that he remembers the incident next morning.
But common sense does not regard any and every bodily
movement in response to a stimulus as evidence of “consciousness”.
There is no doubt, I think, that common sense regards
certain kinds of response as evidence of some “mental” process
caused by the stimulus, and regards the “consciousness” as residing
in the inferred “mental” occurrence.
Sometimes, however, as in hypnotism and sleep-walking, people
refuse to admit “consciousness” even where many of the
usual marks of it are present. For this there are certain reasons.
One of them is subsequent lack of memory; another is
lack of intelligence in what is being done. If you offer a hypnotised
patient a drink of ink, telling him it is port wine, and
he drinks it up with every sign of enjoyment, you say that he
is not “conscious”, because he does not react normally to the
nasty taste. It would seem better, however, to say that he is
conscious of the hypnotist and what he commands, though not
of other things of which he would be conscious in a normal
condition. And lack of subsequent memory is a very difficult
criterion, since we normally forget many things that have happened
to us, and the sleep-walker’s forgetting is only unusually
complete. This is obviously a matter of degree. Take next
morning’s memories in the case of a man who was drunk overnight.
They become more and more vague as he reviews the
later hours of the evening, but there is no sharp line where they
cease abruptly. Thus, if memory is a test, consciousness must
be a matter of degree. I think that here, again, common sense
regards a certain amount of memory as necessary evidence to
prove that there were “mental” processes at the time of the
acts in question, acts in sleep being regarded as not involving
“mind”, and other acts in certain abnormal conditions being
supposed to resemble those of sleep in this respect.
It follows that, if we are to find out what is commonly meant
by “consciousness”, we must ask ourselves what is meant by a
“mental” occurrence. Not every mental occurrence, however,
is in question. The only kinds concerned are those which seem
to have relation to an “object”. A feeling of pleasant
drowsiness would commonly count as “mental”, but does not
involve “consciousness” of an “object”. It is this supposed
peculiar relation to an “object” that we have to examine.
We may take, as the best example, an ordinary act of perception.
I see, let us say, a table, and I am convinced that the
table is outside me, whereas my seeing of it is a “mental” occurrence,
which is inside me. In such a case I am “conscious”
of the table—so at least common sense would say. And since
I cannot see without seeing something, this relation to an
“object” is of the very essence of seeing. The same essential
relation to an “object”, it would be said, is characteristic of
every kind of consciousness.
But when we begin to consider this view more closely, all
sorts of difficulties arise. We have already seen that, on
grounds derived from physics, the table itself, as a physical
thing, cannot be regarded as the object of our perception, if the
object is something essential to the existence of the perception.
In suitable circumstances, we shall have the same perception
although there is no table. In fact, there is no event outside
the brain which must exist whenever we “see a table”. It seems
preposterous to say that when we think we see a table we really
see a motion in our own brain. Hence we are led to the conclusion
that the “object” which is essential to the existence of an
act of perception is just as “mental” as the perceiving. In
fact, so this theory runs, the mental occurrence called “perceiving”
is one which contains within itself the relation of perceiver
and perceived, both sides of the relation being equally “mental”.
Now, however, there seems no longer any reason to suppose
that there is any essentially relational character about what
occurs in us when we perceive. The original reason for thinking
so was the naively realistic view that we see the actual table.
If what we see is as mental as our seeing, why distinguish between
the two? The coloured pattern that we see is not really
“out there”, as we had supposed; it is in our heads, if we are
speaking of physical space. True, more than a coloured pattern
occurs when we “see a table”. There are tactual expectations
or images: there is probably belief in an external object; and
afterwards there may be memory or other “mnemic” effects.
All this may be taken as representing what the above theory
took to be the “subject” side of an act of perception, while the
coloured pattern is what the theory took to be the “object”
side. But both sides are on a level as regards being “mental”.
And the relation between the two sides is not of such a kind
that the existence of the one logically demands the existence
of the other; on the contrary, the relation between the two
sides is causal, being dependent upon experience and the law
of association.
If this is correct, what really happens when, as common
sense would say, we are conscious of a table, is more or less
as follows. First there is a physical process external to the
body, producing a stimulus to the eye which occurs rarely
(not never) in the absence of an actual physical table. Then
there is a process in the eye, nerves, and brain, and finally
there is a coloured pattern. This coloured pattern, by the law
of association, gives rise to tactual and other expectations and
images; also, perhaps, to memories and other habits. But
everything in this whole series consists of a causally continuous
chain of events in space-time, and we have no reason to assert
that the events in us are so very different from the events outside
us—as to this, we must remain ignorant, since the outside
events are only known as to their abstract mathematical characteristics,
which do not show whether these events are like
“thoughts” or unlike them.
It follows that “consciousness” cannot be defined either as
a peculiar kind of relation or as an intrinsic character belonging
to certain events and not to others. “Mental” events are not
essentially relational, and we do not know enough of the intrinsic
character of events outside us to say whether it does
or does not differ from that of “mental” events. But what
makes us call a certain class of events “mental” and distinguish
them from other events is the combination of sensitivity with
associative reproduction. The more markedly this combination
exists, the more “mental” are the events concerned; thus
mentality is a matter of degree.
There is, however, a further point which must be discussed
in this connection, and that is “self-consciousness”, or awareness
of our own “mental” events. We already had occasion
to touch on this in Chapter XVI in connection with Descartes’
“I think, therefore I am”. But I want to discuss the question
afresh in connection with “consciousness”.
When the plain man sees “a table” in the presence of a
philosopher, the plain man can be driven, by the arguments we
have repeatedly brought forward, to admit that he cannot have
complete certainty as to anything outside himself. But if he
does not lose his head or his temper, he will remain certain
that there is a coloured pattern, which may be in him, but
indubitably exists. No argument from logic or physics even
tends to show that he is mistaken in this; therefore there is
no reason why he should surrender his conviction. The argument
about knowledge in Chapter VIII showed that, accepting
the usual views of physicists as to causal laws, our knowledge
becomes more certain as the causal chain from object to reaction
is shortened, and can only be quite certain when the two are in
the same place in space-time, or at least contiguous. Thus
we should expect that the highest grade of certainty would
belong to knowledge as to what happens in our own heads.
And this is exactly what we have when we are aware of our
own “mental” events, such as the existence of a coloured pattern
when we thought we were seeing a table.
We might, therefore, if we were anxious to preserve the
word “mental”, define a “mental” event as one that can be
known with the highest grade of certainty, because, in physical
space-time, the event and the knowing of it are contiguous.
Thus “mental” events will be certain of the events that occur
in heads that have brains. They will not be all events that
occur in brains, but only such as cause a reaction of the kind
that can be called “knowledge”.
There are, however, still a number of difficult questions,
to which, as yet, a definitive answer cannot be given. When
we “know” a thought of our own, what happens? And do
we know the thought in a more intimate way than we know
anything else? Knowledge of external events, as we have
seen, consists of a certain sensitivity to their presence, but not
in having in or before our minds anything similar to them,
except in certain abstract structural respects. Is knowledge
of our own minds equally abstract and indirect? Or is it something
more analogous to what we ordinarily imagine knowledge
to be?
Take first the question: What happens when we “know”
a thought of our own? Taking the definition of “knowing”
that we adopted in Chapter VIII, we shall say: We “know” a
thought of our own when an event in our brain causes a characteristic
reaction which is present when the event occurs and
not otherwise. In this sense, whenever we say, “I see a table”,
we are knowing a thought, since an event in our brain is the
only invariable antecedent of such a statement (assuming it to
be made truthfully). We may think we are knowing a table,
but this is an error.
Thus the difference between introspective and other knowledge
is only in our intention and in the degree of certainty.
When we say, “I see a table”, we may intend to know an
external object, but if so we may be mistaken; we are, however,
actually knowing the occurrence of a visual percept. When
we describe the same occurrence in the words “a certain coloured
pattern is occurring”, we have changed our intention and are
much more certain of being right. Thus all that differentiates
our reaction when it gives introspective knowledge from our
reaction when it gives knowledge of another kind is the elimination
of a possible source of error.
I come now to the question: Do we know our own thoughts
in a more intimate way than we know anything else? This is
a question to which it is difficult to give precision; it describes
something that one feels to be a problem without being able
to say exactly what the problem is. However, some things can
be said which may serve to clear up our feelings, if not our
ideas.
Suppose you are asked to repeat after a man whatever he
says, as a test of your hearing. He says “how do you do?”
and you repeat “how do you do?” This is your knowledge-reaction,
and you hear yourself speaking. You can perceive
that what you hear when you speak is closely similar to what
you hear when the other man speaks. This makes you feel
that your reaction reproduces accurately what you heard.
Your knowledge-reaction, in this case, is the cause of an occurrence
closely similar to the occurrence that you are knowing.
Moreover, our inveterate naive realism makes us think that
what we said was what we heard while we were speaking.
This is, of course, an illusion, since an elaborate chain of
physical and physiological causation intervenes between speaking
and hearing oneself speak; nevertheless, the illusion re-enforces
our conviction that our knowledge, in such a case, is
very intimate. And it is, in fact, as intimate as it can hope to
be, when our knowledge-reaction reproduces the very event we
are knowing, or at least an event extremely similar to it. This
may be the case on other occasions, but we can only know, with
any certainty, that it is the case when what is known is a percept.
This accounts for the fact that our most indubitable and
complete knowledge is concerning percepts, not concerning other
mental events or events in the external world. Our reaction
to a sound can be to make a similar sound, and if we are clever
enough we can paint something very like what we see. But
we cannot show our knowledge of a pleasure by creating for
ourselves another very similar pleasure, nor of a desire by
creating a similar desire. Thus percepts are known with more
accuracy and certainty than anything else either in the outer
world or in our own minds.
The conclusion we have reached in this chapter is that
William James was right in his views on “consciousness”. No
mental occurrence has, in its own intrinsic nature, that sort
of relational character that was implied in the opposition of
subject and object, or of knower and known. Nevertheless
we can distinguish “mental” events from others, and our most
indubitable knowledge is concerned with a certain class of
mental events. We have arrived at this result by following
out to its logical conclusion the behaviourist definition of knowledge
which we gave in Chapter VIII. We have had to modify
considerably the point of view which originally led us to that
definition, the modification having been forced upon us by the
physical knowledge which, starting from a common-sense realism,
has been gradually driven, through the causal theory of
perception, to a view of cognition far more subjective than that
from which physicists, like the rest of mankind, originally
set out. But I do not see how there can be any escape from this
development.
CHAPTER XXI EMOTION, DESIRE, AND WILL
Hitherto, in our investigation of man from within, we have
considered only the cognitive aspect, which is, in fact, the most
important to philosophy. But now we must turn our attention
to the other sides of human nature. If we treat them more
briefly than the cognitive side, it is not because they are less
important, but because their main importance is practical and
our task is theoretical. Let us begin with the emotions.
The theory of the emotions has been radically transformed
by the discovery of the part played by the ductless glands.
Cannon’s Bodily Changes in Pain, Hunger, Fear and Rage
is a book whose teaching has come to be widely known, though
not more so than its importance warrants. It appears that
certain secretions from the glands into the blood are the essential
physiological conditions of the emotions. Some people
say that the physiological changes correlated with these secretions
are the emotions. I think this view must be received with
some caution. As everyone knows, the adrenal glands secrete
adrenin, which produces the bodily symptoms of fear or rage.
On one occasion my dentist injected a considerable amount of
this substance into my blood, in the course of administering a
local anæsthetic. I turned pale and trembled, and my heart
beat violently; the bodily symptoms of fear were present, as
the books said they should be, but it was quite obvious to me
that I was not actually feeling fear. I should have had the
same bodily symptoms in the presence of a tyrant about to
condemn me to death, but there would have been something
extra which was absent when I was in the dentist’s chair. What
was different was the cognitive part: I did not feel fear because
I knew there was nothing to be afraid of. In normal life, the
adrenal glands are stimulated by the perception of an object
which is frightful or enraging; thus there is already a cognitive
element present. The fear or rage attaches itself to the
object which has stimulated the glands, and the full emotion
arises. But when adrenin is artificially administered, this cognitive
element is absent, and the emotion in its entirety fails
to arise. Probably if it were administered in sleep it would
produce a dream of terror, in which the dreamer’s imagination
would supply an object for fear. The same thing might happen
on waking life with animals or young children. But with an
adult of average rationality, the knowledge that there is nothing
to be afraid of inhibits the full development of the emotion.
Fear and rage are both active emotions, demanding a certain
kind of behaviour towards an object; when this behaviour is
obviously not called for, it is impossible to feel either emotion
fully.
There are, however, other emotions, such as melancholy,
which do not demand an object. These, presumably, can be
caused in their entirety by administering the proper secretions.
A disordered liver may cause melancholy which is not relieved
by knowledge of its source. The emotions which do not require
an object are those which do not call for any appropriate
line of action.
Emotions are subject to “conditioning”, so that the stimuli
which call them out become more various as a result of experience.
Dr. Watson has found only two original stimuli to
fear in young infants, namely loud noises, and lack of support;
but anything associated with either of these may become terrifying.
The separation of an emotional element in our integral
reaction to a situation is more or less artificial. No doubt
there is a definite physiological concomitant, namely stimulation
of a gland; but fear, for example, involves a mode of
action towards an object, for which mode of action the secretion
of adrenin is helpful. There is, however, something in
common among a number of occasions that have a given emotional
tone; this may be seen from the fact that they are associated.
When we are feeling some emotion strongly, we tend
to think of other occasions when we have had similar feelings.
Association by means of emotional similarity is a characteristic
of a great deal of poetry. And this accounts for the fact that,
if our blood is in a state usually associated with terror, we
shall, if our critical faculty is in abeyance, be very likely to
imagine some cause of fear so vividly as to believe that it is
really present:
In the night, imagining some fear,
How easy is a bush supposed a bear.
But in a rational man, if he is not drunk or sleepy, other associations
are too strong for this production of imaginary terrors.
That is why it is possible to show the physical symptoms of
fear under the influence of adrenin, without actually feeling
the emotion.
The emotions are what makes life interesting, and what
makes us feel it important. From this point of view, they
are the most valuable element in human existence. But when,
as in philosophy, we are trying to understand the world, they
appear rather as a hindrance. They generate irrational opinions,
since emotional associations seldom correspond with collocations
in the external world. They cause us to view the
universe in the mirror of our moods, as now bright, now dim,
according to the state of the mirror. With the sole exception
of curiosity, the emotions are on the whole a hindrance to the
intellectual life, though the degree of vigour required for successful
thinking is likely to be correlated with a considerable
susceptibility to emotion. If I say little about the emotions
in this book, it is not from under-estimating their human importance,
but solely because the task upon which we are engaged
is theoretical rather than practical: to understand the
world, not to change it. And if emotion determines the ends
we shall pursue, knowledge is what gives us the power to realise
them. Even from the practical point of view, the advancement
of knowledge is more useful than anything else that lies within
human power.
I come now to the subject of desire, which we considered
from a behaviourist standpoint in Chapter III. I want now
to ask whether there is anything to be added from an introspective
point of view.
Let us again remind ourselves that there is an element of
artificiality in isolating elements within the one process leading
from stimulus to reaction. Whenever a stimulus produces a
reaction, we may consider the reaction as the effect of the
stimulus, or as the cause of further effects. The former is the
natural way of viewing the reaction when we are concerned
with knowledge; the latter is the natural way when we are
concerned with desire and will. In desire, we wish to change
something in ourselves or in our environment or both. The
question is: What can we discover introspectively about desire?
I think that here, as in the case of knowledge, the purely
behaviouristic account is more important causally than the introspective
account, and applies over a much wider range.
Desire as a characteristic of behaviour, as considered in Chapter
III, begins very low in the scale of evolution, and remains,
even in human beings, the whole of what can be discovered in
a large number of instances. The Freudian “unconscious” desires
give a formula which is useful as explaining causally a
number of acts, but these desires do not exist as anything except
ways of behaving. Some desires, on the other hand, are conscious
and explicit. What, exactly, is added in these last that
is not present in the others?
Let us take some stock instance, say, Demosthenes desiring
to become a great orator. This was a desire of which he
was conscious, and in accordance with which he deliberately
moulded his actions. One may suppose, to begin with, a merely
behaviouristic tendency to do such things as seemed likely to
impress his companions. This is a practically universal characteristic
of human nature, which is displayed naively by children.
Then come attempts, just like those of rats in mazes,
to reach the goal; wrong turnings, leading to derision; right
turnings, leading to a brief nibble at the cheese of admiration.
Self-observation, still of a behaviourist kind, may lead to the
formula: I want to be admired. At this point the desire
has become “conscious”. When this point has been reached,
knowledge can be brought to bear on the problem of achieving
the desired end. By association, the means come to be desired
also. And so Demosthenes arrives at the decision to subject
himself to a difficult training as an orator, since this seems the
best way of achieving his end. The whole development is
closely analogous to that of explicit knowledge out of mere
sensitivity; it is, indeed, part of the very same evolution. We
cannot, in our integral reaction to a situation, separate out one
event as knowledge and another as desire; both knowledge and
desire are features which characterise the reaction, but do not
exist in isolation.
In explicit conscious desire there is always an object, just
as there is in explicit conscious perception; we desire some
event or some state of affairs. But in the primitive condition
out of which explicit desire is evolved, this is not the case. We
have a state of affairs which may be said to involve discomfort,
and activities of various sorts until a certain different state of
affairs is achieved, or fatigue supervenes, or some other interest
causes a distraction. These activities will be such as to
achieve the new state of affairs quickly if there has been previous
experience of a relevant kind. When we reach the level of
explicit conscious desire, it seems as if we were being attracted
to a goal, but we are really still pushed from behind. The
attraction to the goal is a shorthand way of describing the
effects of learning together with the fact that our efforts will
continue till the goal is achieved, provided the time required
is not too long. There are feelings of various kinds connected
with desire, and in the case of familiar desires, such as hunger,
these feelings become associated with what we know will cause
the desire to cease. But I see no more reason in the case of
desire than in the case of knowledge to admit an essentially
relational occurrence such as many suppose desire to be. Only
experience, memory and association—so I should say—confer
objects upon desire, which are initially blind tendencies to certain
kinds of activity.
It remains to say a few words about “will”. There is a
sense in which will is an observable phenomena, and another in
which it is a metaphysical superstition. It is obvious that I
can say, “I will hold my breath for thirty seconds”, and proceed
to do so; that I can say, “I will go to America”, and
proceed to do so; and so on. In this sense, will is an observable
phenomenon. But as a faculty, as a separable occurrence, it is,
I think, a delusion. To make this clear, it will be necessary to
examine the observable phenomenon.
Very young infants do not appear to have anything that
could be called “will”. Their movements, at first, are reflexes,
and are explicable, where they first cease to be reflexes, by the
law of conditioned reflexes. One observes, however, something
that looks very like will when the child learns control
over fingers and toes. It seems clear, in watching this process,
that, after some experience of involuntary movements, the child
discovers how to think of a movement first and then make the
movement, and that this discovery is exceedingly pleasurable.
We know that, in adult life, a deliberate movement is one which
we think of before we make it. Obviously we cannot think of
a movement unless we have previously made it; it follows that
no movement can be voluntary unless it has previously been
involuntary. I think that, as William James suggested, a
voluntary movement is merely one which is preceded by the
thought of it, and has the thought of it as an essential part of
its cause.
When I say this, I do not mean to take any particular view
as to what constitutes “thinking”. It may consist almost entirely
of talking, as Dr. Watson holds; or it may be something
more. That is not the point at present. The point is that,
whatever philosophy one may adopt, there certainly is an occurrence
which is described by ordinary people as “thinking of
getting up in the morning”, or “thinking of” any other bodily
movement. Whatever the analysis of this occurrence may be,
it is an essential part of the cause of any movement which can
be attributed to the “will”.
It is true, of course, that we may think of a movement
without performing it. This is analogous to imagining a state
of affairs without believing in it; each is a rather sophisticated
and late development. Each will only happen when we think
of several things at once, and one of them interferes with another.
It may, I think, be assumed that, whenever we think
of a possible movement, we have a tendency to perform it, and
are only restrained, if at all, by some thought, or other circumstance,
having a contrary tendency.
If this is the case, there is nothing at all mysterious about
the will. Whatever may constitute “thinking of” a movement,
it is certainly something associated with the movement itself;
therefore, by the usual law of learned reactions we should expect
that thinking of a movement would tend to cause it to
occur. This, I should say, is the essence of will.
Emphatic cases of volition, where we decide after a period
of deliberation, are merely examples of conflicting forces. You
may have both pleasant and unpleasant associations with some
place that you are thinking of going to; this may cause you to
hesitate, until one or other association proves the stronger.
There may be more than this in volition, but I cannot see any
good ground for believing that there is.
CHAPTER XXII ETHICS
Ethics is traditionally a department of philosophy, and that
is my reason for discussing it. I hardly think myself that it
ought to be included in the domain of philosophy, but to prove
this would take as long as to discuss the subject itself, and
would be less interesting.
As a provisional definition, we may take ethics to consist
of general principles which help to determine rules of conduct.
It is not the business of ethics to say how a person should
act in such and such specific circumstances; that is the province
of casuistry. The word “casuistry” has acquired bad connotations,
as a result of the Protestant and Jansenist attacks on the
Jesuits. But in its old and proper sense it represents a perfectly
legitimate study. Take, say, the question: In what circumstances
is it right to tell a lie? Some people, unthinkingly,
would say: Never! But this answer cannot be seriously defended.
Everybody admits that you should lie if you meet a
homicidal maniac pursuing a man with a view to murdering
him, and he asks you whether the man has passed your way.
It is admitted that lying is a legitimate branch of the art of
warfare; also that priests may lie to guard the secrets of the
confessional, and doctors to protect the professional confidences
of their patients. All such questions belong to casuistry in the
old sense, and it is evident that they are questions deserving
to be asked and answered. But they do not belong to ethics
in the sense in which this study has been included in philosophy.
It is not the business of ethics to arrive at actual rules of
conduct, such as: “Thou shalt not steal”. This is the province
of morals. Ethics is expected to provide a basis from which
such rules can be deduced. The rules of morals differ according
to the age, the race, and the creed of the community concerned,
to an extent that is hardly realised by those who have
neither travelled nor studied anthropology. Even within a
homogeneous community differences of opinion arise. Should
a man kill his wife’s lover? The Church says no, the law says
no, and common sense says no; yet many people would say yes,
and juries often refuse to condemn. These doubtful cases arise
when a moral rule is in process of changing. But ethics is concerned
with something more general than moral rules, and
less subject to change. It is true that, in a given community,
an ethic which does not lead to the moral rules accepted by
that community is considered immoral. It does not, of course,
follow that such an ethic is in fact false, since the moral rules
of that community may be undesirable. Some tribes of head-hunters
hold that no man should marry until he can bring to
the wedding the head of an enemy slain by himself. Those
who question this moral rule are held to be encouraging licence
and lowering the standard of manliness. Nevertheless, we
should not demand of an ethic that it should justify the moral
rules of head-hunters.
Perhaps the best way to approach the subject of ethics is to
ask what is meant when a person says: “You ought to do so-and-so”
or “I ought to do so-and-so”. Primarily, a sentence
of this sort has an emotional content; it means “this is the act
towards which I feel the emotion of approval”. But we do not
wish to leave the matter there; we want to find something more
objective and systematic and constant than a personal emotion.
The ethical teacher says: “You ought to approve acts of such-and-such
kinds”. He generally gives reasons for this view,
and we have to examine what sorts of reasons are possible.
We are here on very ancient ground. Socrates was concerned
mainly with ethics; Plato and Aristotle both discussed the subject
at length; before their time, Confucius and Buddha had
each founded a religion consisting almost entirely of ethical
teaching, though in the case of Buddhism there was afterwards
a growth of theological doctrine. The views of the ancients
on ethics are better worth studying than their views on (say)
physical science; the subject has not yet proved amenable to
exact reasoning, and we cannot boast that the moderns have as
yet rendered their predecessors obsolete.
Historically, virtue consisted at first of obedience to authority,
whether that of the gods, the government, or custom.
Those who disobeyed authority suffered obvious penalties.
This is still the view of Hegel, to whom virtue consists in obedience
to the State. There are, however, different forms of this
theory, and the objections to them are different. In its more
primitive form, the theory is unaware that different authorities
take different views as to what constitutes virtue, and it therefore
universalises the practice of the community in which the
theoriser lives. When other ages and nations are found to
have different customs, these are condemned as abominations.
Let us consider this view first.
The view we are now to examine is the theory that there
are certain rules of conduct—e.g. the Decalogue—which determine
virtue in all situations. The person who keeps all the
rules is perfectly virtuous; the person who fails in this is wicked
in proportion to the frequency of his failures. There are several
objections to this as the basis of ethics. In the first place,
the rules can hardly cover the whole field of human conduct;
e.g. there is nothing in the Decalogue to show whether we
ought to have a gold standard or not. Accordingly those who
hold this view regard some questions as “moral issues”, while
others have not this character. That means, in practice, that
in regard to “moral issues” we ought to act in a certain way,
regardless of consequences, while in other matters we ought to
consider which course will do the most good. Thus in effect
we are driven to adopt two different ethical systems, one where
the code has spoken, the other where it is silent. This is unsatisfactory
to a philosopher.
The second objection to such a view is suggested by the first.
We all feel that certain results are desirable, and others undesirable;
but a code of conduct which takes no account of circumstances
will have sometimes the sort of consequences we think
desirable, and sometimes the sort we think undesirable. Take,
e.g. the precept “Thou shalt not kill”. All respectable people
hold that this does not apply when the State orders a person to
kill; on this ground among others, the New York School Board
recently refused to sanction the teaching of the Decalogue in
schools.
A third objection is that it may be asked how the moral rules
are known. The usual answer, historically, is that they are
known by revelation and tradition. But these are extra-philosophical
sources of knowledge. The philosopher cannot
but observe that there have been many revelations, and that it
is not clear why he should adopt one rather than another. To
this it may be replied that conscience is a personal revelation
to each individual, and invariably tells him what is right and
what is wrong. The difficulty of this view is that conscience
changes from age to age. Most people nowadays consider it
wrong to burn a man alive for disagreeing with them in metaphysics,
but formerly this was held to be a highly meritorious
act, provided it was done in the interests of the right metaphysics.
No one who has studied the history of moral ideas
can regard conscience as invariably right. Thus we are driven
to abandon the attempt to define virtue by means of a set of
rules of conduct.
There is, however, another form of the view that virtue
consists in obedience to authority. This may be called “the
administrator’s ethic”. A Roman or Anglo-Indian pro-consul
would define virtue as obedience to the moral code of the community
to which a man happens to belong. No matter how
moral codes may differ, a man should always obey that of his
own time and place and creed. A Mohammedan, for instance,
would not be regarded as wicked for practising polygamy, but
an Englishman would, even if he lived in a Mohammedan
country. This view makes social conformity the essence of
virtue; or, as with Hegel, regards virtue as obedience to the
government. The difficulty of such theories is that they make
it impossible to apply ethical predicates to authority: we cannot
find any meaning for the statement that a custom is good
or that the government is bad. The view is appropriate to
despots and their willing slaves; it cannot survive in a progressive
democracy.
We come a little nearer to a correct view when we define
right conduct by the motive or state of mind of the agent. According
to this theory, acts inspired by certain emotions are
good, and those inspired by certain other emotions are bad.
Mystics hold this view, and have accordingly a certain contempt
for the letter of the law. Broadly speaking, it would be held
that acts inspired by love are good, and those inspired by hate
are bad. In practice, I hold this view to be right; but philosophically
I regard it as deducible from something more fundamental.
All the theories we have hitherto considered are opposed
to those which judge the rightness or wrongness of conduct by
its consequences. Of these the most famous is the utilitarian
philosophy, which maintained that happiness is the good, and
that we ought to act so as to maximise the balance of happiness
over unhappiness in the world. I should not myself regard
happiness as an adequate definition of the good, but I should
agree that conduct ought to be judged by its consequences. I
do not mean, of course, that in every practical exigency of daily
life we should attempt to think out the results of this or that
line of conduct, because, if we did, the opportunity for action
would often be past before our calculations were finished. But
I do mean that the received moral code, in so far as it is taught
in education and embodied in public opinion or the criminal
law, should be carefully examined in each generation, to see
whether it still serves to achieve desirable ends, and, if not, in
what respects it needs to be amended. The moral code, in
short, like the legal code, should adapt itself to changing circumstances,
keeping the public good always as its motive. If
so, we have to consider in what the public good consists.
According to this view, “right conduct” is not an autonomous
concept, but means “conduct calculated to produce desirable
results”. It will be right, let us say, to act so as to make people
happy and intelligent, but wrong to act so as to make them unhappy
and stupid. We have to ask ourselves how we can discover
what constitutes the ends of right conduct.
There is a view, advocated, e.g. by Dr. G. E. Moore, that
“good” is an indefinable notion, and that we know a priori
certain general propositions about the kinds of things that
are good on their own account. Such things as happiness,
knowledge, appreciation of beauty, are known to be good, according
to Dr. Moore; it is also known that we ought to act
so as to create what is good and prevent what is bad. I
formerly held this view myself, but I was led to abandon it,
partly by Mr. Santayana’s Winds of Doctrine. I now think
that good and bad are derivative from desire. I do not mean
quite simply that the good is the desired, because men’s desires
conflict, and “good” is, to my mind, mainly a social concept,
designed to find an issue from this conflict. The conflict, however,
is not only between the desires of different men, but between
incompatible desires of one man at different times, or
even at the same time, and even if he is solitary, like Robinson
Crusoe. Let us see how the concept of “good” emerges from
reflection or conflicts of desires.
We will begin with Robinson Crusoe. In him there will be
conflicts, for example, between fatigue and hunger, particularly
between fatigue at one time and foreseen hunger at another.
The effort which he will require in order to work when he is
tired with a view to providing food on another occasion has all
the characteristics of what is called a moral effort: we think
better of a man who makes the effort than of one who does not,
and the making of it requires self-control. For some reason,
this sort of thing is called, not morals, but “morale”; the distinction,
however, seems to me illusory. Robinson Crusoe is
bound to realise that he has many desires, each of which is
stronger at one time than at another, and that, if he acts always
upon the one that is strongest at the moment, he may defeat
others that are stronger in the long run. So far, only intelligence
is involved; but one may assume that, with the progress
of intelligence, there goes a growing desire for a harmonious
life, i.e. a life in which action is dominated by consistent quasi-permanent
desires. Again: some desires, in addition to the
desire for a harmonious life, are more likely to lead to harmony
then certain other desires. Intellectual curiosity, e.g. affords
a mild diffused satisfaction, whereas drugs provide ecstasy followed
by despair. If we arrive unexpectedly in Robinson
Crusoe’s island and find him studying botany, we shall think
better of him than if we find him dead drunk on his last bottle
of whisky. All this belongs to morals, although it is purely
self-regarding.
When we come to considering men in society, moral questions
become both more important and more difficult, because
conflicts between the desires of different persons are harder to
resolve than internal conflicts among the desires of one person.
There are some distinctions to be made. First, there is the difference
between the point of view of the neutral authority contemplating
a squabble in which it is not interested, and the
point of view of the disputants themselves. Then there is the
distinction between what we wish people to do, and what we
wish them to feel in the way of emotions and desires.
The view of authority everywhere is that squabbles to which
it is not a party are undesirable, but that in the squabbles to
which it is a party virtue consists in promoting the victory of
authority. In the latter respect, it is acting, not as an authority,
but merely as a combination of quarrelsome individuals who
think it more profitable to quarrel with outsiders than with
each other; we will therefore ignore this aspect of authority,
and consider its action only when it is a neutral. In this case,
it aims at preventing quarrels by punishing those who begin
them, or sometimes by punishing both parties. Monsieur Huc,
the Jesuit missionary who wrote a fascinating account of his
travels in China, Tartary, and Tibet about eighty years ago,
relates an amusing conversation he had with a mandarin.
Monsieur Huc had remarked that Chinese justice was dilatory,
expensive, and corrupt. The mandarin explained that it had
been made so in obedience to an Imperial edict, setting forth
that the subjects of the Son of Heaven had become too much
addicted to litigation, and must be led to abandon this practice.
The rescript then proceeded to suggest to magistrates
and judges the desirability of the above defects as a means of
diminishing the number of law-suits. It appeared that the
Emperor’s commands had been faithfully obeyed in this respect—more
so than in some others.
Another method adopted by public authorities to prevent
the impulse towards internal quarrels is the creation of esprit
de corps, public spirit, patriotism, etc., i.e. a concentration of
quarrelsome impulses or persons outside the group over which
it rules. Such a method, obviously, is partial and external; it
would not be open to a world-wide democratic authority, should
this ever come into existence. Such an authority would have
to adopt better methods of producing harmony; it would also
have a higher claim to the obedience of citizens than some
authorities have at present.
What can we say from the point of view of the disputants
themselves? It is of course obvious that there will be a greater
total satisfaction when two people’s desires harmonise than
when they conflict, but that is not an argument which can be
used to people who in fact hate each other. One can argue
that the one who is going to be beaten would do well to give
way, but each will think that he himself is going to be victorious.
One can argue that there is more happiness to be derived from
love than from hate, but people cannot love to order, and there
is no satisfaction to be derived from an insincere love. Nor is
it always true in an individual case that love brings more happiness
than hate. During and immediately after the war, those
who hated the Germans were happier than those who still regarded
them as human beings, because they could feel that
what was being done served a good purpose. I think, therefore,
that certain departments of morals, and those the most
important, cannot be inculcated from a personal point of view,
but only from the point of view of a neutral authority. That is
why I said that ethics is mainly social.
The attitude of a neutral authority would, it seems to me,
be this: Men desire all sorts of things, and in themselves all
desires, taken singly, are on a level, i.e. there is no reason to
prefer the satisfaction of one to the satisfaction of another.
But when we consider not a single desire but a group of desires,
there is this difference, that sometimes all the desires in
a group can be satisfied, whereas in other cases the satisfaction
of some of the desires in the group is incompatible with that
of others. If A and B desire to marry each other, both can
have what they want, but if they desire to kill each other, at
most one can succeed, unless they are Kilkenny cats. Therefore
the former pair of desires is socially preferable to the
latter. Now our desires are a product of three factors: native
disposition, education, and present circumstances. The first
factor is difficult to deal with at present, for lack of knowledge.
The third is brought into operation by means of the criminal
law, economic motives, and social praise and blame, which make
it on the whole to the interest of an individual in a community
to promote the interests of the dominant group in that community.
But this is done in an external way, not by creating
good desires, but by producing a conflict of greed and fear in
which it is hoped that fear will win. The really vital method
is education, in the large sense in which it includes care of the
body and habit-formation in the first few years. By means of
education, men’s desires can be changed, so that they act spontaneously
in a social fashion. To force a man to curb his desires,
as we do by the criminal law, is not nearly so satisfactory
as to cause him genuinely to feel the desires which promote
socially harmonious conduct.
And this brings me to the last point with which we are concerned,
namely, the distinction between feeling and doing. No
doubt, from a social point of view the important thing is what
a man does, but it is impossible to cause a man to do the right
things consistently unless he has the right desires. And the
right desires cannot be produced merely by praising them or
by desiring to have them; the technique of moral education is
not one of exhortation or explicit moral instruction.
We can now state the ethic at which we have arrived in
abstract terms. Primarily, we call something “good” when we
desire it, and “bad” when we have an aversion from it. But
our use of words is more constant than our desires, and therefore
we shall continue to call a thing good even at moments
when we are not actually desiring it, just as we always call
grass green though it sometimes looks yellow. And the laudatory
associations of the word “good” may generate a desire
which would not otherwise exist: we may want to eat caviare
merely because we are told that it is good. Moreover the use
of words is social, and therefore we learn only to call a thing
good, except in rare circumstances, if most of the people we
associate with are also willing to call it good. Thus “good”
comes to apply to things desired by the whole of a social group.
It is evident, therefore, that there can be more good in a world
where the desires of different individuals harmonise than in one
where they conflict. The supreme moral rule should, therefore,
be: Act so as to produce harmonious rather than discordant
desires. This rule will apply wherever a man’s influence extends:
within himself, in his family, his city, his country, even
the world as a whole, if he is able to influence it.
There will be two main methods to this end: first, to produce
social institutions under which the interests of different
individuals or groups conflict as little as possible; second, to
educate individuals in such a way that their desires can be harmonised
with each other and with the desires of their neighbours.
As to the first method, I shall say nothing further, since
the questions that arise belong to politics and economics. As
to the second, the important period is the formative period of
childhood, during which there should be health, happiness, freedom,
and a gradual growth of self-discipline through opportunities
for difficult achievement of a sort which is useful and
yet satisfies the impulse towards mastery of the environment.
The desire for power, which is present in most people and
strongest in the most vigorous, should be directed towards
power over things rather than over people.
It is clear that, if harmonious desires are what we should
seek, love is better than hate, since, when two people love each
other, both can be satisfied, whereas when they hate each other
one at most can achieve the object of his desire. It is obvious
also that desire for knowledge is to be encouraged, since the
knowledge that a man acquires is not obtained by taking it
away from some one else; but a desire for (say) large landed
estates can only be satisfied in a small minority. Desire for
power over other people is a potent source of conflict, and is
therefore to be discouraged; a respect for the liberty of others
is one of the things that ought to be developed by the right
kind of education. The impulse towards personal achievement
ought to go into such things as artistic creation or scientific discovery
or the promotion of useful institutions—in a word, into
activities that are creative rather than possessive. Knowledge,
which may do positive harm where men’s desires conflict (for
example, by showing how to make war more deadly), will have
only good results in a world where men’s desires harmonise,
since it tends to show how their common desires are to be
realised.
The conclusion may be summed up in a single phrase: The
good life is one inspired by love and guided by knowledge.11
11 Cf. What I Believe, by the present author—To-day and To-morrow Series.
CHAPTER XXIII SOME GREAT PHILOSOPHIES OF THE PAST
Our discussions, hitherto, have been concerned very largely
with Man, but Man on his own account is not the true subject-matter
of philosophy. What concerns philosophy is the universe
as a whole; Man demands consideration solely as the
instrument by means of which we acquire knowledge of the
universe. And that is why it is human beings as capable of
knowledge that have concerned us mainly in past chapters,
rather than as centres of will or of emotion. We are not in the
mood proper to philosophy so long as we are interested in the
world only as it affects human beings; the philosophic spirit
demands an interest in the world for its own sake. But since
we apprehend the world through our own senses, and think
about it with our own intellect, the picture that we acquire is
inevitably coloured by the personal medium through which it
comes to us. Consequently we have to study this medium,
namely ourselves, in order to find out, if we can, what elements
in our picture of the world are contributed by us, and what
elements we may accept as representative of outside fact.
Previous chapters have studied cognition, both as an outwardly
observable reaction, and as it appears to introspection. In the
chapters that remain, we shall be concerned with what we can
know about the universe, in view of the nature of the instrument
that we have to employ. I do not think we can know as
much as many philosophers of the past have supposed, but I
think it is worth while to have in our minds an outline of their
systems. I shall therefore begin by setting forth a few typical
philosophical constructions of earlier centuries.
Modern philosophy is generally taken as beginning with
Descartes, who flourished in the first half of the seventeenth
century. We have already had occasion, in Chapter XVI, to
consider his argument “I think, therefore, I am”, but now we
will deal with him somewhat more generally. He inaugurated
two movements, one in metaphysics, one in theory of knowledge.
In metaphysics, he emphasised the gulf between mind and matter,
or between soul and body; in theory of knowledge he advocated
a critical scrutiny of premises. These two movements
had different histories, each of them interesting. The science
of dynamics was rapidly developing in Descartes’ time, and
seemed to show that the motions of matter could be calculated
mathematically, given sufficient data. As the motions of matter
include our bodily acts, even speaking and writing, it seemed
as if the consequence must be a materialistic theory of human
behaviour. This consequence, however, was distasteful to most
philosophers, and they therefore invented various ways of escaping
from it. Descartes himself thought that the will could
have certain direct physical effects. He thought that the brain
contains a fluid called the “animal spirits”, and that the will
could influence the direction of its motion, though not the
velocity. In this way he was still able to hold that the will is
effective in the manner in which common sense supposes it to
be. But this view did not fit in at all well with the rest of his
philosophy. He held that, apart from the Supreme Substance,
namely God, there are two created substances, mind and matter;
that the essence of mind is thought, and that the essence
of matter is extension. He made these two substances so different
that interaction between them became difficult to understand,
and his followers decided that there is never any effect
either of mind on matter or of matter on mind.
The motives for this development were various; perhaps
the most important was the development of physics immediately
after Descartes’ time. A law was discovered called the
“conservation of momentum”. This states that, if a system
of bodies is in any sort of motion, and is free from outside influences,
the amount of motion in any direction is constant.
This showed that the kind of action of the will on the “animal
spirits” which Descartes had assumed was contrary to the principles
of dynamics. It seemed to follow that mind cannot
influence matter, and it was inferred that matter cannot influence
mind, since the two were regarded as co-equal substances.
It was held that each goes it own way, according to its
own laws. The fact that our arm moves when we will it to
move was regarded as analogous to the fact that two perfectly
accurate clocks strike at the same moment, though neither has
any effect upon the other. The series of mental events and the
series of physical events were parallel, each going at the same
rate as the other, therefore they continued to synchronise, in
spite of their independence of each other.
Spinoza sought to make this parallelism less mysterious by
denying that there are two separate substances, mind and matter.
He maintained that there is only one substance, of which
thought and extension are attributes. But there seemed still
no good reason why the events belonging to the two attributes
should develop along parallel lines. Spinoza is in many ways
one of the greatest philosophers, but his greatness is rather
ethical than metaphysical. Accordingly he was regarded by
contemporaries as a profound metaphysician but a very wicked
man.
The notion of the impossibility of interaction between mind
and body has persisted down to our own day. One still hears
of “psychophysical parallelism”, according to which to every
state of the brain a state of mind corresponds and vice versa,
without either acting on the other. This whole point of view,
though not exactly that of Descartes, derives from him. It
has a number of sources, religious, metaphysical, and scientific;
but there seems no ground whatever for regarding it as true.
Take, first, the rigid determinism of traditional physics,
which was to have been avoided. Spinoza rightly perceived
that this could not be avoided by such methods, and therefore
accepted determinism in the psychical as in the physical realm.
If everything we say is determined by physical causes, our
thoughts are only free when we tell lies: so long as we say
what we think, our thoughts also can be inferred from physics.
The philosophy which I advocate escapes this consequence in
several ways. In the first place, causality does not involve
compulsion, but only a law of sequence: if physical and mental
events run parallel, either may with equal justice be regarded
as causing the other, and there is no sense in speaking of them
as causally independent. Thus the Cartesian dualism does not
have the pleasant consequences which were intended. In the
second place, modern physics has become less deterministic than
the physics of the past few centuries. We do not know, e.g.
what makes a radio-active atom explode or an electron jump
from a larger to a smaller orbit. In these matters we only
know statistical averages.
Take next the view that mind and matter are quite disparate.
This we have criticised already. It rests upon a notion that
we know much more about matter than we do, and in particular
upon the belief that the space of physics can be identified with
the space of sensible experience. This belief is absent in Leibniz,
who, however, never quite realised what his own view was.
It is not absent in Kant, who realised that the space of sensible
experience is subjective, and inferred that the space of physics
is subjective. Since Kant, no one seems to have thought clearly
about space until Einstein and Minkowski. The separation of
physical and sensible space, logically carried out, shows the
groundlessness of traditional views about mind and matter.
This part of Descartes’ philosophy, therefore, though it accelerated
the progress of physics, must be regarded as metaphysically
an aberration.
The other part of Descartes’ philosophy, namely, the emphasis
upon methodical doubt, and consequently upon theory of
knowledge, has been more fruitful. The beginning of a philosophic
attitude is the realisation that we do not know as much
as we think we do, and to this Descartes contributed notably.
We have seen that he set to work to doubt all he could, but
found he could not doubt his own existence, which he therefore
took as the starting-point of his constructive system. He supposed
that the most certain fact in the world is “I think”. This
was unfortunate, since it gave a subjective bias to modern
philosophy. As a matter of fact, “I” seems to be only a string
of events, each of which separately is more certain than the
whole. And “think” is a word which Descartes accepted as
indefinable, but which really covers complicated relations between
events. When is an event a “thought”? Is there some
intrinsic characteristic which makes it a thought? Descartes
would say yes, and so would most philosophers. I should say
no. Take, e.g. a visual and an auditory sensation. Both are
“thoughts” in Descartes’ sense, but what have they in common?
Two visual sensations have an indefinable common quality, viz.
that which makes them visual. Two auditory sensations likewise.
But a visual and an auditory sensation have in common,
if I am not mistaken, no intrinsic property, but a certain capacity
for being known without inference. This amounts to saying
that they are mnemic causes of a certain kind of event, called a
cognition, and that they have moreover, a certain formal similarity
to the cognition which they cause. Therefore, instead
of taking the general “I think” as our basis, we ought to take
the particular occurrences which are known without inference,
among which sensations (or rather “perceptions”) will be included.
These occurrences, as we have already seen, may be
regarded with equal justice as physical and mental: they are
parts of chains of physical causation, and they have mnemic
effects which are cognitions. The former fact makes us call
them physical, the latter mental, both quite truly. It is the particular
events which are certain, not the “I think” which Descartes
made the basis of his philosophy. It is not correct to
regard the ultimate certainties as “subjective”, except in the
sense that they are events in that part of space-time in which
our body is—and our mind also, I should say.
A new turn was given to the Cartesian type of metaphysics
by Leibniz (1646–1716), who, like Descartes, was supremely
eminent both in mathematics and in philosophy. Leibniz rejected
the view that there is only one substance, as Spinoza held,
or only two other than God, as the orthodox followers of
Descartes maintained. He also rejected the dualism of mind
and matter, holding that there are innumerable substances all
in a greater or less degree mental, and none in any degree material.
He maintained that every substance is immortal, and
that there is no interaction between one substance and another—this
last being a view derived from the Cartesian independence
of mind and matter. He also extended to his many substances
the belief in parallelism which had existed for the
two substances of the Cartesians. He called his substances
“monads”, and maintained that every monad mirrors the universe,
and develops along lines which correspond, point by
point, with those along which every other monad is developing.
A man’s soul or mind is a single monad, while his body is a
collection of monads, each mental in some degree, but less so
than the monad which is his soul. Inferior monads mirror the
world in a more confused way than higher ones do, but there
is some element of confusion in the perceptions of even the
most superior monads. Every monad mirrors the world from
its own point of view, and the difference between points of view
is compared to a difference of perspective. “Matter” is a confused
way of perceiving a number of monads; if we perceived
clearly, we should see that there is no such thing as matter.
Leibniz’s system had great merits and great demerits. The
theory that “matter” is a confused way of perceiving something
non-material was an advance upon anything to be found in his
predecessors. He had, though only semi-consciously, the distinction
between physical and perceptual space: there is space
in each monad’s picture of the world, and there is also the
assemblage or pattern of “points of view”. The latter corresponds
to what I have called “physical space”, the former to
“perceptual space”. Leibniz maintained, as against Newton,
that space and time consists only of relations—a view which
has achieved a definitive triumph in Einstein’s theory of relativity.
The weak point of his system was what he called the
“pre-established harmony”, in virtue of which all the monads
(so to speak) kept step, in spite of the fact that they were
“windowless” and never acted upon each other. Perception,
for Leibniz, was not an effect of the object perceived, but a
modification arising in the perceiving monad and running
parallel with what was happening in the perceived object.
This view would never have seemed plausible but for the anterior
Cartesian theory of the mutual independence of mind
and matter. And if Leibniz himself developed, as he believed,
in complete independence of all other created things, it is not
clear what good reasons he could have had for believing in the
existence of anything except himself, since, by his own theory,
his experiences would remain unchanged if everything else were
annihilated. In fact, he was only able to refute this possibility
by bringing in theological considerations, which, whether valid
or not, are out of place in philosophy. For this reason, his
doctrines, ingenious as they were, found little acceptance in
France and England, though in Germany they prevailed, in a
modified form, until the time of Kant.
The systems of Descartes, Spinoza and Leibniz have one
very important characteristic in common, namely, that they all
depend upon the category of “substance”. This is a concept
which has developed out of the common-sense notion of
“thing”. A “substance” is that which has qualities, and is in
general supposed to be indestructible, though it is difficult to
see why. It acquired its hold over metaphysicians partly because
both matter and the soul were held to be immortal, and
partly through a hasty transference to reality of ideas derived
from grammar. We say “Peter is running”, “Peter is talking”,
“Peter is eating”, and so on. We think that there is one entity,
Peter, who does all these things, and that none of them could be
done unless there were someone to do them, but that Peter
might quite well do none of them. Similarly we assign qualities
to Peter: we say he is wise and tall and blond and so on. All
these qualities, we feel, cannot subsist by themselves in the void,
but only when there is a subject to which they belong; but Peter
would remain Peter even if he became foolish and short and
dyed his hair. Thus Peter, who is regarded as a “substance”,
is self-subsistent as compared with his qualities and states, and
he preserves his substantial identity throughout all sorts of
changes. Similarly in the material world an atom is supposed
(or rather was supposed until recently) to preserve its identity
throughout all time, however it might move and whatever combinations
it might form with other atoms. The concept of
“motion”, upon which all physics seemed to depend, was only
strictly applicable to a substance which preserves its identity
while changing its spatial relations to other substances; thus
“substance” acquired an even firmer hold upon physics than
upon metaphysics.
Nevertheless, the notion of “substance”, at any rate in any
sense involving permanence, must be shut out from our
thoughts if we are to achieve a philosophy in any way adequate
either to modern physics or to modern psychology. Modern
physics, both in the theory of relativity and in the Heisenberg-Schrödinger
theories of atomic structure, has reduced “matter”
to a system of events, each of which lasts only for a very short
time. To treat an electron or a proton as a single entity has
become as wrong-headed as it would be to treat the population
of London or New York as a single entity. And in psychology,
equally, the “ego” has disappeared as an ultimate conception,
and the unity of a personality has become a peculiar causal
nexus among a series of events. In this respect, grammar and
ordinary language have been shown to be bad guides to metaphysics.
A great book might be written showing the influence
of syntax on philosophy; in such a book, the author could trace
in detail the influence of the subject-predicate structure of sentences
upon European thought, more particularly in this matter
of “substance”. And it must be understood that the same
reasons which lead to the rejection of substance lead also to the
rejection of “things” and “persons” as ultimately valid concepts.
I say “I sit at my table”, but I ought to say: “One of a
certain string of events causally connected in the sort of way
that makes the whole series that is called a ‘person’ has a certain
spatial relation to one of another string of events causally
connected with each other in a different way and having a
spatial configuration of the sort denoted by the word ‘table’”.
I do not say so, because life is too short; but that is what I
should say if I were a true philosopher. Apart from any other
grounds, the inadequacy of the notion of “substance” would
lead us to regard the philosophy of Descartes, Spinoza, and
Leibniz as incompatible with modern science. There is of
course in all three, a great deal that does not depend upon
“substance”, and that still has value; but “substance” supplied
the framework and a good deal of the argumentation, and
therefore introduces a fatal defect into these three great
systems.
I come now to the triad of British philosophers, Locke,
Berkeley, and Hume—English, Irish, and Scotch respectively.
Perhaps from patriotic bias or from community of national
temperament, I find more that I can accept, and regard as still
important, in the writings of these three than in the philosophy
of their continental predecessors. Their constructions are less
ambitious, their arguments more detailed, and their methods
more empirical; in all these respects they show more kinship
with the modern scientific outlook. On the other hand, Locke
and Hume, if not Berkeley, approach philosophy too exclusively
from the side of psychology, and are concerned to study Man
rather than the universe.
Locke was a contemporary and friend of Newton; his great
book, An Essay concerning Human Understanding, was published
at almost the same moment as Newton’s Principia. His
influence has been enormous, greater, in fact, than his abilities
would seem to warrant; and this influence was not only philosophical,
but quite as much political and social. He was one
of the creators of eighteenth century liberalism: democracy,
religious toleration, freedom of economic enterprise, educational
progress, all owe much to him. The English Revolution of
1688 embodied his ideas; the American Revolution of 1776
and the French Revolution of 1789 expressed what had grown,
in a century, out of his teaching. And in all these movements,
philosophy and politics went hand in hand. Thus the practical
success of Locke’s ideas has been extraordinary.
When, knowing all this, one comes to read Locke himself,
it is difficult to resist a feeling of disappointment. He
is sensible, enlightened, minute, but uninspired and (to
moderns) uninspiring. One has to remember that his contemporaries
found common sense exhilarating after a century
of wars of religion and a long struggle with obscurantism.
Locke combatted the doctrine of “innate ideas”, according to
which we learned only certain things by experience, but possessed
our abstract knowledge in virtue of our congenital
constitution. He regarded the mind at birth as a wax tablet,
upon which experience proceeded to write. Undoubtedly he
was, in this matter, more in the right than his opponents, although
the terms in which the controversy was waged are not
such as a modern could employ. We should say that the innate
apparatus of man consists of “reflexes” rather than “ideas”;
also that our sense-organs, our glands, and our muscles lead to
responses of certain kinds, in which our own organisation plays
a part of the same importance as that played by the external
stimulus. The element in our knowledge-responses that corresponds
to our own bodily organisation might, perhaps, be
regarded as representing what Locke’s opponents meant by
“innate”. But it does not represent this at all accurately so
far as our feelings towards it are concerned. The “innate”
ideas were the ideas to be proud of; they embraced pure
mathematics, natural theology, and ethics. But nobody is proud
of sneezing or coughing. And when Locke tried to show, in
detail, how our knowledge is generated by experience, he was
liberating philosophy from a great deal of useless lumber, even
if his own doctrines were not altogether such as we can now
accept.
Locke used his own principles only in ways consistent with
common sense; Berkeley and Hume both pushed them to
paradoxical conclusions. The philosophy of Berkeley, to my
mind, has not received quite the attention and respect that it
deserves—not that I agree with it, but that I think it ingenious
and harder to refute than is often supposed. Berkeley, as
everyone knows, denied the reality of matter, and maintained
that everything is mental. In the former respect I agree with
him, though not for his reasons; in the latter respect, I think
his argument unsound and his conclusion improbable, though
not certainly false. However, I will leave the development of
my own views to a later chapter, and confine myself to Berkeley’s
argument.
Berkeley contended that when, for example, you “see a
tree”, all that you really know to be happening is in you, and
is mental. The colour that you see, as Locke had already
argued, does not belong to the physical world, but is an effect
upon you, produced, according to Locke, by a physical stimulus.
Locke held that the purely spatial properties of perceived objects
really belong to the objects, whereas such things as
colour, softness, sound, etc., are effects in us. Berkeley went
further, and argued that the spatial properties of perceived
objects are no exception. Thus the object perceived is composed
entirely of “mental” constituents, and there is no reason
to believe in the existence of anything not mental. He did not
wish to admit that a tree ceases to exist when we do not look
at it, so he maintained that it acquires permanence through
being an idea in the mind of God. It is still only an “idea”,
but not one whose existence depends upon the accidents of our
perceptions.
The real objection to Berkeley’s view is rather physical than
metaphysical. Light and sound take time to travel from their
sources to the percipient, and one must suppose that something
is happening along the route by which they travel. What is happening
along the route is presumably not “mental”, for,
as we have seen, “mental” events are those that have peculiar
mnemic effects which are connected with living tissue. Therefore,
although Berkeley is right in saying that the events we
know immediately are mental, it is highly probable that he
is wrong as to the events which we infer in places where
there are no living bodies. In saying this, however, we are
anticipating the results of a fuller discussion in a later
chapter.
Hume, proceeding from a starting-point essentially similar
to that of Locke and Berkeley, arrived at conclusions so
sceptical that all subsequent philosophers have shied away from
them. He denied the existence of the Self, questioned the
validity of induction, and doubted whether causal laws could
be applied to anything except our own mental processes. He is
one of the very few philosophers not concerned to establish
any positive conclusions. To a great extent, I think, we must
admit the validity of his reasons for refusing to feel the usual
certainties. As regards the Self, he was almost certainly right.
As we have already argued, a person is not a single entity, but
a series of events linked together by peculiar causal laws. As
regards induction, the question is very difficult, and I shall
devote a subsequent chapter to it. As regards causal laws, the
question, as we shall find later, is the same as the question of
induction. On both points Hume’s doubts are not to be lightly
dismissed.
The usual modern criticism of Locke, Berkeley, and Hume
is that they were unduly “atomistic”. They thought of the mind
as a collection of “ideas”, each as hard and separate as a billiard-ball.
They had not the conception of continuous change
or of integral processes; their causal units were too small. As
we have already seen in connection with Gestaltpsychologie and
with sentences, the causal unit is often a configuration which
cannot be broken up without losing its distinctive causal
properties. In this sense, it is true that the traditional British
philosophy was too atomistic. But in another sense I do not
think it is true, and I think much modern philosophy is confused
on this point. Although a configuration may lose its
causal properties when broken up into its elements, it nevertheless
does consist of these elements related in certain ways;
analysis into “atoms” is perfectly valid, so long as it is not
assumed that the causal efficacy of the whole is compounded
out of the separate effects of the separate atoms. It is because
I hold this view that I call the philosophy which I advocate
“logical atomism”. And to this extent I regard Locke, Berkeley,
and Hume as in the right as against their modern critics.
But this also is a topic which will be resumed in a later chapter.
Hume’s criticism of the notion of cause was what led Kant
to his new departure. Kant’s philosophy is difficult and obscure,
and philosophers still dispute as to what he meant.
Those who disagree with him are held by his supporters to have
misunderstood him; I must therefore warn the reader that
what follows is my view of what he meant, and that there is
no agreed view.
Kant maintained that, in virtue of our mental constitution,
we deal with the raw material of sense-impressions by means
of certain “categories” and by arranging it in space and time.
Both the categories and the space-time arrangement are supplied
by us, and do not belong to the world except as known
by us. But since our mental constitution is a constant datum,
all phenomena as known will be spatio-temporal and will conform
to the categories. Among the latter “cause” is the most
important. Thus although there may be no cause in the world
as it is in itself (a point on which Kant was inconsistent in the
interest of morals), yet phenomena, i.e. things as they seem to
us, will always have other phenomena as their causes. And
although there is no time in the real world, things as they
appear to us will be some earlier and some later. Space, again
is supplied by us, and therefore geometry can be known a priori,
without our having to study the outer world. Kant thought
that Euclidean geometry was quite certainly true, although it
could not be proved by logic alone, since Euclid’s axioms could
be denied without self-contradiction.
It was on this question of geometry that the weakness of
Kant’s system first became obvious. It was found that we
have no grounds for regarding Euclidean geometry as quite
true. Since Einstein, we have positive grounds for regarding
it as not quite true. It appears that geometry is just as empirical
as geography. We depend upon observation if we want
to know whether the sum of the angles of a triangle is two
right angles just as much as if we want to know how much
land there is in the western hemisphere.
With regard to the “categories” there are equally great
difficulties. Let us take “cause” as our illustration. We see
lightning, and then we hear thunder; as phenomena, our seeing
and hearing are connected as cause and effect. But we must
not—if we are to take the subjectivity of “cause” seriously—suppose
that our seeing or our hearing has an outside cause.
In that case, we have no reason to suppose that there is anything
outside ourselves. Nay, more: what really happens when
we see is not, according to Kant, what we perceive by introspection;
what really happens is something without a date, without
a position in space, without causes and without effects. Thus
we do not know ourselves any better than we know the outside
world. Space and time and the categories interpose a mirage
of illusion which cannot be penetrated at any point. As an
answer to Hume’s scepticism, this seems a somewhat unsuccessful
effort. And Kant himself, later, in the Critique of Practical
Reason, demolished much of his own edifice, because he thought
that ethics at least must have validity in the “real” world.
This part of his philosophy, however, is usually ignored by his
followers or apologetically minimised.
Kant gave a new turn to an old philosophical controversy,
as to how far our knowledge is a priori and how far it is based
on experience. Kant admitted that without experience we
could know nothing, and that what we know is only valid within
the realm of experience. But he held that the general framework
of our knowledge is a priori in the sense that it is not
proved by means of particular facts of experience, but represents
the conditions to which phenomena have to conform in
order to be capable of being experienced. Before his day, the
tendency had been for continental philosophers to regard almost
everything as a priori while British philosophers regarded almost
everything as empirical. But both sides thought that what
is a priori can be proved by logic, at least in theory, whereas
Kant held that mathematics is a priori and yet “synthetic”, i.e.
not capable of being proved by logic. In this he was misled
by geometry. Euclidean geometry, considered as true, is
“synthetic” but not a priori; considered merely as deducing
consequences from premisses, it is a priori but not “synthetic”.
The geometry of the actual world, as required by engineers, is
empirical; the geometry of pure mathematics, which does not
inquire into the truth of the axioms but merely shows their
implications, is an exercise in pure logic.
It should be said, however, that, if the correct analysis of
knowledge bears any resemblance at all to that which has been
suggested in this book, the whole controversy between empiricists
and apriorists becomes more or less unreal. All beliefs
are caused by external stimuli; when they are as particular as
the stimuli they are of the sort which an empiricist might regard
as proved by experience, but when they are more general difficulties
arise. A foreigner arrives in America and sees the
immigration officials, who lead him to the generalisation that
all Americans are rude; but a few minutes later the porter upsets
this induction in the hope of a tip. Thus sometimes a
given belief will be caused by one event and destroyed by
another. If all the events in a man’s life, so far as they affect
the belief in question, are such as to cause it, he counts the
belief true. The more general a belief is, the more events
are relevant to it, and therefore the more difficult it is for it
to be such as a man will long consider true. Roughly speaking,
the beliefs which count as a priori will be those which well
might have been upset by subsequent events, but in fact were
confirmed. Here as elsewhere we are driven to the view that
theory of knowledge is not so fundamental as it has been considered
since Kant.
There is one more traditional controversy which I wish to
consider, namely, that between monists and pluralists. Is the
universe one, or is it many? If many, how intimately are they
interconnected? The monistic view is very old: it is already
complete in Parmenides (fifth century B.C.). It is fully developed
in Spinoza, Hegel, and Bradley. The pluralistic view,
on the other hand, is found in Heraclitus, the atomists, Leibniz,
and the British empiricists. For the sake of definiteness, let us
take the monistic view as found in Bradley, who is in the main
a follower of Hegel. He maintains that every judgment consists
in assigning a predicate to Reality as a whole: the whole is
the subject of every predicate. Suppose you start by saying
“Tommy has a cold in the head”. This may not seem to be a
statement about the universe as a whole, but according to
Bradley it is. If I may be allowed to set forth his argument
in popular language which his followers might resent, I should
put it something like this: First of all, who is Tommy? He
is a person with a certain nature, distinguished from other
persons by that nature; he may resemble others in many respects,
but not in all, so that you cannot really explain who
Tommy is unless you set forth all his characteristics. But when
you try to do this, you are taken beyond Tommy: he is characterised
by relations to his environment. He is affectionate
or rebellious or thirsty, noisy or quiet, and so on; all of these
qualities involve his relations to others. If you try to define
Tommy without mentioning anything outside him, you will find
this quite impossible; therefore he is not a self-subsistent being,
but an unsubstantial fragment of the world. The same thing
applies even more obviously to his nose and his cold. How
do you know he has a cold? Because material substances of
a certain kind pass from his nose to his handkerchief, which
would not be possible if he alone existed. But now, when you
take in the environment with a view to defining Tommy and
his nose and his cold, you find that you cannot define his immediate
environment without taking account of its environment,
and so on, until at last you have been forced to include the
whole world. Therefore Tommy’s cold is in reality a property
of the world, since nothing short of the world is sufficiently
substantial to have properties.
We may put the argument in a more abstract form. Everything
which is part of the world is constituted, in part, by its
relations to other things; but relations cannot be real. Bradley’s
argument against relations is as follows. First he argues
that, if there are relations, there must be qualities between
which they hold. This part of the argument need not detain us.
He then proceeds:
“But how the relation can stand to the qualities is, on the
other side, unintelligible. If it is nothing to the qualities, then
they are not related at all; and, if so, as we saw, they have
ceased to be qualities, and their relation is a nonentity. But if it
is to be something to them, then clearly we shall require a new-connecting
relation. For the relation hardly can be the mere
adjective of one or both of its terms; or, at least, as such it
seems indefensible. And, being something itself, if it does not
itself bear a relation to the terms, in what intelligible way will
it succeed in being anything to them? But here again we are
hurried off into the eddy of a hopeless process, since we are
forced to go on finding new relations without end. The links
are united by a link, and this bond of union is a link which
also has two ends; and these require each a fresh link to connect
them with the old. The problem is to find how the relation
can stand to its qualities, and this problem is insoluble.”
I cannot deal adequately with this argument without abstruse
technicalities which would be out of place. I will, however,
point out what seems to me the essential error. Bradley conceives
a relation as something just as substantial as its terms,
and not radically different in kind. The analogy of the chain
with links should make us suspicious, since it clearly proves, if
it is valid, that chains are impossible, and yet, as a fact, they
exist. There is not a word in his argument which would not
apply to physical chains. The successive links are united not by
another link, but by a spatial relation. I think Bradley has
been misled, unconsciously, by a circumstance to which I alluded
in an earlier chapter, namely, the fact that the word for a relation
is as substantial as the words for its terms. Suppose
A and B are two events, and A precedes B. In the proposition
“A precedes B”, the word “precedes” is just as substantial as
the words “A” and “B”. The relation of the two events A and
B is represented, in language, by the time or space order of the
three words “A”, “precedes”, and “B”. But this order is an
actual relation, not a word for relation. The first step in
Bradley’s regress does actually have to be taken in giving verbal
expression to a relation, and the word for a relation does have
to be related to the words for its terms. But this is a linguistic,
not a metaphysical, fact, and the regress does not have to go
any further.
It should be added that, as Bradley himself recognises, his
difficulties break out afresh when he comes to consider the
relation of subject and predicate when a character is assigned
to Reality, and that he is therefore compelled to conclude that
no truth is quite true. A conclusion of this sort, based upon
an extremely abstract argument, makes it natural to suspect
that there is some error in the argument.
Pluralism is the view of science and common sense, and is
therefore to be accepted if the arguments against it are not
conclusive. For my part, I have no doubt whatever that it is
the true view, and that monism is derived from a faulty logic
inspired by mysticism. This logic dominates the philosophy
of Hegel and his followers; it is also the essential basis of
Bergson’s system, although it is seldom mentioned in his writings.
When it is rejected, ambitious metaphysical systems such
as those of the past are seen to be impossible.
CHAPTER XXIV TRUTH AND FALSEHOOD
The question of truth and falsehood has been wrapped in unnecessary
mystery owing to a number of causes. In the first
place, people wish to think that their beliefs are more apt to be
true than false, so that they seek a theory that will show that
truth is normal and falsehood more or less accidental. In the
second place, people are very vague as to what they mean by
“belief” or “judgment”, though persuaded that they know
beliefs or judgments to be the objects to which the predicates
“true” or “false” apply. In the third place, there is a tendency
to use “truth” with a big T in the grand sense, as something
noble and splendid and worthy of adoration. This gets people
into a frame of mind in which they become unable to think.
But just as the grave-diggers in Hamlet became familiar with
skulls, so logicians become familiar with truth. “The hand of
little employment hath the daintier sense,” says Hamlet.
Therefore it is not from the logician that awe before truth is
to be expected.
There are two questions in our present subject: (1) What
are the objects to which the predicates “true” and “false”
apply? (2) What is the difference between such as are true
and such as are false? We will begin with the first of these
questions.
Prima facie, “true” and “false” apply to statements, whether
in speech or in writing. By extension, they are supposed to
apply to the beliefs expressed in those statements, and also to
hypotheses which are entertained without being believed or
disbelieved. But let us first consider the truth and falsehood
of statements, following our practice of going as far as we can
with the behaviourists before falling back on introspection.
We considered the meaning of words earlier; now we have to
consider sentences. Of course a sentence may consist of a
single word, or of a wink; but generally it consists of several
words. In that case, it has a meaning which is a function of
the meanings of the separate words and their order. A sentence
which has no meaning is not true or false; thus it is only
sentences as vehicles of a certain sort of meaning that have
truth or falsehood. We have therefore to examine the meaning
of a sentence.
Let us take some very humble example. Suppose you look
in a time-table and find it there stated that a passenger train
leaves King’s Cross for Edinburgh at 10 A.M. What is the
meaning of this assertion? I shudder when I think of its complexity.
If I were to try to develop the theme adequately, I
should be occupied with nothing else till the end of the present
volume, and then I should have only touched the fringe of
the subject. Take first the social aspect: it is not essential that
anybody but the engineer and fireman should travel by the
train, though it is essential that others should be able to travel
by it if they fulfil certain conditions. It is not essential that
the train should reach Edinburgh: the statement remains true
if there is an accident or breakdown on the way. But it is
essential that the management of the railway should intend it
to reach Edinburgh. Take next the physical aspect: it is not
essential, or even possible, that the train should start exactly
at ten; one might perhaps say that it must not start more than
ten seconds before its time or more than fifty seconds after,
but these limits cannot be laid down rigidly. In countries where
unpunctuality is common they would be much wider. Then we
must consider what we mean by “starting”, which no one can
define unless he has learnt the infinitesimal calculus. Then we
consider the definitions of King’s Cross and Edinburgh,
both of which are more or less vague terms. Then we must
consider what is meant by a “train”. Here there will be first
of all complicated legal questions; what constitutes fulfilment
of a railway company’s obligations in the way of running
“trains”? Then there are questions as to the constitution
of matter, since evidently a train is a piece of matter; also of
course there are questions as to methods of estimating Greenwich
time at King’s Cross. Most of the above points have to
do with the meaning of single words, not with the meaning of
the whole sentence. It is obvious that the ordinary mortal
does not trouble about such complications when he uses the
words: to him a word has a meaning very far from precise, and
he does not try to exclude marginal cases. It is the search for
precision that introduces complications. We think we attach
a meaning to the word “man”, but we don’t know whether to
include Pithecanthropus Erectus. To this extent, the meaning
of the word is vague.
As knowledge increases, words acquire meanings which
are more precise and more complex; new words have to be
introduced to express the less complex constituents which have
been discovered. A word is intended to describe something
in the world; at first it does so very badly, but afterwards it
gradually improves. Thus single words embody knowledge,
although they do not make assertions.
In an ideal logical language, there will be words of different
kinds. First, proper names. Of these, however, there are
no examples in actual language. The words which are called
proper names describe collections, which are always defined
by some characteristic; thus assertions about “Peter” are really
about everything that is “Peterish”. To get a true proper
name, we should have to get to a single particular or a set
of particulars defined by enumeration, not by a common quality.
Since we cannot acquire knowledge of actual particulars, the
words we use denote, in the best language we can make, either
adjectives or relations between two or more terms. In addition
to these, there are words indicative of structure: e.g. in
“A is greater than B”, the words “is” and “than” have no
separate meaning, but merely serve to show the “sense” of
the relation “greater”, i.e. that it goes from A to B, not from
B to A.
Strictly speaking, we are still simplifying. True adjectives
and relations will require particulars for their terms; the
sort of adjectives we can know, such as “blue” and “round”,
will not be applicable to particulars. They are therefore
analogous to the adjective “populous” applied to a town.
To say “this town is populous” means “many people live in
this town”. A similar transformation would be demanded
by logic in all the adjectives and relations we can know
empirically. That is to say, no word that we can understand
would occur in a grammatically correct account of the
universe.
Leaving on one side the vagueness and inaccuracy of words,
let us ask ourselves; in what circumstances do we feel convinced
that we know a statement to be true or false as the
case may be? A present statement will be regarded as true
if, e.g. it agrees with recollection or perception; a past statement,
if it raised expectations now confirmed. I do not
mean to say that these are the only grounds upon which we
regard statements as true; I mean that they are simple and
typical, and worth examining. If you say “it was raining this
morning”, I may recollect that it was or that it wasn’t. One
may perhaps say that the words “this morning” are associated
for me with the word “raining” or with the words “not
raining”. According to which occurs, I judge your statement
true or false. If I have neither association, I do not judge
your statement either true or false unless I have material for
an inference; and I do not wish to consider inference yet.
If you say “the lights have gone out”, when I can see the
lights shining, I judge that you speak falsely, because my perception
is associated with the words “lights shining”. If you
say “the lights will go out in a minute”, you produce a certain
familiar kind of tension called “expectation”, and after
a time you produce a judgment that you spoke falsely (if the
lights do not go out). These are the ordinary direct ways
of deciding on the truth or falsehood of statements about past,
present, or future.
It is necessary to distinguish between direct and indirect
grounds for accepting or rejecting statements. Pragmatism
considers only indirect grounds. Broadly speaking, it considers
a statement false when the consequences of accepting
it are unfortunate. But this belongs to the region of inference.
I ask you the way to the station, you tell me wrong, and
I miss my train; I then infer that you told me wrong. But
if you say “the lights are out” when I see them shining, I
reject your statement without inference. In this case, something
in my present circumstances is associated with words
different from yours, and different in ways which I have
learnt to regard as involving incompatibility. The ultimate
test of falsehood is never, so I think, the nature of the consequences
of a belief, but the association between words and
sensible or remembered facts. A belief is “verified” when a
situation arises which gives a feeling of expectedness in connection
with it; it is falsified when the feeling is one of surprise.
But this only applies to beliefs which await some
future contingency for verification or refutation. A belief
which is an immediate reaction to a situation—e.g. when you
are waiting for a race to begin and presently you say “they’re
off”—has no need of verification, but verifies other beliefs.
And even where the confirmation of a belief is in the future,
it is the expectedness, not the pleasantness, of the consequences
that confirms the truth of the belief.
I think it is a mistake to treat “belief” as one kind of
occurrence, as is done in traditional psychology. The sort
of belief which is based upon memory or perception alone
differs from the sort which involves expectation. When you
find in the time-table that a train leaves King’s Cross at ten,
your belief that this statement occurs in the time-table does
not await future confirmation, but your belief about the train
does: you may go to King’s Cross and see the train start. A
belief which concerns an event may be a recollection, a perception,
or an expectation. It may be none of these, in the
case of an event which you have not seen and do not expect
to see—e.g. Cæsar crossing the Rubicon, or the abolition of
the House of Lords. But such beliefs always involve inference.
I do not at this stage consider logical and mathematical
beliefs, some of which must be, in a sense, non-inferential.
But I think we shall find that this sense is different from
that in which memories and perceptions are non-inferential.
A belief, I should say, interpreted narrowly, is a form of
words related to an emotion of one of several kinds. (I
shall give a broader meaning later.) The emotion is different
according as the belief embodies a reminiscence, a
perception, an expectation, or something outside the experience
of the believer. Moreover, a form of words is not essential.
Where the emotion is present, and leads to action
relevant to some feature of the environment, there may be
said to be a belief. The fundamental test of a belief, of no
matter what sort, is that it causes some event which actually
takes place to arouse the emotion of expectedness or its
opposite. I do not now attempt to decide what an emotion
is. Dr. Watson gives a behaviouristic account of emotions,
which would, if adopted, make my definition of “belief”
purely behaviouristic. I have framed the definition so as not
to involve a decision on the question of introspection.
The subject of truth and falsehood may be subdivided as
follows:
A. Formal Theory.—Given the meanings of the component
words, what decides whether a sentence is true
or false?
B. Causal Theory.—Can we distinguish between truth and
falsehood by (a) their causes, (b) their effects?
C. Individual and Social Elements.—A statement is a social
occurrence, a belief is something individual.
How can we define a belief, and what is it when not composed
of words?
D. Consistency and Truth.—Can we get outside the circle of
beliefs or statements to something else which shows them
true, not merely consistent? In other words, what possible
relation is there between propositions and facts?
It is very hard to disentangle these questions. The first
question, as to formal theories, leads to the fourth, as to the
relations of propositions to facts. E.g. “Brutus killed Cæsar”
is true because of a certain fact; what fact? The fact that
Brutus killed Cæsar. This keeps us in the verbal realm, and
does not get us outside it to some realm of non-verbal fact
by which verbal statements can be verified. Hence our fourth
problem arises. But this leads us to our second problem, as
to causes and effects of what is true or false, for it is here
that we shall naturally look for the vital relation between
propositions and facts. And here again we must distinguish
between thinking truly and speaking truly. The former is an
individual affair, the latter a social affair. Thus all our
problems hang together.
I will begin with C, the difference between a belief and a
statement. By a “statement” I mean a form of words, uttered
or written, with a view to being heard or read by some other
person or persons, and not a question, interjection, or command,
but such as we should call an assertion. As to the
question what forms of words are assertions, that is one
for the grammarian and differs from language to language.
But perhaps we can say rather more than that. The distinction,
however, between an assertion and an imperative is not
sharp. In England, notices say “Visitors are requested not
to walk on the grass”. In America, they say “Keep off!
This means you.” Effectively, the two have the same meaning:
yet the English notice consists only of a statement, while
the American notice consists of an imperative followed by
a statement which must be false if read by more than one
person. In so far as statements are intended to influence the
conduct of others, they partake of the nature of imperatives
or requests. Their characteristic, however, is that they endeavour
to effect their aim by producing a belief which may
or may not exist in the mind of the speaker. Often, however,
they express a belief, without stopping to consider the effect
upon others. Thus a statement may be defined as a form of
words which either expresses a belief or is intended to create one.
Our next step, therefore, must be the definition of “belief”.
“Belief” is a word which will be quite differently defined
if we take an analytic point of view from the way in which
we shall define it if we regard the matter causally. From the
point of view of science, the causal point of view is the
more important. Beliefs influence action in certain ways; what
influences action in these ways may be called a belief, even if,
analytically, it does not much resemble what would ordinarily
be so called. We may therefore widen our previous definition
of belief. Consider a man who goes to the house where
his friend used to live, and, finding he has moved, says, “I
thought he still lived here”, whereas he acted merely from
habit without thought. If we are going to use words causally,
we ought to say that this man had a “belief” and therefore
a “belief” will be merely a characteristic of a string of actions.
We shall have to say: A man “believes” a certain proposition
p if, whenever he is aiming at any result to which p is
relevant, he acts in a manner calculated to achieve the result
if p is true, but not otherwise. Sometimes this gives definite
results, sometimes not. When you call a telephone number,
it is clear that you believe that to be the number of the subscriber
you want. But whether you believe in the conservation
of energy or a future life may be harder to decide. You may
hold a belief in some contexts and not in others; for we do
not think in accordance with the so-called “Laws of Thought”.
“Belief” like all the other categories of traditional psychology,
is a notion incapable of precision.
This brings me to the question whether the truth or falsehood
of a belief can be determined either by its causes or by
its effects. There is, however, a preliminary difficulty. I said
just now that A believes p if he acts in a way which will
achieve his ends if p is true. I therefore assumed that we know
what is meant by “truth”. I assumed, to be definite, that
we know what is meant by “truth” as applied to a form
of words. The argument was as follows: From observation
of a person’s acts, you infer his beliefs, by a process
which may be elaborate as the discovery of Kepler’s
Laws from the observed motions of the planets. His “beliefs”
are not assumed to be “states of mind”, but merely
characteristics of series of actions. These beliefs, when ascertained
by observation, can be expressed in words; you
can say, e.g. “This person believes that there is a train from
King’s Cross at 10 A.M.” Having once expressed the belief
in words of which the meaning is known, you have arrived
at the stage where formal theories are applicable. Words
of known meaning, put together according to a known syntax,
are true or false in virtue of some fact, and their relation
to this fact results logically from the meanings of the separate
words and the laws of syntax. This is where logic is
strong.
It will be seen that, according to what we have said, truth
is applicable primarily to a form of words, and only derivatively
to a belief. A form of words is a social phenomenon,
therefore the fundamental form of truth must be social. A
form of words is true when it has a certain relation to a
certain fact. What relation to what fact? I think the
fundamental relation is this: a form of words is true if a
person who knows the language is led to that form of words
when he finds himself in an environment which contains features
that are the meanings of those words, and these features
produce reactions in him sufficiently strong for him to use
words which mean them. Thus “a train leaves King’s Cross
at 10 A.M.” is true if a person can be led to say, “It is now
10 A.M., this is King’s Cross, and I see a train starting”. The
environment causes words, and words directly caused by
the environment (if they are statements) are “true”. What
is called “verification” in science consists in putting oneself in
a situation where words previously used for other reasons
result directly from the environment. Of course, given this
basis, there are innumerable indirect ways of verifying statements,
but all, I think, depend upon this direct way.
The above theory may be thought very odd, but it is partly
designed to meet the fourth of our previous questions, namely,
“How can we get outside words to the facts which make them
true or false?” Obviously we cannot do this within logic,
which is imprisoned in the realm of words; we can only do it
by considering the relations of words to our other experiences,
and these relations, in so far as they are relevant, can
hardly be other than causal. I think the above theory, as it
stands, is too crude to be quite true. We must also bring in
such things as expectedness, which we discussed earlier. But
I believe that the definition of truth or falsehood will have
to be sought along some such lines as I have indicated.
I want in conclusion to indulge in two speculations. The
first concerns a possible reconciliation of behaviourism and
logic. It is clear that, when we have a problem to solve, we
do not always solve it as the rat does, by means of random
movements; we often solve it by “thinking”, i.e. by a process
in which we are not making any overt movements. The same
thing was sometimes true of Köhler’s chimpanzees. Now
what is involved in the possibility of solving a problem by
verbal thinking? We put words together in various ways
which are not wholly random, but limited by previous knowledge
of the sort of phrase that is likely to contain a solution
of our problem. At last we hit upon a phrase which seems to
give what we want. We then proceed to an overt action of
the kind indicated by the phrase; if it succeeds, our problem
is solved. Now this process is only intelligible if there is some
connection between the laws of syntax and the laws of physics—using
“syntax” in a psychological rather than a grammatical
sense. I think this connection is assumed in logic and ordinary
philosophy, but it ought to be treated as a problem requiring
investigation by behaviourist methods. I lay no stress on
this suggestion, except as giving a hint for future investigations.
But I cannot think that the behaviourist has gone far
towards the solution of his problem until he has succeeded
in establishing a connection between syntax and physics. Without
this, the efficacy of “thought” cannot be explained on his
principles.
My second speculation is as to the limitations which the
structure of language imposes upon the extent of our possible
knowledge of the world. I am inclined to think that quite
important metaphysical conclusions, of a more or less sceptical
kind, can be drawn from simple considerations as to the
relation between language and things. A spoken sentence consists
of a temporal series of events; a written sentence
is a spatial series of bits of matter. Thus it is not surprising
that language can represent the course of events in the physical
world; it can, in fact, make a map of the physical world, preserving
its structure in a more manageable form, and it can do
this because it consists of physical events. But if there were
such a world as the mystic postulates, it would have a structure
different from that of language, and would therefore be incapable
of being verbally described. It is fairly clear that nothing
verbal can conform or confute this hypothesis.
A great deal of the confusion about relations which has
prevailed in practically all philosophies comes from the fact
that relations are indicated, not by relations, but by words
which are as substantial as other words. Consequently, in
thinking about relations, we constantly hover between the
unsubstantiality of the relation itself and the substantiality of
the word. Take, say, the fact that lightning precedes thunder.
We saw earlier that to express this by a language closely
reproducing the structure of the fact, we should have to say
simply: “lightning, thunder”, where the fact that the first word
precedes the second means that what the first word means precedes
what the second word means. But even if we adopted
this method for temporal order, we should still need words
for all other relations, because we could not without intolerable
ambiguity symbolise them also by the order of our words.
When we say “lightning precedes thunder”, the word “precedes”
has a quite different relation to what it means from
that which the words “lightning” and “thunder” have to what
they respectively mean. Wittgenstein12 says that what really
happens is that we establish a relation between the word
“lightning” and the word “thunder”, namely the relation of
having the word “precedes” between them. In this way he
causes relations to be symbolised by relations. But although
this may be quite correct, it is sufficiently odd to make it not
surprising that people have thought the word “precedes” means
a relation in the same sense in which “lightning” means a kind
of event. This view, however, must be incorrect. I think it
has usually been held unconsciously, and has produced many
confusions about relations which cease when it is exposed to
the light of day—for example, those which lead Bradley to
condemn relations.
In all this I have been considering the question of the
relation between the structure of language and the structure
of the world. It is clear that anything that can be said in
an inflected language can be said in an uninflected language;
therefore, everything that can be said in language can be said
by means of a temporal series of uninflected words. This places
a limitation upon what can be expressed in words. It may
well be that there are facts which do not lend themselves to
this very simple schema; if so, they cannot be expressed in
language. Our confidence in language is due to the fact that
it consists of events in the physical world, and, therefore, shares
the structure of the physical world, and therefore can express
that structure. But if there be a world which is not physical,
or not in space-time, it may have a structure which we can never
hope to express or to know. These considerations might lead
us to something like the Kantian a priori, not as derived from
the structure of the mind, but as derived from the structure of
language, which is the structure of the physical world. Perhaps
that is why we know so much physics and so little of anything
else. However, I have lapsed into mystical speculation, and
will leave these possibilities, since, by the nature of the case, I
cannot say anything true about them.
CHAPTER XXV THE VALIDITY OF INFERENCE
It is customary in science to regard certain facts as “data”,
from which laws and also other facts are “inferred”. We saw
in Chapter VII that the practice of inference is much wider
than the theories of any logician would justify, and that it is
nothing other than the law of association or of “learned reactions”.
In the present chapter, I wish to consider what the
logicians have evolved from this primitive form of inference,
and what grounds we have, as rational beings, for continuing to
infer. But let us first get as clear a notion as we can of what
should be meant by a “datum”.
The conception of a “datum” cannot be made absolute.
Theoretically, it should mean something that we know without
inference. But before this has any definite meaning, we must
define both “knowledge” and “inference”. Both these terms
have been considered in earlier chapters. For our present
purpose it will simplify matters to take account only of such
knowledge as is expressed in words. We considered in Chapter
XXIV the conditions required in order that a form of
words may be “true”; for present purposes, therefore, we may
say that “knowledge” means “the assertion of a true form of
words”. This definition is not quite adequate, since a man may
be right by chance; but we may ignore this complication. We
may then define a “datum” as follows: A “datum” is a form
of words which a man utters as the result of a stimulus, with
no intermediary of any learned reaction beyond what is involved
in knowing how to speak. We must, however, permit
such learned reactions as consist in adjustments of the sense-organs
or in mere increase of sensitivity. These merely improve
the receptivity to data, and do not involve anything that can be
called inference.
If the above definition is accepted, all our data for knowledge
of the external world must be of the nature of percepts. The
belief in external objects is a learned reaction acquired in the
first months of life, and it is the duty of the philosopher to
treat it as an inference whose validity must be tested. A very
little consideration shows that, logically, the inference cannot
be demonstrative, but must be at best probable. It is not logically
impossible that my life may be one long dream, in which I
merely imagine all the objects that I believe to be external to
me. If we are to reject this view, we must do so on the basis
of an inductive or analogical argument, which cannot give complete
certainty. We perceive other people behaving in a manner
analogous to that in which we behave, and we assume that
they have had similar stimuli. We may hear a whole crowd
say “oh” at the moment when we see a rocket burst, and it is
natural to suppose that the crowd saw it too. Nor are such
arguments confined to living organisms. We can talk to a
dictaphone and have it afterwards repeat what we said; this is
most easily explained by the hypothesis that at the surface of
the dictaphone events happened, while I was speaking, which
were closely analogous to those that were happening just outside
my ears. It remains possible that there is no dictaphone
and I have no ears and there is no crowd watching the rocket;
my percepts may be all that is happening in such cases. But, if
so, it is difficult to arrive at any causal laws, and arguments
from analogy are more misleading than we are inclined to think
them. As a matter of fact, the whole structure of science, as
well as the world of common sense, demands the use of induction
and analogy if it is to be believed. These forms of inference,
therefore, rather than deduction, are those that must be
examined if we are to accept the world of science or any world
outside of our own dreams.
Let us take a simple example of an induction which we have
all performed in practice. If we are hungry, we eat certain
things we see and not others—it may be said that we infer
edibility inductively from a certain visual and olfactory appearance.
The history of this process is that children a few months
old put everything into their mouths unless they are stopped;
sometimes the result is pleasant, sometimes unpleasant; they
repeat the former rather than the latter. That is to say: given
that an object having a certain visual and olfactory appearance
has been found pleasant to eat, an object having a very similar
appearance will be eaten; but when a certain appearance has
been found connected with unpleasant consequences when eaten,
a similar appearance does not lead to eating next time. The
question is: what logical justification is there for our behaviour?
Given all our past experience, are we more likely to be nourished
by bread than by a stone? It is easy to see why we think
so, but can we, as philosophers justify this way of thinking?
It is, of course, obvious that unless one thing can be a sign of
another both science and daily life would be impossible. More
particularly, reading involves this principle. One accepts
printed words as signs, but this is only justifiable by means of
induction. I do not mean that induction is necessary to establish
the existence of other people, though that also, as we have
seen, is true. I mean something simpler. Suppose you want
your hair cut, and as you walk along the street you see a notice
“hair-cutting, first floor”. It is only by means of induction that
you can establish that this notice makes it in some degree probable
that there is a hair-cutter’s establishment on the first floor.
I do not mean that you employ the principle of induction; I
mean that you act in accordance with it, and that you would
have to appeal to it if you were accompanied by a long-haired
sceptical philosopher who refused to go upstairs till he was persuaded
there was some point in doing so.
The principle of induction, prima facie, is as follows: Let
there be two kinds of events, A and B (e.g. lightning and thunder),
and let many instances be known in which an event of
the kind A has been quickly followed by one of the kind B, and
no instances of the contrary. Then either a sufficient number
of instances of this sequence, or instances of suitable kinds will
make it increasingly probable that A is always followed by B,
and in time the probability can be made to approach certainty
without limit provided the right kind and number of instances
can be found. This is the principle we have to examine.
Scientific theories of induction generally try to substitute well-chosen
instances for numerous instances, and represent number
of instances as belonging to crude popular induction. But in
fact popular induction depends upon the emotional interest of
the instances, not upon their number. A child who has burnt
its hand once in a candle-flame establishes an induction, but
words take longer, because at first they are not emotionally
interesting. The principle used in primitive practice is: Whatever,
on a given occasion, immediately precedes something very
painful or pleasant, is a sign of that interesting event. Number
plays a secondary part as compared with emotional interest.
That is one reason why rational thought is so difficult.
The logical problem of induction is to show that the proposition
“A is always accompanied (or followed) by B” can be
rendered probable by knowledge of instances in which this happens,
provided the instances are suitably chosen or very numerous.
Far the best examination of induction is contained in Mr.
J. M. Keynes’s Treatise on Probability. There is a valuable
doctor’s thesis by the late Jean Nicod, Le Problème logique de
l’induction, which is very ably reviewed by R. B. Braithwaite
in Mind, October 1925. A man who reads these three will
know most of what is known about induction. The subject is
technical and difficult, involving a good deal of mathematics,
but I will attempt to give the gist of the results.
We will begin with the condition in which the problem had
been left by J. S. Mill. He had four canons of induction, by
means of which, given suitable examples, it could be demonstrated
that A and B were causally connected, if the law of
causation could be assumed. That is to say, given the law of
causation, the scientific use of induction could be reduced to
deduction. Roughly the method is this: We know that B must
have a cause; the cause cannot be C or D or E, etc., because
we find by experiment or observation that these may be present
without producing B. On the other hand, we never succeed in
finding A without its being accompanied (or followed) by B.
If A and B are both capable of quantity, we may find further
that the more there is of A the more there is of B. By such
methods we eliminate all possible causes except A; therefore,
since B must have a cause, that cause must be A. All this is not
really induction at all; true induction only comes in in proving
the law of causation. This law Mill regards as proved by mere
enumeration of instances: we know vast numbers of events
which have causes, and no events which can be shown to be uncaused;
therefore, it is highly probable that all events have
causes. Leaving out of account the fact that the law of causality
cannot have quite the form that Mill supposed, we are left
with the problem: Does mere number of instances afford a basis
for induction? If not, is there any other basis? This is the
problem to which Mr. Keynes addresses himself.
Mr. Keynes holds that an induction may be rendered more
probable by number of instances, not because of their mere
number, but because of the probability, if the instances are very
numerous, that they will have nothing in common except the
characteristics in question. We want, let us suppose, to find out
whether some quality A is always associated with some quality
B. We find instances in which this is the case; but it may happen
that in all our instances some quality C is also present,
and that it is C that is associated with B. If we can so choose
our instances that they have nothing in common except the
qualities A and B, then we have better grounds for holding
that A is always associated with B. If our instances are very
numerous, then, even if we do not know that they have no
other common quality, it may become quite likely that this is
the case. This, according to Mr. Keynes, is the sole value
of many instances.
A few technical terms are useful. Suppose we want to
establish inductively that there is some probability in favour
of the generalisation: “Everything that has the property F
also has the property f”. We will call this generalisation g.
Suppose we have observed a number of instances in which
F and f go together, and no instances to the contrary. These
instances may have other common properties as well; the sum-total
of their common properties is called the total positive
analogy, and the sum-total of their known common qualities
is called the known positive analogy. The properties belonging
to some but not to all of the instances in question are
called the negative analogy: all of them constitute the total
negative analogy, all those that are known constitute the known
negative analogy. To strengthen an induction, we want to
diminish the positive analogy to the utmost possible extent;
this, according to Mr. Keynes, is why numerous instances are
useful.
On “pure” induction, where we rely solely upon number of
instances, without knowing how they affect the analogy, Mr.
Keynes concludes (Treatise in Probability, p. 236):
“We have shown that if each of the instances necessarily
follows from the generalisation, then each additional instance
increases the probability of the generalisation, so long as the
new instance could not have been predicted with certainty
from a knowledge of the former instances.... The common
notion, that each successive verification of a doubtful
principle strengthens it, is formally proved, therefore without
any appeal to conceptions of law or of causality. But we
have not proved that this probability approaches certainty as
a limit, or even that our conclusion becomes more likely than
not, as the number of verifications or instances is indefinitely
increased.”
It is obvious that induction is not much use unless, with
suitable care, its conclusions can be rendered more likely to
be true than false. This problem therefore necessarily occupies
Mr. Keynes.
It is found that an induction will approach certainty as a
limit if two conditions are fulfilled:
(1) If the generalisation is false, the probability of its being
true in a new instance when it has been found to be true in a
certain number of instances, however great that number may
be, falls short of certainty by a finite amount.
(2) There is a finite a priori probability in favour of our
generalisation.
Mr. Keynes uses “finite” here in a special sense. He holds
that not all probabilities are numerically measurable; a “finite”
probability is one which exceeds some numerically measurable
probability however small. E.g. our generalisation has a finite
a priori probability if it is less unlikely than throwing heads
a billion times running.
The difficulty is, however, that there is no easily discoverable
way of estimating the a priori probability of a generalisation.
In examining this question, Mr. Keynes is led to
a very interesting postulate which, if true, will, he thinks, give
the required finite a priori probability. His postulate as he
gives it is not quite correct, but I shall give his form first, and
then the necessary modification.
Mr. Keynes supposes that the qualities of objects cohere
in groups, so that the number of independent qualities is much
less than the total number of qualities. We may conceive this
after the analogy of biological species: a cat has a number
of distinctive qualities which are found in all cats, a dog has
a number of other distinctive qualities which are found in
all dogs. The method of induction can, he says, be justified
if we assume “that the objects in the field, over which our
generalisations extend, do not have an infinite number of
independent qualities; that, in other words, their characteristics,
however numerous, cohere together in groups of
invariable connection, which are finite in number” (p. 256).
Again (p. 258): “As a biological foundation for Analogy,
therefore, we seem to need some such assumption as that the
amount of variety in the universe is limited in such a way
that there is no one object so complex that its qualities fall
into an infinite number of independent groups ... or rather
that none of the objects about which we generalise are as
complex as this; or at least that, though some objects may
be infinitely complex, we sometimes have a finite probability
that an object about which we seek to generalise is not
infinitely complex.”
This postulate is called the “principle of limitation of
variety”. Mr. Keynes again finds that it is needed in attempts
to establish laws by statistics; if he is right, it is needed for
all our scientific knowledge outside pure mathematics. Jean
Nicod pointed out that it is not quite sufficiently stringent.
We need, according to Mr. Keynes, a finite probability that
the object in question has only a finite number of independent
qualities; but what we really need is a finite probability that
the number of its independent qualities is less than some assigned
finite number. This is a very different thing, as may
be seen by the following illustration. Suppose there is some
number of which we know only that it is finite; it is infinitely
improbable that it will be less than a million, or a billion,
or any other assigned finite number, because, whatever such
number we take, the number of smaller numbers is finite and
the number of greater numbers is infinite. Nicod requires
us to assume that there is a finite number n such that there is
a finite probability that the number of independent qualities
of our object is less than n. This is a much stronger assumption
than Mr. Keynes’s, which is merely that the number of
independent qualities is finite. It is the stronger assumption
which is needed to justify induction.
This result is very interesting and very important. It is
remarkable that it is in line with the trend of modern science.
Eddington has pointed out that there is a certain finite number
which is fundamental in the universe, namely the number
of electrons. According to the quantum theory, it would
seem that the number of possible arrangements of electrons
may well also be finite, since they cannot move in all possible
orbits, but only in such as make the action in one complete
revolution conform to the quantum principle. If all this is
true, the principle of limitation of variety may well also be
true. We cannot, however, arrive at a proof of our principle
in this way, because physics uses induction, and is therefore
presumably invalid unless the principle is true. What we can
say, in a general way, is that the principle does not refute
itself, but, on the contrary, leads to results which confirm it.
To this extent, the trend of modern science may be regarded
as increasing the plausibility of the principle.
It is important to realise the fundamental position of
probability in science. At the very best, induction and analogy
only give probability. Every inference worthy of the name
is inductive, therefore all inferred knowledge is at best probable.
As to what is meant by probability, opinions differ.
Mr. Keynes takes it as a fundamental logical category: certain
premisses may make a conclusion more or less probable, without
making it certain. For him, probability is a relation
between a premiss and a conclusion. A proposition does not
have a definite probability on its own account; in itself, it
is merely true or false. But it has probabilities of different
amounts in regard to different premisses. When we speak,
elliptically, of the probability of a proposition, we mean its
probability in relation to all our relevant knowledge. A
proposition in probability cannot be refuted by mere observation:
improbable things may happen and probable things may
fail to happen. Nor is an estimate of probability relevant
to given evidence proved wrong when further evidence alters
the probability.
For this reason the inductive principle cannot be proved
or disproved by experience. We might prove validly that such
and such a conclusion was enormously probable, and yet it
might not happen. We might prove invalidly that it was
probable, and yet it might happen. What happens affects the
probability of a proposition, since it is relevant evidence; but
it never alters the probability relative to the previously available
evidence. The whole subject of probability, therefore,
on Mr. Keynes’s theory, is strictly a priori and independent of
experience.
There is however another theory, called the “frequency
theory”, which would make probability not indefinable, and
would allow empirical evidence to affect our estimates of probability
relative to given premisses. According to this theory
in its crude form, the probability that an object having the
property F will have the property f is simply the proportion
of the objects having both properties to all those having the
property F. For example, in a monogamous country the
probability of a married person being male is exactly a half.
Mr. Keynes advances strong arguments against all forms of
this theory that existed when his book was written. There
is however an article by R. H. Nisbet on “The Foundations
of Probability” in Mind for January 1926, which undertakes
to rehabilitate the frequency theory. His arguments are
interesting, and suffice to show that the controversy is still
an open one, but they do not, in my opinion, amount to decisive
proof. It is to be observed, however, that the frequency
theory, if it could be maintained, would be preferable to Mr.
Keynes’s, because it would get rid of the necessity for treating
probability as indefinable, and would bring probability into
much closer touch with what actually occurs. Mr. Keynes
leaves an uncomfortable gap between probability and fact,
so that it is far from clear why a rational man will act upon
a probability. Nevertheless, the difficulties of the frequency
theory are so considerable that I cannot venture to advocate
it definitely. Meanwhile, the details of the discussion are
unaffected by the view we may take on this fundamental philosophical
question. And on either view the principle of limitation
of variety will be equally necessary to give validity to the
inferences by induction and analogy upon which science and
daily life depend.
CHAPTER XXVI EVENTS, MATTER, AND MIND
Everything in the world is composed of “events”; that, at
least, is the thesis I wish to maintain. An “event”, as I
understand it, is something having a small finite duration and
a small finite extension in space; or rather, in view of the theory
of relativity, it is something occupying a small finite amount of
space-time. If it has parts, these parts, I say, are again events,
never something occupying a mere point of instant, whether in
space, in time, or in space-time. The fact that an event occupies
a finite amount of space-time does not prove that it has parts.
Events are not impenetrable, as matter is supposed to be; on the
contrary, every event in space-time is overlapped by other events.
There is no reason to suppose that any of the events with which
we are familiar are infinitely complex; on the contrary, everything
known about the world is compatible with the view that
every complex event has a finite number of parts. We do not
know that this is the case, but it is an hypothesis which cannot
be refuted and is simpler than any other possible hypothesis. I
shall therefore adopt it as a working hypothesis in what follows.
When I speak of an “event” I do not mean anything out of
the way. Seeing a flash of lightning is an event; so is hearing a
tire burst, or smelling a rotten egg, or feeling the coldness of a
frog. These are events that are “data” in the sense of Chapter
XXV; but, on the principles explained in that chapter, we infer
that there are events which are not data and happen at a distance
from our own body. Some of these are data to other
people, others are data to no one. In the case of the flash of
lightning, there is an electro-magnetic disturbance consisting of
events travelling outward from the place where the flash takes
place, and then when this disturbance reaches the eye of a person
or animal that can see, there is a percept, which is causally
continuous with the events between the place of the lightning
and the body of the percipient. Percepts afford the logical
premisses for all inferences to events that are not precepts,
wherever such inferences are logically justifiable. Particular
colours and sounds and so on are events; their causal antecedents
in the inanimate world are also events.
If we assume, as I propose to do, that every event has only a
finite number of parts, then every event is composed of a finite
number of events that have no parts. Such events I shall call
“minimal events.” It will simplify our discussion to assume
them, but by a little circumlocution this assumption could be
eliminated. The reader must not therefore regard it as an
essential part of what follows.
A minimal event occupies a finite region in space-time.
Let us take time alone for purposes of illustration. The event
in question may overlap in time with each of two others, although
the first of these others wholly precedes the second; for
example, you may hear a long note on the violin while you hear
two short notes on the piano. (It is not necessary to suppose
that these are really minimal events; I merely want to illustrate
what is meant.) I assume that every event is contemporaneous
with events that are not contemporaneous with each other; this
is what is meant by saying that every event lasts for a finite
time, as the reader can easily convince himself if he remembers
that time is wholly relational. If we look away from the world
of physics for a moment, and confine ourselves to the world of
one man’s experience, we can easily define an “instant” in his
life. It will be a group of events, all belonging to his experience,
and having the following two properties: (1) any two of
the events overlap; (2) no event outside the group overlaps
with every member of the group. By a slightly more complicated
but essentially similar method, we can define a point-instant
in space-time as a group of events having two properties
analogous to those used just now in defining an “instant” in one
biography.13 Thus the “points” (or point-instants) that the
mathematician needs are not simple, but are structures composed
of events, made up for the convenience of the mathematician.
There will be many “points” of which a given minimal
event is a member; all these together make up the region of
space-time occupied by that event. Space-time order, as well as
space-time points, results from the relations between events.
13 See The Analysis of Matter, by the present author, chap. xxviii.
A piece of matter, like a space-time point, is to be constructed
out of events, but the construction is considerably more complicated,
and in the end is only an approximation to what the
physicist supposes to be really taking place. There are, at the
moment, two somewhat different views of matter, one appropriate
to the study of atomic structure, the other to the general
theory of relativity as affording an explanation of gravitation.
The view appropriate to atomic structure has itself two forms,
one derived from Heisenberg, the other from De Broglie and
Schrödinger. These two forms, it is true, are mathematically
equivalent, but in words they are very different. Heisenberg
regards a piece of matter as a centre from which radiations
travel outward; the radiations are supposed really to occur, but
the matter at their centre is reduced to a mere mathematical
fiction. The radiations are, for example, such as constitute
light; they are all avowedly systems of events, not changes in
the conditions or relations of “substances.” In the De Broglie-Schrödinger
system, matter consists of wave motions. It is not
necessary to the theory to postulate anything about these wave-motions
except their mathematical characteristics, but, obviously,
since they are to explain matters they cannot serve their
purpose if they consist of motions of matter. In this system
also, therefore, we are led to construct matter out of systems of
events, which just happen, and do not happen “to” matter or
“to” anything else.
Gravitation, as explained by the general theory of relativity,
is reduced to “crinkles” in space-time. Space-time being, as we
have already seen, a system constructed out of events, the
“crinkles” in it are also derived from events. There is no reason
to suppose that there is a “thing” at the place where the
“crinkle” is most crinkly. Thus in this part of physics, also,
matter has ceased to be a “thing” and has become merely a
mathematical characteristic of the relations between complicated
logical structures composed of events.
It was traditionally a property of substance to be permanent,
and to a considerable extent matter has retained this property
in spite of its loss of substantiality. But its permanence now
is only approximate, not absolute. It is thought that an electron
and a proton can meet and annihilate each other; in the stars
this is supposed to be happening on a large scale.14 And even
while an electron or a proton lasts, it has a different kind of
persistence from that formerly attributed to matter. A wave
in the sea persists for a longer or shorter time: the waves that
I see dashing themselves to pieces on the Cornish coast may
have come all the way from Brazil, but that does not mean that
a “thing” has travelled across the Atlantic; it means only that a
certain process of change has travelled. And just as a wave in
the sea comes to grief at last on the rocks, so an electron or a
proton may come to grief when it meets some unusual state of
affairs.
14 See The Analysis of Matter, by the present author, chap. xxviii.
Thus “matter” has very definitely come down in the world
as a result of recent physics. It used to be the cause of our
sensations: Dr. Johnson “disproved” Berkeley’s denial of matter
by kicking a stone. If he had known that his foot never
touched the stone, and that both were only complicated systems
of wave-motions, he might have been less satisfied with his refutation.
We cannot say that “matter” is the cause of our sensations.
We can say that the events which cause our sensations
usually belong to the sort of group that physicists regard as
material; but that is a very different thing. Impenetrability
used to be a noble property of matter, a kind of Declaration
of Independence; now it is a merely tautological result of the
way in which matter is defined. The events which are the real
stuff of the world are not impenetrable, since they can overlap
in space-time. In a word, “matter” has become no more than
a convenient shorthand for stating certain causal laws concerning
events.
But if matter has fared badly, mind has fared little better.
The adjective “mental” is one which is not capable of any
exact significance. There is, it is true, an important group
of events, namely percepts, all of which may be called
“mental”. But it would be arbitrary to say that there are no
“mental” events except percepts, and yet it is difficult to find
any principle by which we can decide what other events should
be included. Perhaps the most essential characteristics of mind
are introspection and memory. But memory in some of its
forms is, as we have seen, a consequence of the law of conditioned
reflexes, which is at least as much physiological as
psychological, and characterises living tissue rather than mind.
Knowledge, as we have found, is not easy to distinguish from
sensitivity, which is a property possessed by scientific instruments.
Introspection is a form of knowledge, but turns out,
on examination, to be little more than a cautious interpretation
of ordinary “knowledge”. Where the philosopher’s child at
the Zoo says “There is a hippopotamus over there”, the philosopher
should reply: “There is a coloured pattern of a certain
shape, which may perhaps be connected with a system of
external causes of the sort called a hippopotamus”. (I do
not live up to this precept myself.) In saying that there is
a coloured pattern, the philosopher is practising introspection
in the only sense that I can attach to that term, i.e. his
knowledge-reaction is to an event situated in his own brain
from the standpoint of physical space, and is consciously avoiding
physiological and other inference as far as possible.
Events to which a knowledge-reaction of this sort occurs are
“mental”; so are, presumably, other events resembling them
in certain respects. But I do not see any way of defining this
wider group except by saying that mental events are events in
a living brain, or, better, in a region combining sensitivity and
the law of learned reactions to a marked extent. This definition
has at least the merit of showing that mentality is an affair
of causal laws, not of the quality of single events, and also that
mentality is a matter of degree.
Perhaps it is not unnecessary to repeat, at this point, that
events in the brain are not to be regarded as consisting of
motions of bits of matter. Matter and motion, as we have
seen, are logical constructions using events as their material,
and events are therefore something quite different from matter
in motion. I take it that, when we have a percept, just what
we perceive (if we avoid avoidable sources of error) is an
event occupying part of the region which, for physics, is
occupied by the brain. In fact, perception gives us the most
concrete knowledge we possess as to the stuff of the physical
world, but what we perceive is part of the stuff of our brains,
not part of the stuff of tables and chairs, sun, moon, and stars.
Suppose we are looking at a leaf, and we see a green patch.
This patch is not “out there” where the leaf is, but is an event
occupying a certain volume in our brains during the time that
we see the leaf. Seeing the leaf consists of the existence, in
the region occupied by our brain, of a green patch causally
connected with the leaf, or rather with a series of events
emanating from the place in physical space where physics places
the leaf. The percept is one of this series of events, differing
from the others in its effects owing to the peculiarities of the region
in which it occurs—or perhaps it would be more correct to
say that the different effects are the peculiarities of the region.
Thus “mind” and “mental” are merely approximate concepts,
giving a convenient shorthand for certain approximate
laws. In a completed science, the word “mind” and the word
“matter” would both disappear, and would be replaced by
causal laws concerning “events”, the only events known to us
otherwise than in their mathematical and causal properties
being percepts, which are events situated in the same region
as a brain and having effects of a peculiar sort called “knowledge-reactions”.
It will be seen that the view which I am advocating is
neither materialism nor mentalism, but what we call “neutral
monism”. It is monism in the sense that it regards the world
as composed of only one kind of stuff, namely events; but it is
pluralism in the sense that it admits the existence of a great
multiplicity of events, each minimal event being a logically
self-subsistent entity.
There is, however, another question, not quite the same as
this, namely the question as to the relations of psychology and
physics. If we knew more, would psychology be absorbed in
physics? or, conversely, would physics be absorbed in psychology?
A man may be a materialist and yet hold that psychology
is an independent science; this is the view taken by
Dr. Broad in his important book on The Mind and its Place
in Nature. He holds that a mind is a material structure, but
that it has properties which could not, even theoretically, be
inferred from those of its material constituents. He points
out that structures very often have properties which, in the
present state of our knowledge, cannot be inferred from the
properties and relations of their parts. Water has many
properties which we cannot infer from those of hydrogen
and oxygen, even if we suppose ourselves to know the structure
of the molecule of water more completely than we do
as yet. Properties of a whole which cannot, even theoretically,
be inferred from the properties and relations of its parts are
called by Dr. Broad “emergent” properties. Thus he holds
that a mind (or brain) has properties which are “emergent”,
and to this extent psychology will be independent of physics and
chemistry. The “emergent” properties of minds will only be
discoverable by observation of minds, not by inference from the
laws of physics and chemistry. This possibility is an important
one, and it will be worth while to consider it.
Our decision to regard a unit of matter as itself not ultimate,
but an assemblage of events, somewhat alters the form
of our question as to “emergent” properties. We have to
ask: Is matter emergent from events? Is mind emergent from
events? If the former, is mind emergent from matter, or deducible
from the properties of matter, or neither? If the latter,
is matter emergent from mind or deducible from the properties
of mind, or neither? Of course, if neither mind nor matter is
emergent from events, these latter questions do not arise.
Let us coin a word, “chrono-geography”, for the science
which begins with events having space-time relations and does
not assume at the outset that certain strings of them can be
treated as persistent material units or as minds. Then we
have to ask ourselves first: can the science of matter, as it
appears in physics and chemistry, be wholly reduced to chrono-geography?
If no, matter is emergent from events; if yes,
it is not emergent.
Is matter emergent from events? In the present state of
science it is difficult to give a decided answer to this question.
The notion of matter, in modern physics, has become absorbed
into the notion of energy. Eddington, in his Mathematical
Theory of Relativity shows that, in virtue of the laws
assumed concerning events, there must be something having
the observed properties of matter and energy as regards conservation.
This he calls the “material-energy-tensor”, and
suggests that it is the reality which we sometimes call “matter”
and sometimes “energy”. To this extent, matter has been
shown to be not emergent. But the existence of electrons
and protons (to the extent that they do exist) has not yet
been deduced from the general theory of relativity, though
attempts are being made and may at any moment succeed. If
and when these attempts succeed, physics will cease to be in
any degree independent of chrono-geography, but for the
present it remains in part independent. As for chemistry,
although we cannot practically reduce it all to physics, we can
see how, theoretically, this could be done, and I think it is safe
to assume that it is not an ultimately independent science.
The question we have been asking is: could we predict,
theoretically, from the laws of events that there must be material
units obeying the laws which they do in fact obey, or
is this a new, logically independent, fact? In theory we might
be able to prove that it is not independent, but it would be
very difficult to prove that it is. The present position is,
broadly speaking, that the continuous properties of the physical
world can be deduced from chrono-geography, but not the discontinuous
facts, viz. electrons and protons and Planck’s
quantum. Thus for the present materiality is practically,
though perhaps not theoretically, an emergent characteristic
of certain groups of events.
Is mind emergent from events? This question, as yet, can
hardly be even discussed intelligently, because psychology is
not a sufficiently advanced science. There are, nevertheless,
some points to be noted. Chrono-geography is concerned only
with the abstract mathematical properties of events, and cannot
conceivably, unless it is radically transformed, prove that
there are visual events, or auditory events, or events of any
of the kinds that we know by perception. In this sense, psychology
is certainly emergent from chrono-geography and
also from physics, and it is hard to see how it can ever cease
to be so. The reason for this is that our knowledge of data
contains features of a qualitative sort, which cannot be deduced
from the merely mathematical features of the space-time
events inferred from data, and yet these abstract mathematical
features are all that we can legitimately infer.
The above argument decides also that mind must be emergent
from matter, if it is a material structure. No amount
of physics can ever tell us all that we do in fact know about our
own percepts.
We have still to ask whether we are to regard a mind as
a structure of material units or not. If we do so regard it,
we are, so far as mind is concerned, emergent materialists
in view of what we have just decided; this is the view favoured
by Dr. Broad. If we do not so regard it, we are in no sense
materialists. In favour of the materialist view, there is the
fact that, so far as our experience goes, minds only emerge in
connection with certain physical structures, namely living
bodies, and that mental development increases with a certain
kind of complexity of physical structure. We cannot set
against this the argument that minds have peculiar characteristics,
for this is quite consistent with emergent materialism.
If we are to refute it, it must be by finding out what sort of
group of events constitutes a mind. It is time to address ourselves
to this question.
What is a mind? It is obvious, to begin with, that a mind
must be a group of mental events, since we have rejected the
view that it is a single simple entity such as the ego was formerly
supposed to be. Our first step, therefore, is to be clear
as to what we mean by a “mental” event.
We said a few pages ago that: Mental events are events in
a region combining sensitivity and the law of learned reactions
to a marked extent. For practical purposes, this means (subject
to a proviso to be explained shortly) that a mental event
is any event in a living brain. We explained that this does
not mean that a mental event consists of matter in motion,
which is what an old-fashioned physicist would regard as the
sort of event that happens in a brain. Matter in motion, we
have seen, is not an event in our sense, but a shorthand description
of a very complicated causal process among events of
a different sort. But we must say a few words in justification
of our definition.
Let us consider some alternative definitions. A mental
event, we might say, is one which is “experienced.” When is
an event “experienced”? We might say: when it has “mnemic”
effects, i.e. effects governed by the law of association. But
we saw that this law applies to purely bodily events such as
the contraction of the pupil, with which nothing “mental”
seems to be connected. Thus if our definition is to serve,
we shall have to define “experience” differently; we shall have
to say that the mnemic effects must include something that
can be called “knowledge.” This would suggest the definition:
A mental event is anything that is remembered. But
this is too narrow: we only remember a small proportion
of our mental events. We might have regarded “consciousness”
as the essence of mental events, but this view was examined
and found inadequate in Chapter XX. Moreover,
we do not want our definition to exclude the “unconscious”.
It is clear that the primary mental events, those about which
there can be no question, are percepts. But percepts have certain
peculiar causal properties, notably that they give rise to
knowledge-reactions, and that they are capable of having
mnemic effects which are cognitions. These causal properties,
however, belong to some events which are not apparently percepts.
It seems that any event in the brain may have these
properties. And perhaps we were too hasty in saying that the
contraction of the pupil on hearing a loud noise involves nothing
“mental”. There may be other “mental” events connected
with a human body besides those belonging to the central personality.
I shall come back to this possibility presently. Meanwhile,
I shall adhere to the above definition of a “mental”
event, which, as we saw, makes mentality a matter of degree.
We can now return to the question: What is a mind?
There may be mental events not forming part of the sort of
group that we should call a “mind”, but there certainly are
groups having that kind of unity that make us call them one
mind. There are two marked characteristics of a mind: First,
it is connected with a certain body; secondly, it has the unity
of one “experience”. The two prima facie diverge in cases
of dual or multiple personality, but I think this is more apparent
than real. These two characteristics are, one physical, the
other psychological. Let us consider each in turn as a possible
definition of what we mean by one “mind”.
In the physical way, we begin by observing that every
mental event known to us is also part of the history of a
living body, and we define a “mind” as the group of mental
events which form part of the history of a certain living body.
The definition of a living body is chemical, and the reduction
of chemistry to physics is clear in theory, though in practice
the mathematics is too difficult. It is so far a merely
empirical fact that mnemic causation is almost exclusively associated
with matter having a certain chemical structure. But
the same may be said of magnetism. As yet, we cannot deduce
the magnetic properties of iron from what we know of the
structure of the atom of iron, but no one doubts that they could
be deduced by a person with sufficient knowledge and sufficient
mathematical skill. In like manner it may be assumed that
mnemic causation is theoretically deducible from the structure
of living matter. If we knew enough, we might be able
to infer that some other possible structure would exhibit
mnemic phenomena, perhaps in an even more marked degree;
if so, we might be able to construct Robots who would
be more intelligent than we are.
In the psychological way of defining a “mind”, it consists of
all the mental events connected with a given mental event by
“experience”, i.e. by mnemic causation, but this definition needs
a little elaboration before it can be regarded as precise. We
do not want the contraction of the pupil to count as a “mental”
event; therefore a mental event will have to be one which has
mnemic effects, not merely mnemic causes. In that case, however,
there cannot be a last mental event in a man’s life, unless
we assume that it may have mnemic effects on his body after
death. Perhaps we may avoid this inconvenience by discovering
the kind of event that usually has mnemic effects, though
they may be prevented from occurring by special circumstances.
Or we might maintain that death is gradual, even when it is
what is called instantaneous; in that case the last events in a
man’s life grow progressively less mental as life ebbs. Neglecting
this point, which is not very important, we shall define the
“experience” to which a given mental event belongs as all those
mental events which can be reached from the given event by
a mnemic causal chain, which may go backwards or forwards,
or alternately first one and then the other. This may be conceived
on the analogy of an engine shunting at a junction or
where there are many points: any line that can be reached, by
however many shuntings, will count as part of the same experience.
We cannot be sure that all the mental events connected with
one body are connected by links of mnemic causation with each
other, and therefore we cannot be sure that our two definitions
of one “mind” give the same result. In cases of multiple personality,
some at least of the usual mnemic effects, notably
recollection, are absent in the life of one personality when they
have occurred in the life of the other. But probably both personalities
are connected by mnemic chains with events which
occurred before the dissociation took place, so that there would
be only one mind according to our definition. But there are
other possibilities which must be considered. It may be that
each cell in the body has its own mental life, and that only
selections from these mental lives go to make up the life which
we regard as ours. The “unconscious” might be the mental
lives of subordinate parts of the body, having occasional
mnemic effects which we can notice, but in the main separate
from the life of which we are “conscious”. If so, the mental
events connected with one body will be more numerous than
the events making up its central “mind”. These, however,
are only speculative possibilities.
I spoke a moment ago of the life of which we are “conscious”,
and perhaps the reader has been wondering why I
have not made more use of the notion of “consciousness”.
The reason is that I regard it as only one kind of mnemic effect,
and not one entitled to a special place. To say that I am
“conscious” of an event is to say that I recollect it, at any
rate for a short time after it has happened. To say that I
recollect an event is to say that a certain event is occurring in
me now which is connected by mnemic causation with the event
recollected, and is of the sort that we call a “cognition” of that
event. But events which I do not recollect may have mnemic
effects upon me. This is the case, not only where we have
Freudian suppression, but in all habits which were learnt long
ago and have now become automatic, such as writing and speaking.
The emphasis upon consciousness has made a mystery of
the “unconscious”, which ought to be in no way surprising.
It does not much matter which of our two definitions of a
“mind” we adopt. Let us, provisionally, adopt the first definition,
so that a mind is all the mental events which form part
of the history of a certain living body, or perhaps we should
rather say a living brain.
We can now tackle the question which is to decide whether
we are emergent materialists or not, namely:
Is a mind a structure of material units?
I think it is clear that the answer to this question is in the
negative. Even if a mind consists of all the events in a brain,
it does not consist of bundles of these events grouped as physics
groups them, i.e. it does not lump together all the events that
make up one piece of matter in the brain, and then all the
events that make up another, and so on. Mnemic causation
is what concerns us most in studying mind, but this seems to
demand a recourse to physics, if we assume, as seems plausible,
that mental mnemic causation is due to effects upon the
brain. This question, however, is still an open one. If
mnemic causation is ultimate, mind is emergent. If not, the
question is more difficult. As we saw earlier, there certainly
is knowledge in psychology which cannot ever form part of
physics. But as this point is important, I shall repeat the
argument in different terms.
The difference between physics and psychology is analogous
to that between a postman’s knowledge of letters and the
knowledge of a recipient of letters. The postman knows the
movements of many letters, the recipient knows the contents
of a few. We may regard the light and sound waves that go
about the world as letters of which the physicist may know the
destination; some few of them are addressed to human beings,
and when read give psychological knowledge. Of course the
analogy is not perfect, because the letters with which the
physicist deals are continually changing during their journeys,
as if they were written in fading ink, which, also, was not
quite dry all the time, but occasionally got smudged with rain.
However, the analogy may pass if not pressed.
It would be possible without altering the detail of previous
discussions, except that of Chapter XXV, to give a different
turn to the argument, and make matter a structure composed
of mental units. I am not quite sure that this is the wrong
view. It arises not unnaturally from the argument as to data
contained in Chapter XXV. We saw that all data are mental
events in the narrowest and strictest sense, since they are percepts.
Consequently all verification of causal laws consists
in the occurrence of expected percepts. Consequently any inference
beyond percepts (actual or possible) is incapable of
being empirically tested. We shall therefore be prudent if we
regard the non-mental events of physics as mere auxiliary
concepts, not assumed to have any reality, but only introduced
to simplify the laws of percepts. Thus matter will be a
construction built out of percepts, and our metaphysic will
be essentially that of Berkeley. If there are no non-mental
events, causal laws will be very odd; for example, a hidden
dictaphone may record a conversation although it did not exist
at the time, since no one was perceiving it. But although this
seems odd, it is not logically impossible. And it must be
conceded that it enables us to interpret physics with a smaller
amount of dubious inductive and analogical inference than is
required if we admit non-mental events.
In spite of the logical merits of this view, I cannot bring
myself to accept it, though I am not sure that my reasons for
disliking it are any better than Dr. Johnson’s. I find myself
constitutionally incapable of believing that the sun would not
exist on a day when he was everywhere hidden by clouds, or
that the meat in a pie springs into existence at the moment
when the pie is opened. I know the logical answer to such
objections, and qua logician I think the answer a good one.
The logical argument, however, does not even tend to show
that there are not non-mental events; it only tends to show
that we have no right to feel sure of their existence. For
my part, I find myself in fact believing in them in spite of
all that can be said to persuade me that I ought to feel
doubtful.
There is an argument, of a sort, against the view we are
considering. I have been assuming that we admit the existence
of other people and their perceptions, but question only
the inference from perceptions to events of a different kind.
Now there is no good reason why we should not carry our
logical caution a step further. I cannot verify a theory by
means of another man’s perceptions, but only by means of
my own. Therefore the laws of physics can only be verified
by me in so far as they lead to predictions of my percepts.
If then, I refuse to admit non-mental events because they are
not verifiable, I ought to refuse to admit mental events in
every one except myself, on the same ground. Thus I am
reduced to what is called “solipsism”, i.e. the theory that I
alone exist. This is a view which is hard to refute, but still
harder to believe. I once received a letter from a philosopher
who professed to be a solipsist, but was surprised that there
were no others! Yet this philosopher was by way of believing
that no one else existed. This shows that solipsism is not
really believed even by those who think they are convinced of
its truth.
We may go a step further. The past can only be verified
indirectly, by means of its effects in the future; therefore the
type of logical caution we have been considering should lead
us to abstain from asserting that the past really occurred:
we ought to regard it as consisting of auxiliary concepts convenient
in stating the laws applicable to the future. And since
the future, though verifiable if and when it occurs, is as yet
unverified, we ought to suspend judgment about the future
also. If we are not willing to go so far as this, there seems
no reason to draw the line at the precise point where it was
drawn by Berkeley. On these grounds I feel no shame in
admitting the existence of non-mental events such as the laws
of physics lead us to infer. Nevertheless, it is important
to realise that other views are tenable.
CHAPTER XXVII MAN’S PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE
In this final chapter, I propose to recapitulate the main conclusions
at which we have arrived, and then to say a few
words on the subject of Man’s relation to the universe in so
far as philosophy has anything to teach on this subject without
extraneous help.
Popular metaphysics divides the known world into mind
and matter, and a human being into soul and body. Some—the
materialists—have said that matter alone is real and
mind is an illusion. Many—the idealists in the technical sense,
or mentalists, as Dr. Broad more appropriately calls them—have
taken the opposite view, that mind alone is real and
matter is an illusion. The view which I have suggested is
that both mind and matter are structures composed of a
more primitive stuff which is neither mental nor material.
This view, called “neutral monism”, is suggested in Mach’s
Analysis of Sensations, developed in William James’s Essays
in Radical Empiricism, and advocated by John Dewey, as well
as by Professor R. B. Parry and other American realists.
The use of the word “neutral” in this way is due to Dr. H. M.
Sheffer,15 formerly of Harvard, who is one of the ablest logicians
of our time.
Since man is the instrument of his own knowledge, it is
necessary to study him as an instrument before we can appraise
the value of what our senses seem to tell us concerning
the world. In Part I we studied man, within the framework
of common-sense beliefs, just as we might study clocks or
thermometers, as an instrument sensitive to certain features of
the environment, since sensitiveness to the environment is
obviously an indispensable condition for knowledge about it.
In Part II we advanced to the study of the physical world.
We found that matter, in modern science, has lost its solidity
and substantiality; it has become a mere ghost haunting the
scenes of its former splendours. In pursuit of something that
could be treated as substantial, physicists analysed ordinary
matter into molecules, molecules into atoms, atoms into electrons
and protons. There, for a few years, analysis found
a resting-place. But now electrons and protons themselves
are dissolved into systems of radiations by Heisenberg, and
into systems of waves by Schrödinger—the two theories amount
mathematically to much the same thing. And these are not
wild metaphysical speculations; they are sober mathematical
calculations, accepted by the great majority of experts.
Another department of theoretical physics, the theory of
relativity, has philosophical consequences which are, if possible,
even more important. The substitution of space-time for
space and time has made the category of substance less applicable
than formerly, since the essence of substance was persistence
through time, and there is now no one cosmic time.
The result of this is to turn the physical world into a four-dimensional
continuum of events, instead of a series of
three-dimensional states of a world composed of persistent
bits of matter. A second important feature of relativity-theory
is the abolition of force, particularly gravitational force, and
the substitution of differential causal laws having to do only
with the neighbourhood of an event, not with an influence exerted
from a distance, such as gravitation formerly seemed
to be.
The modern study of the atom has had two consequences
which have considerably changed the philosophical hearing of
physics. On the one hand, it appears that there are discontinuous
changes in nature, occasions when there is a sudden
jump from one state to another without passing through the
intermediate states. (Schrödinger, it is true, questions the
need for assuming discontinuity; but so far his opinion has
not prevailed.) On the other hand, the course of nature
is not so definitely determined by the physical laws at present
known as it was formerly thought to be. We cannot
predict when a discontinuous change will take place in a given
atom, though we can predict statistical averages. It can no
longer be said that, given the laws of physics and the relevant
facts about the environment, the future history of an atom
can theoretically be calculated from its present condition. It
may be that this is merely due to the insufficiency of our
knowledge, but we cannot be sure that this is the case. As
things stand at present, the physical world is not so rigidly
deterministic as it has been believed to be during the last
250 years. And in various directions what formerly appeared
as laws governing each separate atom are now found to be
only averages attributable in part to the laws of chance.
From these questions concerning the physical world in itself,
we were led to others concerning the causation of our perceptions,
which are the data upon which our scientific knowledge
of physics is based. We saw that a long causal chain
always intervenes between an external event and the event
in us which we regard as perception of the external event. We
cannot therefore suppose that the external event is exactly
what we see or hear; it can, at best, resemble the percept only
in certain structural respects. This fact has caused considerable
confusion in philosophy, partly because philosophers tried
to think better of perception than it deserves, partly because
they failed to have clear ideas on the subject of space. It is
customary to treat space as a characteristic of matter as
opposed to mind, but this is only true of physical space. There
is also perceptual space, which is that in which what we know
immediately through the senses is situated. This space cannot
be identified with that of physics. From the standpoint of
physical space, all our percepts are in our heads; but in perceptual
space our percept of our hand is outside our percept
of our head. The failure to keep physical and perceptual
space distinct has been a source of great confusion in philosophy.
In Part III we resumed the study of man, but now as
he appears to himself, not only as he is known to an external
observer. We decided, contrary to the view of the behaviourists,
that there are important facts which cannot be known
except when the observer and observed are the same person.
The datum in perception, we decided, is a private fact which
can only be known directly to the percipient; it is a datum
for physics and psychology equally, and must be regarded as
both physical and mental. We decided later that there are
inductive grounds, giving probability but not certainty, in
favour of the view that perceptions are causally connected with
events which the percipient does not experience, which may
belong only to the physical world.
The behaviour of human beings is distinguished from that
of inanimate matter by what are called “mnemic” phenomena,
i.e. by a certain kind of effect of past occurrences. This kind
of effects is exemplified in memory, in learning, in the intelligent
use of words, and in every kind of knowledge. But we cannot,
on this ground, erect an absolute barrier between mind
and matter. In the first place, inanimate matter, to some slight
extent, shows analogous behaviour—e.g. if you unroll a roll
of paper, it will roll itself up again. In the second place, we
find that living bodies display mnemic phenomena to exactly
the same extent to which minds display them. In the third
place, if we are to avoid what I have called “mnemic” causation,
which involves action at a distance in time, we must say
that mnemic phenomena in mental events are due to the modification
of the body by past events. That is to say, the set
of events which constitutes one man’s experience is not causally
self-sufficient, but is dependent upon causal laws involving
events which he cannot experience.
On the other hand, our knowledge of the physical world
is purely abstract: we know certain logical characteristics
of its structure, but nothing of its intrinsic character. There
is nothing in physics to prove that the intrinsic character of
the physical world differs, in this or that respect, from that of
the mental world. Thus from both ends, both by the analysis
of physics and by the analysis of psychology, we find that
mental and physical events form one causal whole, which is
not known to consist of two different sorts. At present, we
know the laws of the physical world better than those of the
mental world, but that may change. We know the intrinsic
character of the mental world to some extent, but we know
absolutely nothing of the intrinsic character of the physical
world. And in view of the nature of the inferences upon which
our knowledge of physics rests, it seems scarcely possible that
we should ever know more than abstract laws about matter.
In Part IV we considered what philosophy has to say about
the universe. The function of philosophy, according to the
view advocated in this volume, is somewhat different from that
which has been assigned to it by a large and influential school.
Take, e.g. Kant’s antinomies. He argues (1) that space must
be infinite, (2) that space cannot be infinite; and he deduces
that space is subjective. The non-Euclideans refuted the argument
that it must be infinite, and Georg Cantor refuted the
argument that it cannot be. Formerly, a priori logic was
used to prove that various hypotheses which looked possible
were impossible, leaving only one possibility, which philosophy
therefore pronounced true. Now a priori logic is used to
prove the exact contrary, namely, that hypotheses which looked
impossible are possible. Whereas logic was formerly counsel
for the prosecution, it is now counsel for the defence. The
result is that many more hypotheses are at large than was
formerly the case. Formerly, to revert to the instance of space,
it appeared that experience left only one kind of space to
logic, and logic showed this one kind to be impossible. Now,
logic presents many kinds of space as possible apart from experience,
and experience only partially decides between them.
Thus, while our knowledge of what is has become less than it
was formerly supposed to be, our knowledge of what may be
is enormously increased. Instead of being shut in within narrow
walls, of which every nook and cranny could be explored,
we find ourselves in an open world of free possibilities, where
much remains unknown because there is so much to know. The
attempt to prescribe to the universe by means of a priori principles
has broken down; logic, instead of being, as formerly,
a bar to possibilities, has become the great liberator of the
imagination, presenting innumerable alternatives which are
closed to unreflective common sense, and leaving to experience
the task of deciding, where decision is possible, between the
many worlds which logic offers for our choice.
Philosophical knowledge, if what we have been saying is
correct, does not differ essentially from scientific knowledge;
there is no special source of wisdom which is open to philosophy
but not to science, and the results obtained by philosophy
are not radically different from those reached in science.
Philosophy is distinguished from science only by being more
critical and more general. But when I say that philosophy is
critical, I do not mean that it attempts to criticise knowledge
from outside, for that would be impossible: I mean only that it
examines the various parts of our supposed knowledge to see
whether they are mutually consistent and whether the inferences
employed are such as seem valid to a careful scrutiny. The
criticism aimed at is not that which, without reason, determines
to reject, but that which considers each piece of apparent knowledge
on its merits and retains whatever still appears to be
knowledge when this consideration is completed. That some
risk of error remains must be admitted, since human beings are
fallible. Philosophy may claim justly that it diminishes the
risk of error, and that in some cases it renders the risk so
small as to be practically negligible. To do more than this
is not possible in a world where mistakes must occur; and more
than this no prudent advocate of philosophy would claim to
have performed.
I want to end with a few words about man’s place in the
universe. It has been customary to demand of a philosopher
that he should show that the world is good in certain respects.
I cannot admit any duty of this sort. One might as well demand
of an accountant that he should show a satisfactory
balance sheet. It is just as bad to be fraudulently optimistic
in philosophy as in money matters. If the world is good, by
all means let us know it; but if not, let us know that. In any
case, the question of the goodness or badness of the world is
one for science rather than for philosophy. We shall call the
world good if it has certain characteristics that we desire. In
the past philosophy professed to be able to prove that the
world had such characteristics, but it is now fairly evident that
the proofs were invalid. It does not, of course, follow that
the world does not have the characteristics in question; it follows
only that philosophy cannot decide the problem. Take
for example the problem of personal immortality. You may
believe this on the ground of revealed religion, but that is a
ground which lies outside philosophy. You may believe it on
the ground of the phenomena investigated by psychical research,
but that is science, not philosophy. In former days,
you could believe it on a philosophical ground, namely, that
the soul is a substance and all substances are indestructible.
You will find this argument, sometimes more or less disguised, in
many philosophers. But the notion of substance, in the sense
of a permanent entity with changing states, is no longer applicable
to the world. It may happen, as with the electron,
that a string of events are so interconnected causally that it is
practically convenient to regard them as forming one entity,
but where this happens it is a scientific fact, not a metaphysical
necessity. The whole question of personal immortality, therefore
lies outside philosophy, and it is to be decided, if at all,
either by science or by revealed religion.
I will take up another matter in regard to which what I
have said may have been disappointing to some readers. It
is sometimes thought that philosophy ought to aim at encouraging
a good life. Now, of course, I admit that it should have
this effect, but I do not admit that it should have this as a
conscious purpose. To begin with, when we embark upon the
study of philosophy we ought not to assume that we already
know for certain what the good life is; philosophy may conceivably
modify our views as to what is good, in which case
it will seem to the non-philosophical to have had a bad moral
effect. That, however, is a secondary point. The essential
thing is that philosophy is part of the pursuit of knowledge,
and that we cannot limit this pursuit by insisting that the
knowledge obtained shall be such as we should have thought
edifying before we obtained it. I think it could be maintained
with truth that all knowledge is edifying, provided we have a
right conception of edification. When this appears to be not
the case it is because we have moral standards based upon
ignorance. It may happen by good fortune that a moral
standard based upon ignorance is right, but if so knowledge
will not destroy it; if knowledge can destroy it, it must be
wrong. The conscious purpose of philosophy, therefore, ought
to be solely to understand the world as well as possible, not to
establish this or that proposition which is thought morally
desirable. Those who embark upon philosophy must be prepared
to question all their preconceptions, ethical as well as
scientific; if they have a determination never to surrender certain
philosophic beliefs, they are not in the frame of mind in
which philosophy can be profitably pursued.
But although philosophy ought not to have a moral purpose,
it ought to have certain good moral effects. Any disinterested
pursuit of knowledge teaches us the limits of our power, which
is salutary; at the same time, in proportion as we succeed in
achieving knowledge, it teaches the limits of our impotence,
which is equally desirable. And philosophical knowledge, or
rather philosophical thought, has certain special merits not
belonging in an equal degree to other intellectual pursuits. By
its generality it enables us to see human passions in their just
proportions, and to realise the absurdity of many quarrels between
individuals, classes, and nations. Philosophy comes as
near as possible for human beings to that large, impartial contemplation
of the universe as a whole which raises us for the
moment above our purely personal destiny. There is a certain
asceticism of the intellect which is good as a part of life, though
it cannot be the whole so long as we have to remain animals
engaged in the struggle for existence. The asceticism of the
intellect requires that, while we are engaged in the pursuit of
knowledge, we shall repress all other desires for the sake of the
desire to know. While we are philosophising, the wish to prove
that the world is good, or that the dogmas of this or that sect
are true, must count as weaknesses of the flesh—they are temptations
to be thrust on one side. But we obtain in return something
of the joy which the mystic experiences in harmony with
the will of God. This joy philosophy can give, but only to
those who are willing to follow it to the end, through all its
arduous uncertainties.
The world presented for our belief by a philosophy based
upon modern science is in many ways less alien to ourselves
than the world of matter as conceived in former centuries. The
events that happen in our minds are part of the course of nature,
and we do not know that the events which happen elsewhere are
of a totally different kind. The physical world, so far as
science can show at present, is perhaps less rigidly determined
by causal laws than it was thought to be; one might, more or
less fancifully, attribute even to the atom a kind of limited free
will. There is no need to think of ourselves as powerless and
small in the grip of vast cosmic forces. All measurement is
conventional, and it would be possible to devise a perfectly
serviceable system of measurement according to which a man
would be larger than the sun. No doubt there are limits to our
power, and it is good that we should recognise the fact. But
we cannot say what the limits are, except in a quite abstract way,
such as that we cannot create energy. From the point of view
of human life, it is not important to be able to create energy;
what is important is to be able to direct energy into this or that
channel, and this can do more and more as our knowledge of
science increases. Since men first began to think, the forces
of nature have oppressed them; earthquakes, floods, pestilences,
and famines have filled them with terror. Now at last, thanks
to science, mankind is discovering how to avoid much of the
suffering that such events have hitherto entailed. The mood
in which, as it seems to me the modern man should face
the universe is one of quiet self-respect. The universe as
known to science is not in itself either friendly or hostile to man,
but it can be made to act as a friend if approached with patient
knowledge. Where the universe is concerned, knowledge is the
one thing needful. Man, alone of living things, has shown
himself capable of the knowledge required to give him a certain
mastery over his environment. The dangers to man in the
future, or at least in any measurable future, come, not from
nature, but from man himself. Will he use his power wisely?
Or will he turn the energy liberated from the struggle with
nature into struggles with his fellow-men? History, science,
and philosophy all make us aware of the great collective achievements
of mankind. It would be well if every civilised human
being had a sense of these achievements and a realisation of
the possibility of greater things to come, with the indifference
which must result as regards the petty squabbles upon which
the passions of individuals and nations are wastefully
squandered.
Philosophy should make us know the ends of life, and the
elements in life that have value on their own account. However
our freedom may be limited in the causal sphere, we need
admit no limitations to our freedom in the sphere of values:
what we judge good on its own account we may continue to
judge good, without regard to anything but our own feeling.
Philosophy cannot itself determine the ends of life, but it can
free us from the tyranny of prejudice and from distortions due
to a narrow view. Love, beauty, knowledge, and joy of life:
these things retain their lustre however wide our purview. And
if philosophy can help us to feel the value of these things, it will
have played its parts in man’s collective work of bringing light
into a world of darkness.
Announcements of other volumes in this series, and a complete catalogue of Norton Books sent on request
W · W · NORTON & COMPANY, INC.
70 Fifth Avenue New York
Hyphenation, and spelling were made
consistent when a predominant preference was found
in the original book; otherwise they were not changed.
Original text mostly placed commas and periods
after closing quotation marks, but occasionally
placed them before closing quotation marks. This
inconsistency has not been changed here.
Simple typographical errors were corrected; unbalanced
quotation marks were remedied when the change was
obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.
Footnotes have been sequentially renumbered and placed just below
the paragraphs that reference them.
The index was not checked for proper alphabetization
or correct page references.
Page 207: “this is a causal word” originally
was printed as “this a a causal word”; changed here by Transcriber.